0625 Paper 2 2018-2023

CAMBRIDGE
Assessment International Education
20-20

MCQs Paper
P2
(Extended)
IGCY3439
Rs: 2600/-
Ring Bind
Legal Advisor
CAIE IGCSE Physics 3 MCQs Paper 2
Cambridge International Examinations

Cambridge International General Certificate of Secondary Education
PHYSICS 0625/22
Paper 2 Multiple Choice (Extended) February/March 2018
45 minutes
Additional Materials: Multiple Choice Answer Sheet
Soft clean eraser
*8385724903*
Soft pencil (type B or HB recommended)
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST
Write in soft pencil.

Do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid.
Write your name, Centre number and candidate number on the Answer Sheet in the spaces provided
unless this has been done for you.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
There are forty questions on this paper. Answer all questions. For each question there are four possible
answers A, B, C and D.
Choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate Answer Sheet.
Read the instructions on the Answer Sheet very carefully.
Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer.
Any rough working should be done in this booklet.
Electronic calculators may be used.
Take the weight of 1.0 kg to be 10 N (acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s2).
The syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.
This document consists of 15 printed pages and 1 blank page.
IB18 03_0625_22/4RP
© UCLES 2018 [Turn over
for Books and Binders Order: 03214567519 | 0315 4567519 | 03134567519

2
1 Which instrument is used to measure accurately the diameter of a thin metal wire?
A 30 cm ruler
B measuring tape
C metre rule
D micrometer screw gauge
2 A parachutist is falling through the air at terminal velocity.
Which statement about the parachutist is correct?
A Every force acting on the parachutist is equal to zero and his acceleration is equal to zero.
B Every force acting on the parachutist is equal to zero and his velocity is equal to zero.
C The resultant force acting on the parachutist is equal to zero and his acceleration is equal to
zero.
D The resultant force acting on the parachutist is equal to zero and his velocity is equal to zero.
3 The curved line on the graph shows the motion of a car.
12.0
speed
10.0
m/s
8.0
6.0
4.0
2.0
0
0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0
time / s
What is the acceleration of the car at the time of 4.0 s?
A 0.33 m / s2 B 0.44 m / s2 C 2.3 m / s2 D 3.0 m / s2
© UCLES 2018 0625/22/F/M/18

3
4 The diagram shows a bird in flight. The bird is flying in a horizontal direction to the right.
In which direction does air resistance act on the bird?
D B
5 The gravitational field strength on the Moon is 1.6 N / kg.
An astronaut has a mass of 75 kg.
What is the weight of the astronaut on the Moon?
A 47 N B 75 N C 120 N D 750 N
6 A measuring cylinder contains 30 cm3 of a liquid.
cm3
50
40
30
20
10
balance
Some more of the liquid is added until the liquid level reaches the 50 cm3 mark.
The reading on the balance increases by 30 g.
What is the density of the liquid?
A 0.60 g / cm3 B 0.67 g / cm3 C 1.5 g / cm3 D 1.7 g / cm3
© UCLES 2018 0625/22/F/M/18 [Turn over

4
7 A stone of mass 0.12 kg is fired from a catapult. The velocity of the stone changes from 0 to
5.0 m / s in 0.60 s.
What is the average resultant force acting on the stone while it is being fired?
A 1.0 N B 2.5 N C 3.6 N D 8.3 N
8 A uniform rod XY of weight 2.0 N has a length of 80 cm.
The rod is suspended by a thread 20 cm from end X. A weight of 5.0 N is suspended from end X.
thread
20 cm uniform rod
X Y
80 cm
5.0 N
A student hangs a 6.0 N weight on the rod so that it is in equilibrium.
What is the distance of the 6.0 N weight from end X?
A 6 cm B 10 cm C 26 cm D 30 cm
9 A wooden plank rests in equilibrium on two rocks on opposite sides of a narrow stream.
Three forces P, Q and R act on the plank.
P R
plank
How are the sizes of the forces related?
A P+Q=R
B P+R=Q
C P=Q=R
D P=Q+R
© UCLES 2018 0625/22/F/M/18

5
10 A ball of mass 0.16 kg is moving forwards at a speed of 0.50 m / s. A second ball of mass 0.10 kg
is stationary. The first ball strikes the second ball. The second ball moves forwards at a speed of
0.50 m / s.
What is the speed of the first ball after the collision?
A 0.0 m / s B 0.19 m / s C 0.31 m / s D 0.50 m / s
11 A ball is at rest at the top of a hill. It rolls down the hill. At the bottom of the hill the ball hits a wall
and stops.
Which energy changes occur?
A gravitational potential energy → internal energy → kinetic energy
B gravitational potential energy → kinetic energy → internal energy
C kinetic energy → gravitational potential energy → internal energy
D kinetic energy → internal energy → gravitational potential energy
12 A student cycles along a level road at a speed of 5.0 m / s.
The total mass of the student and bicycle is 120 kg.
The student applies the brakes and stops. The braking distance is 10 m.
What is the average braking force?
A 150 N B 300 N C 15 000 N D 30 000 N

13 A water manometer is connected to a gas supply.
gas Q
supply
water
There is a gas leak and the pressure of the gas supply falls.
What happens to the water level at P and what happens to the water level at Q?
water level at P water level at Q
A falls falls
B falls rises
C rises falls
D rises rises

6
14 A submarine is 20 m below the surface of the sea. The pressure due to the water at this depth
is P.
On another day, the submarine is 26 m below the surface of fresh water.
The density of sea water is 1.3 times the density of fresh water.
What is the pressure due to the fresh water at a depth of 26 m?
A P B P C 1.3 P D 1.7 P
1.3
15 A cylinder with a tap contains a fixed mass of gas X. The gas is contained by a piston which can
move freely towards or away from the tap.
atmosphere
gas X
tap closed
piston
cylinder
When the tap is opened, the piston moves slightly to the right, towards the tap.
atmosphere
gas X
tap open
What can be deduced about the pressure of gas X?
before opening tap after opening tap
A less than atmospheric pressure more than atmospheric pressure

B same as atmospheric pressure more than atmospheric pressure
C more than atmospheric pressure less than atmospheric pressure
D more than atmospheric pressure same as atmospheric pressure
16 Liquid evaporates from a beaker.

What happens to the temperature of the remaining liquid and how does this temperature change
affect the rate of evaporation?
rate of
temperature
evaporation
A decreases decreases
B decreases increases
C increases decreases
D increases increases
© UCLES 2018 0625/22/F/M/18

8
17 Which quantity does not change when there is an increase in temperature?
A the density of a steel block C the length of an iron rod
B the diameter of the hole in a metal nut D the mass of a metal coin
18 A thermocouple is used to measure temperature.
Which is an advantage of using a thermocouple instead of a liquid-in-glass thermometer?
A It can measure temperature in the range –10 °C to 110 °C.

B It can measure temperature that changes rapidly.
C It has a linear scale.
D It is more sensitive.
19 A block of copper has a mass of 2.0 kg.
The block of copper absorbs 12 000 J thermal energy.
The specific heat capacity of copper is 385 J / (kg °C).
What is the temperature rise of the copper?
A 15.6 °C B 31.2 °C C 46.8 °C D 62.4 °C
20 A teacher demonstrates an experiment to a class. A boiling tube is filled with water and some ice
cubes are trapped at the bottom of the tube. The teacher then heats the boiling tube in the
position shown until the water at the top boils.
The ice does not melt.
What does this demonstrate?

water
A Water is a good conductor of thermal energy.
B Water is a good convector of thermal energy. ice heat
C Water is a poor conductor of thermal energy. metal mesh

D Water is a poor convector of thermal energy.
21 A metal cup has a plastic lining. The cup is filled with hot water and held by a hand.
Which statement about the transfer of thermal energy from the water to the hand is correct?
A In the plastic, no energy is transferred directly between adjacent molecules.

B In the plastic, fast moving molecules interact with free electrons, making the electrons move
very quickly.
C In the metal, energy is transferred only by electrons.
D In the metal, energy is transferred by electrons and by vibrations of the lattice.
© UCLES 2018 0625/22/F/M/18

9
22 Which row shows an example of a transverse wave and an example of a longitudinal wave?
transverse longitudinal
A light radio
B radio sound
C sound water
D water light
23 A wave passes through a gap and diffraction causes the wave to spread out.
Which wave spreads out the most?
A large wavelength through a gap slightly larger than the wavelength

B large wavelength through a gap much smaller than the wavelength
C small wavelength through a gap much larger than the wavelength
D small wavelength through a gap much smaller than the wavelength
24 An object is placed before a plane mirror as shown.
A student views the image of the object in the mirror from point P.
Where does she see the image?
object B C D
mirror
25 Light has a speed of 1.24 × 108 m / s in diamond.
What is the refractive index of diamond?
A 0.41 B 1.54 C 2.42 D 3.72
26 Which statement describes monochromatic light?
A light that does not diffract

B light that has a single frequency
C light that spreads out when shone through a glass prism
D light that travels at the same speed in all materials

11
27 Both the amplitude and the frequency of a sound wave decrease.
What happens to the sound heard?
A The sound is louder and has a higher pitch.

B The sound is louder and has a lower pitch.
C The sound is quieter and has a higher pitch.
D The sound is quieter and has a lower pitch.
28 A sound wave is travelling through water.
What is a possible speed for the wave?
A 150 m / s B 300 m / s C 1500 m / s D 5000 m / s
29 An electromagnet is used to remove a splinter from an eye.
What material is the splinter made from?
A aluminium
B glass
C iron
D wood
30 A metal conductor is connected to a battery.
Which statement describes the current in the metal conductor?
A It is a flow of electrons from the negative to the positive terminal.

B It is a flow of electrons from the positive to the negative terminal.
C It is a flow of protons from the negative to the positive terminal.
D It is a flow of protons from the positive to the negative terminal.
31 In an electric circuit, 40 C of electric charge pass a point in 5.0 s.
What is the current in the circuit?
A 0.13 A B 8.0 A C 45 A D 200 A
32 There is a current of 5.0 A in a resistor.
The potential difference (p.d.) across the resistor is 24 V.
How much energy is transferred in the resistor in 1.0 minute?
A 5.0 J B 120 J C 290 J D 7200 J

12
33 The diagram shows a circuit.
lamp 1
lamp 2
Switch S is closed.
Which lamps light?
A lamp 1 only
B lamp 2 only
C lamp 1 and lamp 2
D neither lamp 1 nor lamp 2
34 A circuit contains four ammeters and three resistors with different values.
Which ammeter shows the largest reading?
A A D
10 Ω
A
B A
20 Ω
30 Ω
A
C
© UCLES 2018 0625/22/F/M/18

13
35 The diagrams show pairs of circuits containing logic gates.
In which diagram does the lower circuit of the pair not behave in the same way as the upper
circuit?
A B
C D
36 The current in a coil produces a magnetic field around it, as shown.
– +
The magnitude of the potential difference across the coil is increased and its direction is
reversed.
What happens to the magnetic field?
A The lines become closer together and the right-hand end becomes a south pole.
B The lines become closer together and the right-hand end remains a north pole.
C The lines become further apart and the right-hand end becomes a south pole.
D The lines become further apart and the right-hand end remains a north pole.

14
23
37 The notation for an isotope of sodium is 11 Na .
Which row gives the composition of a neutral atom of this isotope of sodium?
number of number of number of

protons neutrons electrons
A 11 12 11
B 11 12 12
C 11 23 11
D 12 11 12
38 The radioactive isotope of hydrogen undergoes beta decay to the isotope 32 He .
What is the nuclide notation for the hydrogen isotope?

1 2 3 4
A 1H B 1H C 1H D 2H
39 When measuring the emissions from a radioactive rock brought into the laboratory, a teacher
mentions that background radiation must be taken into account.
What is this background radiation?
A infra-red radiation from warm objects in the laboratory
B infra-red radiation from the Sun
C ionising radiation from the radioactive rock brought into the laboratory
D ionising radiation in the laboratory when the radioactive rock is not present
40 Solid caesium-137 decays by the emission of a β-particle to form solid barium-137, which emits a
γ-ray.
The barium-137 undergoes no further decay. The half-life of caesium-137 is 33 years.
A block of pure caesium-137 has a mass of 2.0 µg.
The diagram shows a radiation detector a distance of 5 cm from the block. The detector registers
a count rate of 2000 counts / second.
detector
counter
block
5 cm
Which statement is not correct?
A After 33 years, the mass of the block is 1.0 µg.
B After 66 years, the sample contains 1.5 µg of barium.

C With 5 cm of lead between the block and the detector, the count rate is just above
background level.
D With 2 mm of aluminium between the block and the detector, the count rate is reduced
significantly.
© UCLES 2018 0625/22/F/M/18

PHYSICS 0625 Physics March 2018
Paper 0625/22
Multiple Choice (Extended)
Question Question
Key Key
Number Number
1 D 21 D
2 C 22 B
3 D 23 A
4 D 24 D
5 C 25 C
6 C 26 B
7 A 27 D
8 D 28 C
9 B 29 C
10 B 30 A
11 B 31 B
12 A 32 D
13 C 33 A
14 B 34 D
15 D 35 D
16 A 36 A
17 D 37 A
18 B 38 C
19 A 39 D
20 C 40 A
for Books and Binders Order: 03214567519 | 0315 4567519 | 03134567519 © 2018

PHYSICS 0625/21
Paper 2 Multiple Choice (Extended) May/June 2018
45 minutes
Soft clean eraser
*7516764361*

IB18 06_0625_21/3RP

2
1 A length of cotton is measured between two points on a ruler.
cotton
cm 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
When the length of cotton is wound closely around a pen, it goes round six times.
six turns of cotton
pen
What is the distance once round the pen?
A 2.2 cm B 2.6 cm C 13.2 cm D 15.6 cm
2 When does an object falling vertically through the air reach terminal velocity?
A when the acceleration of the object becomes negative

B when the acceleration of the object is equal to g
C when the air resistance equals the weight of the object
D when the air resistance is greater than the weight of the object
3 A car is moving along a straight, level road, with a constant acceleration.
Which graph shows the motion of the car?
A B
distance distance
0 0
0 time 0 time
C D
speed speed
0 0
0 time 0 time
© UCLES 2018 0625/21/M/J/18

4
4 Diagram 1 shows a beam balance. A beaker with a wire loop balances the standard masses.
The beaker is then removed and hung from a spring. The spring extends by 5.0 cm, as in
diagram 2.
diagram 1 diagram 2
beam beaker with spring

standard balance wire loop
masses
attached
beaker with
wire loop
attached
The experiment is repeated with the same apparatus on the Moon, where the acceleration of free
fall is less than on Earth.
Which statement describes what happens on the Moon?
A The beam balance is balanced and the spring extends by 5.0 cm.
B The beam balance is balanced and the spring extends by less than 5.0 cm.
C The right-hand balance pan is higher and the spring extends by 5.0 cm.
D The right-hand balance pan is higher and the spring extends by less than 5.0 cm.
5 An object always has mass but does not always have weight.
What must be present and acting on the mass for it to have weight?
A a gravitational field
B a set of scales
C displaced water
D friction due to air resistance
6 A force acting on a moving ball causes its motion to change. This force stays constant.
What makes the force produce a greater change in the motion of the ball?
A decreasing the total mass of the ball

B increasing the temperature of the ball
C using a ball with a hollow centre but the same mass
D using a different material for the ball so that it has a lower density but the same mass
© UCLES 2018 0625/21/M/J/18

5
7 A balloon and a mass are attached to a rod that is pivoted at P.
balloon
45 40 35 30 25 20 15 10 5
P
cm
mass
The balloon is filled with helium, a gas less dense than air, so that it applies an upward force on
the rod.
The rod is horizontal and stationary.
Which action causes the rod to rotate clockwise?
A Move both the balloon and mass 10 cm to the left.

B Move both the balloon and mass 10 cm to the right.
C Move both the balloon and mass to the 25 cm mark.
D Move the balloon to the 20 cm mark and the mass to the 30 cm mark.
8 A car is moving in a straight line on a level road. Its engine provides a forward force on the car. A
second force of equal size acts on the car due to resistive forces.
Which statement describes what happens?
A The car changes direction.

B The car moves at a constant speed.
C The car slows down.
D The car speeds up.
9 Which expression gives the momentum of an object?
A mass × acceleration
B mass × gravitational field strength
C mass × velocity
D 1
2 × mass × (velocity)2
© UCLES 2018 0625/21/M/J/18 [Turn over

6
10 As energy is transferred into different forms, it eventually becomes dissipated.
What does this mean?
A All the energy disappears.

B The energy finally changes into every possible form of energy.
C The energy spreads out among the objects and their surroundings.
D The total amount of energy becomes less.
11 A ball of mass 1.2 kg is dropped from a height of 30 m. As it falls, 25% of its initial gravitational
potential energy is transferred to thermal energy.
What is the kinetic energy of the ball just before it hits the ground?
A 27 J B 90 J C 270 J D 360 J
12 A girl hangs by her hands from a bar in the gymnasium. She pulls herself up until her chin is level
with the bar.
The mass of the girl is 48 kg.
She pulls herself up through a distance of 0.25 m.
She does this in 2.0 s.
What is the useful power she uses to pull herself up?
A 6.0 W B 24 W C 60 W D 240 W
13 Four identical beakers are filled with equal volumes of liquids P or Q, as shown. Liquid P is more
dense than liquid Q.
At which point is the pressure the least?
liquid P B liquid Q D
A C
14 An oil tank has a base of area 2.5 m2 and is filled with oil to a depth of 1.2 m.
The density of the oil is 800 kg / m3.
What is the force exerted on the base of the tank due to the oil?
A 960 N B 2400 N C 9600 N D 24 000 N
© UCLES 2018 0625/21/M/J/18

7
15 When molecules of a gas rebound from a wall of a container, the wall experiences a pressure.
What is the cause of this pressure?
A the change in energy of the molecules

B the change in momentum of the molecules
C the change in power of the molecules
D the change in speed of the molecules
16 A student wishes to calibrate a mercury-in-glass thermometer with a °C scale.
Which values should she use for the lower fixed point and for the upper fixed point?
lower fixed point upper fixed point
A melting point of ice boiling point of mercury

B melting point of ice boiling point of water
C melting point of mercury boiling point of mercury
D melting point of mercury boiling point of water
17 Which statements about boiling and about evaporation are both correct?
boiling evaporation
A takes place only at the surface takes place only at the surface
B takes place only at the surface takes place throughout the liquid
C takes place throughout the liquid takes place only at the surface
D takes place throughout the liquid takes place throughout the liquid
18 On a cold day, a metal front-door knob X and a similar plastic knob Y are at the same
temperature.
Why does X feel cooler to the touch than Y?
A X convects thermal energy better than Y.

B X is a better thermal conductor than Y.
C X is a better insulator than Y.
D X is a better radiator of thermal energy than Y.

8
19 Light travels at a speed of 2.0 × 108 m / s in a glass block.
In the glass, the wavelength of the light is 4.0 × 10–7 m.
What is the frequency of the light?
A 2.0 × 10–15 Hz
B 1.3 × 10–2 Hz
C 80 Hz
D 5.0 × 1014 Hz
20 Which arrow on the graph shows the amplitude of the wave?
displacement
B
A C
0
0 distance
21 Scout P signals to scout Q on the other side of a valley by using a mirror to reflect the Sun’s light.
Sun’s
scout P light
mirror
scout Q
Which mirror position allows the Sun’s light to be reflected to scout Q?
A B C D
mirror Sun’s Sun’s Sun’s Sun’s
light light light light
© UCLES 2018 0625/21/M/J/18

9
22 A prism is made from transparent plastic. In this plastic, light travels at 0.80 c, where c is its speed
in air. Light enters one face of the prism at right-angles as shown.
NOT TO
SCALE
The light just escapes from the sloping face of the prism.
What is angle θ ?
A 37° B 39° C 51° D 53°
23 The Sun emits infra-red radiation and light.
Light from the Sun reaches the Earth in 8 minutes.
Which row gives correct information about the infra-red radiation?
wavelength of time taken for infra-red

infra-red radiation radiation to reach Earth
A longer than wavelength of light 8 minutes

B longer than wavelength of light much less than 8 minutes
C shorter than wavelength of light 8 minutes
D shorter than wavelength of light much more than 8 minutes
24 A dolphin has a range of audible frequencies of 150 Hz–150 kHz.
Which range of frequencies can be heard both by humans with good hearing and by dolphins?
A 20 Hz–150 Hz
B 20 Hz–150 kHz
C 20 kHz–150 kHz
D 150 Hz–20 kHz

10
25 A permanent magnet is placed close to a bar of soft iron.
permanent
S N P Q soft iron bar
magnet
What are the polarities of end P and of end Q?
end P end Q
A N N
B N S
C S N
D S S
26 A steel magnet is placed inside a coil of wire.
Which method is used to demagnetise the magnet?
A connect the coil to an a.c. power supply

B connect the coil to an a.c. power supply and slowly remove the magnet from the coil
C connect the coil to a d.c. power supply
D connect the coil to a d.c. power supply and slowly remove the magnet from the coil
27 The electromotive force (e.m.f.) of a rechargeable battery is 6.0 V.
A 6.0 J is the maximum energy the battery can provide in 1.0 s.

B 6.0 J is the total energy the battery can provide before it has to be recharged.
C 6.0 J of energy is provided by the battery to drive a charge of 1.0 C around a complete circuit.
D 6.0 J of energy is provided by the battery to drive a current of 1.0 A around a complete circuit.
28 A student measures the potential difference across a device and the current in the device.
Which calculation gives the resistance of the device?
A current + potential difference
B current ÷ potential difference
C potential difference ÷ current
D potential difference × current
© UCLES 2018 0625/21/M/J/18

11
29 A water heater is connected to a 230 V supply and there is a current of 26 A in the heater. It takes
20 minutes to heat the water to the required temperature.
How much energy is supplied by the heater?
A 6.0 × 103 J B 1.0 × 104 J C 1.2 × 105 J D 7.2 × 106 J
30 Which electrical symbol represents a diode?
A B C D
31 A student sets up this circuit.
What is the purpose of the circuit?
A to allow a lamp to be made dimmer or brighter as required

B to amplify the sound of a voice
C to light a lamp in the dark
D to sound a bell when the temperature rises
32 The diagram shows two voltmeters P and Q connected to a potential divider.
V voltmeter P
X
V voltmeter Q
The sliding connection at point X is moved towards the top of the diagram.
What happens to the reading on P and to the reading on Q?
reading on P reading on Q

12
33 The diagram represents a digital circuit using a NOR gate and an AND gate.
X NOR
AND
Y
output
What is the truth table for this circuit?
A B C D
X Y Z output X Y Z output X Y Z output X Y Z output

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1
0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0
0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
0 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1
1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1
1 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1
1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1
34 Which statement about electromagnetic induction is correct?
A A strong magnet that is held stationary near a stationary conductor causes a greater effect
than a weak magnet.
B The effect occurs when a magnet and a conductor are both moved with the same speed and
in the same direction.
C The effect occurs when a magnet is moved away from a nearby conductor.
D The effect only occurs when a magnet is moved towards a conductor.
35 The diagram shows a current-carrying conductor in a magnetic field.
Which arrow shows the direction of the force acting on the conductor?
S D B N
© UCLES 2018 0625/21/M/J/18

13
36 Power losses in transmission cables are reduced by increasing the transmission voltage.
What is the explanation for this reduction?
A The current decreases, reducing thermal energy losses.

B The current increases, increasing the flow of charge.
C The resistance of the cable increases, reducing the current.
D The resistance of the cable decreases.
37 In the atomic model, an atom consists of a central mass, orbited by much smaller particles.
orbiting central
particle mass
What is the name of the central mass and of the orbiting particles?
central mass orbiting particles
A neutron α-particles
B neutron electrons
C nucleus α-particles
D nucleus electrons
38 Nuclear fusion is a reaction that takes place in stars.
Which row describes this reaction?
action of atomic nuclei energy

A an atomic nucleus splits into absorbed
two or more smaller nuclei
B an atomic nucleus splits into released
C atomic nuclei join together absorbed
to form a larger nucleus
D atomic nuclei join together released

15
39 The diagram shows emissions from a source passing into the electric field between two charged
plates.
+ + + + + + + + + +
source
– – – – – – – – – –
What is emitted by this source?
A neutrons and γ-rays only
B α-particles and β-particles only
C α-particles and γ-rays only
D β-particles and γ-rays only
40 The graph shows how the count rate registered by a counter near to a sample of a radioactive
isotope changes over a period of a few days. The background count rate is 5 counts per minute.
50
count rate
40
counts / minute
30
20
10
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
time / days
What is the half-life of the isotope?
A 2.0 days B 2.5 days C 3.0 days D 4.0 days
© UCLES 2018 0625/21/M/J/18

0625 Physics June 2018

PHYSICS
Paper 0625/21
Question Question
Key Key
Number Number
1 A 21 A
2 C 22 D
3 D 23 A
4 B 24 D
5 A 25 C
6 A 26 B
7 B 27 C
8 B 28 C
9 C 29 D
10 C 30 B
11 C 31 D
12 C 32 B
13 D 33 B
14 D 34 C
15 B 35 A
16 B 36 A
17 C 37 D
18 B 38 D
19 D 39 C
20 B 40 A


PHYSICS 0625/22
45 minutes
Soft clean eraser
*7373168877*

This document consists of 14 printed pages and 2 blank pages.
IB18 06_0625_22/3RP

2
cotton
cm 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
six turns of cotton

pen
A 2.2 cm B 2.6 cm C 13.2 cm D 15.6 cm

© UCLES 2018 0625/22/M/J/18

3
3 A ball is dropped in an evacuated tube. A series of photographs is taken at equal time intervals
from the time of release. Another ball of the same size but twice the mass is also dropped in the
same evacuated tube and photographed.
Which diagram shows the motion of the heavier ball?
heavier ball (mass ×2)

first ball A B C D
4 Which statement about the mass and the weight of an object is correct?
A They are both affected by changes in the acceleration of free fall.

B They are both forces.
C They have different units.
D Weight is calculated by dividing mass by the acceleration of free fall.
5 Which statement about the mass of an object is correct?
A It is equal to the density divided by the volume.

B It is equal to weight multiplied by the gravitational field strength.
C It is the effect of a gravitational field on the object.
D It is the property that resists a change in velocity.

4
6 An object decelerates from 25.0 m / s to 5.0 m / s in a time of 4.0 s.
It has a mass of 50 kg.
What is the resultant force on the object?
A 0.63 N B 10 N C 250 N D 4000 N
7 A beam is pivoted at one end, as shown.
40 cm beam
X
pivot
6.0 N
The beam weighs 6.0 N and its weight acts at a point X, 40 cm from the pivot.
A force of 4.0 N is applied to the beam causing it to balance horizontally.
In which direction and where is the 4.0 N force applied?
A downwards at 20 cm to the left of X

B downwards at 20 cm to the right of X
C upwards at 20 cm to the left of X
D upwards at 20 cm to the right of X
8 A spacecraft is travelling in space with no resultant force and no resultant moment acting on it.
Which statement about the spacecraft is correct?
A Its direction is changing.

B It is in equilibrium.
C Its speed is decreasing.
D Its speed is increasing.
9 A car of mass 1000 kg travelling at 8.0 m / s collides with a lorry of mass 3000 kg that is travelling
at 2.0 m / s in the same direction. After colliding, the two vehicles stick together.
What is their speed after the collision?
A 2.0 m / s B 2.5 m / s C 3.5 m / s D 5.0 m / s
© UCLES 2018 0625/22/M/J/18

5
10 What is the main process by which energy is released in the Sun?
A α-decay
B β-decay
C nuclear fission
D nuclear fusion
11 The work done W by a force is related to the magnitude F of the force and the distance d moved
in the direction of the force.
Which equation for W is correct?
A W=d÷F
B W=d+F
C W=F÷d
D W=F×d
12 A crane on a construction site lifts concrete beams.
The useful work done by the crane is 4000 kJ in a time of 160 s.
What is the useful output power of the crane?
A 0.04 kW B 25 W C 25 kW D 640 kW
13 A submarine is in water of density 1.0 × 103 kg / m3. The submarine changes its depth. This causes
the pressure on it to change by 0.10 MPa.
What is the change in depth of the submarine?
A 0.10 m B 10 m C 100 m D 1000 m
A 960 N B 2400 N C 9600 N D 24 000 N

6


17 In an experiment, an object is heated.
The data from the experiment is shown.
● The energy transferred to the object is 3.0 kJ.

● The mass of the object is 2.0 kg.
● The rise in temperature of the object is 10 °C.
● The specific heat capacity of the object is 150 J / (kg °C).
What is the thermal capacity of the object?
A 30 J / °C B 300 J / °C C 3000 J / °C D 9000 J / °C
18 Four thermometers, with their bulbs painted different colours, are placed at equal distances from
a radiant heater.
Which thermometer shows the slowest temperature rise when the heater is first switched on?
A matt black
B matt white
C shiny black
D shiny white
© UCLES 2018 0625/22/M/J/18

7
19 A tank contains water. Ripples are produced on the surface of the water.
What causes the ripples to refract?
A The cold water in the tank is replaced by warm water.

B The ripples change speed as they move from deep to shallow water.
C The ripples hit the wall of the tank.
D The ripples pass through a narrow gap.
A 2.0 × 10–15 Hz
B 1.3 × 10–2 Hz
C 80 Hz
D 5.0 × 1014 Hz
Sun’s
scout P light
mirror
scout Q
A B C D

8
22 A scientist describes light as being monochromatic.
What does this tell you about the light?
A It has a single frequency.

B It has more than one wavelength.
C It travels at a single speed in a single direction.
D It travels at different speeds in different directions.
23 Which statement is not correct?
A The speed of long-wavelength infra-red radiation in a vacuum is greater than that of short-
wavelength ultraviolet light.
B The speed of microwaves in air is approximately 3.0 × 108 m / s.
C The speed of γ-rays emitted from a sample of cobalt-60 is 3.0 × 105 km / s.

D The X-rays emitted in a supernova explosion reach the Earth at the same time as the visible
light emitted.
24 A siren is emitting a sound. As time passes, the sound becomes louder and higher pitched.
What is happening to the amplitude and to the frequency of the emitted sound wave?
amplitude frequency
A decreasing decreasing
B decreasing increasing
C increasing decreasing
D increasing increasing
permanent
magnet
end P end Q
A N N
B N S
C S N
D S S
© UCLES 2018 0625/22/M/J/18

9
26 Which method is used to demagnetise a bar magnet?
A lower it into water

B heat it with a Bunsen burner
C place it in a metal box
D suspend it in a sling
27 What is the electromotive force (e.m.f.) of a cell?
A the amount of charge that passes through the cell per unit time
B the energy gained per unit charge as charge passes through the cell
C the total amount of charge flowing through the cell
D the total energy stored in the cell
29 A piece of wire is 40 cm long and has a diameter of 2.0 mm.
Its resistance is 0.30 Ω.
Which wire of the same material has a resistance of 0.15 Ω?
length / cm diameter / mm
A 20 1.0
B 20 4.0
C 80 1.0
D 80 4.0

10
30 A diode is used as a rectifier.
What is the purpose of a rectifier?
A to allow current to pass in either direction

B to change alternating current into direct current
C to switch off the circuit in case of a large current
D to provide an efficient source of light

V voltmeter P
X
V voltmeter Q
© UCLES 2018 0625/22/M/J/18

11
33 The circuit shown contains two gates.
Which truth table describes the operation of the circuit?
A B C D
P Q R P Q R P Q R P Q R
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1
0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0
1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1
34 In an a.c. generator, a coil is rotated in a magnetic field and an electromotive force (e.m.f.) is
induced in the coil.
In which position of the coil does the e.m.f. have the largest value?
A B
coil coil
N S N S
C D
coil coil
N S N S

12
35 Wire P carries a current directed perpendicularly into the page. A compass is placed at point Q
which is close to wire P.
The magnetic field at Q due to the current is very much larger than the magnetic field of the
Earth.
In which direction does the North pole of the compass point?
P
B C
Q
A D
36 A transformer has Np turns in the primary coil and Ns turns in the secondary coil.
Which row gives the values of Np and Ns for a transformer that steps up a voltage of 1200 V to
36 000 V?
Np Ns
A 2 000 60 000
B 2 000 600 000
C 60 000 2 000
D 600 000 2 000
orbiting central
particle mass
B neutron electrons
D nucleus electrons
© UCLES 2018 0625/22/M/J/18

13
218
38 An isotope of polonium has the nuclide notation 84 Po .
A nucleus of this isotope decays by emitting an α-particle. A β-particle is then emitted to form
nuclide X.
What is the notation for nuclide X?

214 213 213 214
A 81 X B 82 X C 83 X D 83 X
39 The table compares the penetrating abilities and ionising effects of α-radiation and of γ-radiation.
Which row is correct?
least most
penetrating ionising
A α α
B α γ
C γ α
D γ γ
50
count rate
40
counts / minute
30
20
10
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
time / days

PHYSICS 0625 Physics June 2018
Paper 0625/22
Question Question
Key Key
Number Number
1 A 21 A
2 C 22 A
3 B 23 A
4 C 24 D
5 D 25 C
6 C 26 B
7 D 27 B
8 B 28 C
9 C 29 D
10 D 30 B
11 D 31 D
12 C 32 B
13 B 33 D
14 D 34 A
15 B 35 A
16 B 36 A
17 B 37 D
18 D 38 D
19 B 39 A
20 D 40 A


PHYSICS 0625/23
45 minutes
Soft clean eraser
*9561144955*

This document consists of 16 printed pages.
IB18 06_0625_23/4RP

2
cotton
cm 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
six turns of cotton

pen
A 2.2 cm B 2.6 cm C 13.2 cm D 15.6 cm

3 A sprinter runs a 100 m race in a straight line. The table shows how his speed changes with time
for the first 5.0 s of the race.
speed
0 1.7 4.1 5.7 6.5 6.8
m/s
time / s 0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0
What is the average acceleration of the sprinter between time 2.0 s and time 3.0 s?
A 1.6 m / s2 B 1.9 m / s2 C 4.1 m / s2 D 5.7 m / s2
4 A person steps onto a bathroom scales. The bathroom scales records both mass and weight.
Which row shows the readings on the scales?
mass weight
A 60 N 600 kg
B 60 kg 600 N
C 600 kg 60 N
D 600 N 60 kg
© UCLES 2018 0625/23/M/J/18

3
5 An object has a weight of 7600 N in a gravitational field of strength 100 N / kg.
What is the mass of the object?
A 76 kg B 760 N C 7600 g D 76 000 N
6 A load is hung from a steel wire. The load is increased.
The length of the wire increases until the limit of proportionality is reached.
The load is now increased slightly.
What happens?
A The extension of the wire increases and the wire no longer obeys Hooke’s law.
B The extension of the wire decreases and the wire no longer obeys Hooke’s law.
C The extension of the wire increases and it obeys Hooke’s law.
D The extension of the wire decreases and it obeys Hooke’s law.
7 The diagram shows a uniform metre rule pivoted at the 30 cm mark.
metre rule
0 cm 30 cm 70 cm 100 cm
pivot
6.0 N 2.0 N
The rule balances when a weight of 6.0 N is hanging from the zero mark and a weight of 2.0 N is
hanging from the 70 cm mark.
What is the weight of the rule?
A 2.0 N B 5.0 N C 6.0 N D 13.0 N
8 An astronaut orbits the Earth in a space station.
Which is a vector quantity?
A the mass of the astronaut C the temperature inside the satellite

B the speed of the satellite D the weight of the astronaut
9 A visitor to a fairground throws a soft object of mass 0.12 kg at a coconut of mass 0.48 kg. The
soft object stops moving when it hits the coconut. In order to dislodge the coconut, it must be
made to move at 0.10 m/s.
What is the minimum speed with which the visitor should throw the soft object in order to dislodge
the coconut?
A 0.20 m/s B 0.40 m/s C 2.0 m/s D 4.0 m/s

4
10 An aircraft with a mass of 300 000 kg is flying at an altitude of 2000 m with a speed of 100 m / s.
What is the kinetic energy of the aircraft?
A 1.5 × 104 kJ B 1.5 × 106 kJ C 3.0 × 106 kJ D 6.0 × 106 kJ
11 Which method of drying clothes has the least impact on the environment?
A Evaporate the water in them in an electrically heated tumble dryer.

B Hang them on a washing line in direct sunlight.
C Remove the water from them in an electric spin dryer.
D Suspend them close to a coal fire.
12 The vertical displacement of a mass of 0.20 kg changes with time. The graph shows how this
displacement changes.
displacement
/ cm
2
0
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2 1.4
time / s
–1
–2
–3
At which rate does it gain gravitational potential energy as it moves upwards?
A 0.025 W B 0.050 W C 0.20 W D 0.40 W
13 A simple barometer includes a column of mercury.
Which property of this column of mercury is used to give a measurement of atmospheric

pressure?
A its cross-sectional area B its height

C its temperature D its thermal capacity
© UCLES 2018 0625/23/M/J/18

5
A 960 N B 2400 N C 9600 N D 24 000 N

16 Two liquid-in-glass thermometers P and Q contain the same volume of mercury and have
capillary tubes of the same length.
Thermometer P has a capillary tube with a smaller diameter than thermometer Q.
Which thermometer has the greater range and which has the greater sensitivity?
greater greater
range sensitivity
A P P
B P Q
C Q P
D Q Q


7
18 The diagram shows a pan used for cooking food.
handle of pan
base of pan
Which row is correct for the materials used to make the base and the handle of the pan?
base of pan handle of pan
A good thermal conductor good thermal conductor

B good thermal conductor poor thermal conductor
C poor thermal conductor good thermal conductor
D poor thermal conductor poor thermal conductor
19 The diagram shows a wave.
2.0
displacement
/ cm 1.0
0
0 4.0 8.0 12.0 16.0 20.0 24.0 28.0
–1.0 distance
/ cm
–2.0
amplitude of wavelength of
the wave / cm the wave / cm
A 1.0 4.0
B 1.0 8.0
C 2.0 4.0
D 2.0 8.0

8
A 2.0 × 10–15 Hz
B 1.3 × 10–2 Hz
C 80 Hz
D 5.0 × 1014 Hz
Sun’s
scout P light
mirror
scout Q
A B C D
© UCLES 2018 0625/23/M/J/18

9
22 Images formed by lenses and mirrors can either be described as real or as virtual.
Which row describes real and virtual images of a point object?
real images virtual images

A formed where light rays an image in a plane mirror is an
meet example of a virtual image
B formed where light rays can be projected onto a screen
meet
C formed from where light rays an image in a plane mirror is an
appear to diverge example of a virtual image
D formed from where light rays can be projected onto a screen
appear to diverge
23 The diagram shows the air molecules in part of a sound wave at a particular moment in time.
A Earlier, there was compression at X.

B Later, there will be a rarefaction at X.
C This part of the wave is travelling horizontally across the page.
D This part of the wave is travelling towards the top of the page.

10
24 The diagram shows the ranges of human hearing and of ultrasound waves.
range of
human hearing ultrasound
0 101 102 103 104 105 106

2 × 101 2 × 104
To which characteristic of sound waves do the numbers on the diagram refer?
A amplitude in cm
B frequency in Hz
C speed in metres / second
D wavelength in metres
permanent
magnet
end P end Q
A N N
B N S
C S N
D S S
26 Which method is used to demagnetise a magnet?
A cool it in a freezer
B drop it into a beaker of water
C place it inside a coil carrying a direct current
D strike it with a hammer
© UCLES 2018 0625/23/M/J/18

11
27 Two power supplies are connected in separate circuits. Both power supplies provide the same
magnitude current.
Power supply P has an electromotive force (e.m.f.) of 1.5 V and power supply Q has an e.m.f. of
3.0 V.
Which statements are correct?
1 Source Q supplies twice the charge per unit time.

2 Source Q supplies twice the energy per unit charge.
3 Source Q supplies twice the energy per unit time.
A 1, 2 and 3 B 1 and 2 only C 1 and 3 only D 2 and 3 only
29 An electricity meter records that 200 MJ of electrical energy are drawn from the 240 V mains
supply in a 24 hour period.
What is the average rate of electrical charge passing through the meter?
A 9.6 C / h B 580 C / h C 35 kC / h D 0.83 MC / h
30 A 3.0 Ω resistor is connected in parallel with a 4.0 Ω resistor.
3.0 Ω
4.0 Ω
What is the resistance of this combination?

A 0.14 Ω B 0.58 Ω C 1.7 Ω D 7.0 Ω

12

V voltmeter P
X
V voltmeter Q
© UCLES 2018 0625/23/M/J/18

13
33 The diagram shows a logic circuit with inputs X and Y.
X
Y
Q
The output is Q.
Which truth table is correct?
A B
X Y Q X Y Q
0 0 0 0 0 1
0 1 1 0 1 0
1 0 1 1 0 0
1 1 0 1 1 1
C D
X Y Q X Y Q
0 0 1 0 0 0
0 1 1 0 1 0
1 0 1 1 0 0
1 1 1 1 1 0
34 A wire connected to a resistor is moved in a magnetic field. A current is induced in the direction
shown.
In which direction is the wire moved?
wire
A
D B
N S R
C
induced
current

14
35 The diagram shows a transformer.
core
primary coil
secondary coil
Which materials are the most suitable for the core and for the coils?
core material coil material
A copper copper
B copper iron
C iron copper
D iron iron
36 A solenoid is connected to a battery.
axis of
solenoid
solenoid
Which statement about the magnetic field at the centre of the solenoid is correct?
A The magnetic field along the axis is zero.
B The direction of the magnetic field is at an angle of 45° to the axis.

C The direction of the magnetic field is parallel to the axis.
D The direction of the magnetic field is perpendicular to the axis.
© UCLES 2018 0625/23/M/J/18

15
orbiting central
particle mass
B neutron electrons
D nucleus electrons
38 The radiation from a radioactive source passes between two metal plates, and is deflected as
shown in the diagram. Between the plates there is a magnetic field directed into the plane of the
paper, as indicated by the crosses.
× × × × × × × × × ×
× × × × × × × × × ×
Only one type of radiation is present.
Which situation is possible?
A The source emits alpha particles and there is an upwards electric field between the plates.
B The source emits alpha particles and there is no electric field between the plates.
C The source emits beta particles and there is an upwards electric field between the plates.
D The source emits gamma radiation and there is a downwards electric field between the
plates.

16
39 The nucleus of an isotope of nitrogen (N) absorbs a neutron. It then decays into an isotope of
carbon (C) and emits x.
1 14 14
0n + 7N → 6C + x
What is x?
A α-particle
B β-particle
C γ-radiation
D proton
50
count rate
40
counts / minute
30
20
10
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
time / days
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
International Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at
www.cie.org.uk after the live examination series.
Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local
Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2018 0625/23/M/J/18

0625 Physics June 2018

PHYSICS
Paper 0625/23
Question Question
Key Key
Number Number
1 A 21 A
2 C 22 A
3 A 23 D
4 B 24 B
5 A 25 C
6 A 26 D
7 B 27 D
8 D 28 C
9 B 29 C
10 B 30 C
11 B 31 D
12 D 32 B
13 B 33 A
14 D 34 C
15 B 35 C
16 C 36 C
17 B 37 D
18 B 38 C
19 B 39 D
20 D 40 A


PHYSICS 0625/21
Paper 2 Multiple Choice (Extended) October/November 2018
45 minutes
Soft clean eraser
*8207631209*

IB18 11_0625_21/2RP

2
1 The diagram shows part of a micrometer screw gauge.

45
012 40
mm
35
30
What is the smallest reading that can be achieved using this micrometer screw gauge?
A 0.0001 mm B 0.01 mm C 0.1 mm D 1 mm
2 A small, light ball is dropped from the top of a tall building.
Which graph shows how the speed of the ball changes with time?
A B
speed speed
0 0
0 time 0 time
C D
speed speed
0 0
0 time 0 time
3 A runner runs 300 m at an average speed of 3.0 m / s. She then runs another 300 m at an average
speed of 6.0 m / s.
What is her average speed for the total distance of 600 m?
A 2.0 m / s B 4.0 m / s C 4.5 m / s D 8.0 m / s
© UCLES 2018 0625/21/O/N/18

3
4 A helium balloon is tied to a top-pan balance. A metal block of mass 100 g is placed on the
balance. The reading on the balance is 91 g.
helium balloon
metal block
91 g
Which statement can be deduced from this experiment?
A The balloon exerts a downward force of 0.09 N on the top-pan balance.

B The helium has a mass of –9 g.
C The helium has a mass of +9 g.
D The resultant downward force on the top-pan balance is 0.91 N.
5 A liquid has a volume of 0.040 m3 and a mass of 30 000 g.
A 0.075 kg / m3 B 7.5 kg / m3 C 750 kg / m3 D 7500 kg / m3
6 A resultant force of 4.0 N acts on an object of mass 0.50 kg for 3.0 seconds.
What is the change in velocity caused by this force?
A 4.0 m / s B 6.0 m / s C 12 m / s D 24 m / s
7 Which quantities are both vectors?
A acceleration and force

B acceleration and pressure
C density and force
D density and pressure
© UCLES 2018 0625/21/O/N/18 [Turn over

4
8 A moving ball with a momentum of 25 kg m / s collides head-on with a wall.
wall
ball
It rebounds from the wall with the same speed but in the opposite direction. The time of collision
is 50 ms.
What is the average force exerted on the wall by the ball during the collision?
A 0.50 N B 1.00 N C 500 N D 1000 N
9 Which device is designed to convert chemical energy into kinetic energy?
A an a.c. generator
B a battery-powered torch
C a car engine
D a wind-up mechanical clock
10 An object, initially at rest, is dropped from a height of 12.0 m. The change in gravitational potential
energy when it falls to the ground is 565 J.
The frictional forces are negligible.
What is its speed when it hits the ground?
A 4.71 m / s B 15.5 m / s C 47.1 m / s D 240 m / s
11 A man climbs a ladder.
Which two quantities can be used to calculate the useful power of the man?
A the weight of the man and the time taken only

B the weight of the man and the vertical distance moved only
C the work done by the man and the time taken only
D the work done by the man and the vertical distance moved only
© UCLES 2018 0625/21/O/N/18

5
12 A manometer is used to measure the pressure of a gas supply.
manometer
connection
to gas supply
h
liquid
Which change gives a greater value of height h ?
A using a less dense liquid

B using a more dense liquid
C using a narrower tube
D using a wider tube
13 A washbasin has an exit pipe covered with a plug of area 12 cm2. A chain is attached to the
centre of the plug to assist in pulling the plug away from the exit hole. The washbasin contains
water to a depth of 0.080 m.
The density of the water is 1000 kg / m3.
chain
plug
What is the force acting on the plug due to the water?
A 0.96 N B 800 N C 9600 N D 80 000 N

6
14 Diagram 1 shows apparatus being used to observe smoke particles.
Diagram 2 shows how a smoke particle moves randomly.
diagram 1 diagram 2
eye
random
movement
microscope
air molecules
light and
smoke particles
Why do the smoke particles move randomly?
A They are hit by air molecules.

B They are less dense than air.
C They are moved by convection currents.
D They gain energy from the light.
15 The gas in a sealed container is compressed at constant temperature.
Which graph shows how the pressure of the gas changes with its volume?
A B
pressure pressure
0 0
0 volume 0 volume
C D
pressure pressure
0 0
0 volume 0 volume
© UCLES 2018 0625/21/O/N/18

7
16 The distance between two electricity pylons is 60 m. An engineer fits a cable of length 62 m
between the pylons.
Why does the engineer choose a cable that is longer than the distance between the two pylons?
A to allow for contraction of the cable in cold weather

B to create a slope in the cable for electrons to flow down
C to keep the current low and the voltage high
D to reduce magnetic fields around the cable
17 The diagram shows a liquid-in-glass thermometer.
bulb capillary tube
Which change increases the sensitivity of the thermometer?
A a narrower capillary tube

B a wider capillary tube
C thicker glass around the bulb
D thinner glass around the bulb
18 An object of mass 800 g and specific heat capacity 250 J / (kg °C) is heated. It absorbs 5300 J of
energy.
What is the increase in temperature of the object?
A 0.027 °C B 17 °C C 27 °C D 17 000 °C
19 On a cold day, a shiny metal rod feels colder to the touch than a black plastic rod.
Which statement explains this observation?
A The metal rod is a better absorber of infra-red radiation than the plastic rod.
B The metal rod is a better thermal conductor than the plastic rod.
C The metal rod is a worse absorber of infra-red radiation than the plastic rod.
D The metal rod is a worse thermal conductor than the plastic rod.

8
20 One end of a copper bar is heated to a high temperature.
Which mechanism is responsible for the transfer of thermal energy to the other end of the copper
bar?
A the lattice vibrations of copper ions only

B the lattice vibrations of copper ions and the movement of high energy electrons along the bar
C the movement of high energy copper ions along the bar
D the movement of high energy electrons along the bar only
21 Plane water waves travel from a shallow region into a deeper region. They travel more quickly in
the deeper water.
shallow water
boundary
wave
direction
deep water
Which diagram shows the wave pattern in the deeper water?
A B C D
22 Which statement about the image formed by a plane mirror is correct?
A The image is larger than the object.

B The image is smaller than the object.
C The image is twice as far from the mirror as the object.
D The image is virtual.
© UCLES 2018 0625/21/O/N/18

9
23 A ray of light is incident on a glass-air surface. The diagrams show the ray of light at different
angles of incidence in the glass.
air air air

glass glass glass
40° 44° 48°
What is the refractive index of the glass?
A 1.35 B 1.44 C 1.50 D 1.55
24 Different parts of the electromagnetic spectrum are used for different purposes. Below are four
statements about parts of the spectrum.
statement 1: Infra-red waves are used in television remote controllers.

statement 2: Radio waves are used to transmit television pictures from satellites to Earth.
statement 3: Ultraviolet waves are used for intruder alarms.
statement 4: X-rays are used for security checks.
A 1 and 2 B 1 and 4 C 2 and 3 D 3 and 4
25 Iron is used for the core of a transformer and steel is used to make a bar magnet.
Which statement explains these uses of iron and of steel?
A Iron is a magnetic material and steel is a non-magnetic material.

B Iron is a permanent magnetic material and steel is a temporary magnetic material.
C Iron is a temporary magnetic material and steel is a permanent magnetic material.
D Iron is a non-magnetic material and steel is a magnetic material.

10
26 A sheet of ice floats on water. A source of sound S is positioned at the edge of the ice sheet.
Four microphones are placed equal distances from S.
Which microphone detects the sound from S first?
air
B
D S
ice
water
27 A bar magnet is placed inside a current-carrying coil. The diagram shows four different
experiments.
1 2
magnet slowly magnet slowly

removed removed
+ –
3 4
current in coil current in coil

slowly reduced slowly reduced
+ –
In which experiments is the magnet demagnetised?
© UCLES 2018 0625/21/O/N/18

11
28 The diagrams represent two different electric fields.
field 1 field 2
A single electron is located in each of the fields.
Which row gives the correct direction of the force on the electron and the field in which there is a
larger force on it?
direction of
larger force
the force
A ↓ field 1
B ↓ field 2
C ↑ field 1
D ↑ field 2
29 The resistance of a component in a circuit is found using an ammeter and a voltmeter.
How are the ammeter and the voltmeter connected?
A the voltmeter and ammeter in parallel with the component

B the voltmeter and ammeter in series with the component
C the voltmeter in parallel with the component and the ammeter in series with the component
D the voltmeter in series with the component and the ammeter in parallel with the component
30 The table gives data for four different electrical devices.
Which device develops the greatest power?
device voltage current
A car headlight 12 V 3.0 A

B cooling fan 110 V 0.40 A
C electric spark generator 400 kV 0.10 mA
D mains lamp 240 V 0.20 A

12
31 The circuit diagram shows a fixed resistor R and a thermistor T used in a potential divider circuit.
VR and VT are the potential differences across R and T respectively.
What happens to VR and to VT as the temperature of the thermistor decreases?
VR VT
A decreases increases
B increases decreases
C stays the same decreases
D stays the same increases
32 The circuit diagram shows a power supply connected to some circuit components.
In the diagram, P and Q are the terminals of the d.c. power supply.
P Q
R1
A
R2
Under which circumstances does the ammeter show a reading other than zero?
A when P is positive or negative

B the ammeter always shows a zero reading
C only when P is negative
D only when P is positive
© UCLES 2018 0625/21/O/N/18

13
33 The diagram shows a digital circuit with two inputs and one output.
input 1
output
input 2
What describes the action of the circuit?
A AND B NAND C NOR D OR
34 Either a fuse or a circuit-breaker can be used to protect electrical cables from large currents that
could cause overheating.
X cable
live
electrical Y appliance
supply
neutral
cable
When a fuse is used, where should it be connected, and when a circuit-breaker is used, where
should it be connected?
position position of
of fuse circuit-breaker
A X X
B X Y
C Y X
D Y Y

14
35 There is a current of 3.0 A in a conductor.
The current is changed to 6.0 A in the opposite direction.
Which effect does this have on the magnetic field around the conductor?
A It decreases and it acts in the opposite direction.

B It decreases and it acts in the same direction.
C It increases and it acts in the opposite direction.
D It increases and it acts in the same direction.
36 A wire is placed in a strong magnetic field. When a current is passed through the wire it moves
upwards, as shown.
movement
N
The current is reversed.
In which direction does the wire move?
A downwards
B towards the north pole
C towards the south pole
D upwards
© UCLES 2018 0625/21/O/N/18

15
37 Which diagram represents the structure of a neutral atom?
A B C D
key
– – – –
neutron
++ ++ + proton
+ ++
+ – electron
– – –
38 When a uranium-235 nucleus absorbs a neutron, it becomes unstable and undergoes fission.
The fission process produces a barium (Ba) nucleus, a krypton (Kr) nucleus and 3 neutrons.
The fission process is represented by the nuclear equation shown.
1 235 144 ...

0n + 92 U → 56 Ba + ... Kr + 3 01n
Which symbol represents the resulting krypton nucleus?

89 91 91 91
A 36 Kr B 34 Kr C 35 Kr D 36 Kr
39 The diagram shows the paths of three different types of radiation X, Y and Z.
2 mm of 10 mm of 50 mm
plastic aluminium of lead
Which row correctly identifies X, Y and Z?
X Y Z
A α-particles β-particles γ-rays

B β-particles α-particles γ-rays
C β-particles γ-rays α-particles
D γ-rays α-particles β-particles

16
40 A scientist measures the count rate of a radioactive sample in a laboratory over a period of
12 weeks.
The background radiation count rate in the laboratory remains constant at 20 counts per minute.
The table shows the scientist’s results before the background radiation count rate is taken into
account.
time count rate

/ weeks / counts per minute
0 100
2 80
4 65
6 54
8 45
10 39
12 34
In which range does the half-life of the radioactive isotope lie?
A between 4 and 6 weeks

B between 6 and 8 weeks
C between 8 and 10 weeks
D more than 12 weeks
© UCLES 2018 0625/21/O/N/18

CAIE IGCSE Physics
0625/21 76 – Mark Scheme
Cambridge IGCSE MCQs Paper 2
October/November
PUBLISHED 2018
Question Answer Marks
1 B 1
2 C 1
3 B 1
4 D 1
5 C 1
6 D 1
7 A 1
8 D 1
9 C 1
10 B 1
11 C 1
12 A 1
13 A 1
14 A 1
15 D 1
16 A 1
17 A 1
18 C 1
19 B 1
20 B 1
21 C 1
22 D 1
23 B 1
24 B 1
25 C 1
26 B 1
27 B 1
28 A 1
© UCLES 2018 Page 2 of 3

CAIE IGCSE Physics
October/November
PUBLISHED 2018
29 C 1
30 D 1
31 A 1
32 D 1
33 C 1
34 A 1
35 C 1
36 A 1
37 B 1
38 A 1
39 B 1
40 A 1


PHYSICS 0625/22
45 minutes
Soft clean eraser
*3081874355*

IB18 11_0625_22/3RP

2

45
012 40
mm
35
30
A 0.0001 mm B 0.01 mm C 0.1 mm D 1 mm
2 The speed-time graph shows the motion of a car.
At which time is its acceleration greatest?
speed
0
0 A B C D
time
3 An athlete runs at a speed of 8 m / s for 10 s, and then at a speed of 6 m / s for 12 s.
Which calculation gives the average speed of the athlete in m / s?
A 8+6
2
(8 × 10) + (6 × 12)
B
22
(8 ÷ 10) + (6 ÷ 12)
C
22
(10 ÷ 8) + (12 ÷ 6)
D
22
© UCLES 2018 0625/22/O/N/18

3
helium balloon
metal block
91 g

5 The diagram shows four blocks of different metals. Each block has a mass of 12 g.
Which metal has the largest density?
A B
1 cm
1 cm
2 cm
1 cm
2 cm 2 cm
C D
1 cm
1 cm
2 cm
1 cm
3 cm 3 cm

4
6 The graph shows how the length of a spring changes when the stretching force is increased.
30
length of 25
spring / cm
20
15
10
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
force / N
In the Hooke’s law region, what is the spring constant for this spring?
A 0.20 N / cm B 0.22 N / cm C 0.28 N / cm D 0.33 N / cm
7 Point X is the centre of mass of a lamina in the shape of a triangle with sides of equal length. The
top of the triangle is cut off along the dotted line shown.
What happens to the centre of mass, X?
A moves towards the bottom of the page

B moves to the left
C moves to the right
D moves towards the top of the page
© UCLES 2018 0625/22/O/N/18

5
8 An object of mass 3.0 kg, travelling at a speed of 6.0 m / s, collides with an object of mass 2.0 kg,
travelling in the opposite direction at a speed of 2.0 m / s.
6.0 m / s 2.0 m / s
3.0 kg 2.0 kg
The objects stick together during the collision.
What is the speed and direction of the combined mass after the collision?
A 4.4 m / s to the left

B 4.4 m / s to the right
C 2.8 m / s to the left
D 2.8 m / s to the right
A an a.c. generator
C a car engine
10 The diagram shows a pendulum.
P
R
10 cm
Q
The pendulum swings from P to Q to R and back to P.
P is 10 cm higher than Q.
At which speed does the pendulum bob pass through Q?
A 0.44 m / s B 1.0 m / s C 1.4 m / s D 2.0 m / s

6
11 A crane on a building site lifts bricks of total mass 200 kg, initially at rest on the ground, with
uniform acceleration.
When the bricks are 5.0 m from the ground, they have a speed of 5.0 m / s.
How much work is done during this process?
A 2.5 kJ B 10.0 kJ C 12.5 kJ D 35 kJ
manometer
connection
to gas supply
h
liquid

chain
plug
A 0.96 N B 800 N C 9600 N D 80 000 N
© UCLES 2018 0625/22/O/N/18

7
diagram 1 diagram 2
eye
random
movement
microscope
air molecules
light and
smoke particles

15 A closed container of gas is heated. The pressure of the gas increases.
Which statement explains this increase in pressure?
A The changes in the momentum of the gas molecules striking the walls of the container
increase.
B The forces of attraction between the gas molecules and the walls of the container increase.
C The gas molecules collide with each other more frequently.
D The gas molecules lose more energy when they strike the walls of the container.

8
16 The metal lid on a glass jar is difficult to unscrew.
The jar is placed in a warm oven until the jar and the lid reach the same temperature. The lid is
now easily unscrewed.
Which property accounts for this?
A thermal capacity of the jar

B thermal capacity of the lid
C thermal conduction
D thermal expansion
17 A block of iron of mass M is heated and gains 10 kJ of internal energy. The temperature of the
block rises by θ °C.
A second block of iron of mass 2M is heated and gains 5.0 kJ of internal energy.
What is the temperature rise of the second block in °C?
A θ B θ C 2θ D 4θ
4 2
18 Which factors affect the sensitivity of a thermometer?
1 the diameter of the bore of the tube

2 the length of the capillary tube
3 the thickness of the bulb wall
A 1 only B 1 and 2 only C 1 and 3 only D 1, 2 and 3
19 Which statement about convection is not correct?
A It enables water in a pan on a cooker to get evenly heated.

B It happens in liquids and gases.
C It means that heat rises.
D It occurs because the density of a fluid decreases when it is heated.
© UCLES 2018 0625/22/O/N/18

9
20 A lamp has a metal filament that glows when heated by an electric current.
The middle of the filament is at a very high temperature. The ends of the filament, which are
connected to the base of the lamp, are cooler.
Which statement is correct?
A Some thermal energy is conducted to the base of the lamp.

B The filament radiates energy equally at all points along its length.
C The lamp transfers all of the electrical energy it receives into light energy.
D When the voltage across the filament is halved, the power output is halved.
the deeper water.
shallow water
boundary
wave
direction
deep water
A B C D
22 A thin converging lens has a focal length of 6.0 cm. An observer looks through the lens at an
object which is placed 4.0 cm from the lens.
4.0 cm
eye
object
Which description of the image that is observed is correct?
A diminished and inverted

B diminished and virtual
C enlarged and inverted
D enlarged and virtual

10
23 A transmitter produces radio waves of wavelength 1500 m. It takes the waves 0.025 s to travel
from the transmitter to a radio receiver.
What is the distance between the radio transmitter and the receiver?
A 5.0 × 103 m B 2.0 × 105 m C 7.5 × 106 m D 1.1 × 1010 m

air
B
D S
ice
water
© UCLES 2018 0625/22/O/N/18

11
26 The diagram shows a bar magnet at rest on a smooth horizontal surface. A length of soft-iron
wire is held parallel to the magnet.
soft-iron wire
magnet
S
The wire is released.
What happens?
A The wire moves away from the magnet.

B The wire moves towards the magnet.
C The wire’s centre stays in its present position and the wire rotates through 90° in a clockwise
direction.
D The wire’s centre stays in its present position and the wire rotates through 90° in an
anticlockwise direction.
27 The diagram shows point X between two charged plates.
+ –
+ –
+ –
+ X –
+ –
+ –
Which diagram shows the electric field pattern near point X?
A B C D

12
experiments.
1 2

removed removed
+ –
3 4

+ –
29 Copper wire is available in fixed lengths but in various diameters d. Each diameter has a different
resistance R.
Which relationship between R and d is correct?
A R is directly proportional to d.
B R is directly proportional to d 2.
C R is inversely proportional to d.
D R is inversely proportional to d 2.
30 A student investigates the resistance of a lamp.
Which row states how the meters must be connected?
ammeter voltmeter
A in parallel with the lamp in parallel with the lamp

B in parallel with the lamp in series with the lamp
C in series with the lamp in parallel with the lamp
D in series with the lamp in series with the lamp
© UCLES 2018 0625/22/O/N/18

13
31 The circuit shown is used to change the voltage Vout as the temperature of device X changes.
+6.0 V
device Vout
X
0V
name of this name of

type of circuit device X
A potential divider fuse

B potential divider thermistor
C variable resistor fuse
D variable resistor thermistor
32 The circuit diagram shows a d.c. power supply connected to two resistors R1 and R2 and four
diodes.
R1 R2
+ –
A There is a current in R1 and a current in R2.

B There is a current in R1 but no current in R2.
C There is no current in R1 but a current in R2.
D There is no current in R1 and no current in R2.

14
33 A logic gate has inputs 0,0 and an output 1.
Which two types of logic gate behave in this way?
A OR, AND
B OR, NAND
C NOR, AND
D NOR, NAND
X cable
live
supply
neutral
cable
A X X
B X Y
C Y X
D Y Y
35 Electrical power is transmitted at 400 kV and transformed down to 240 V before being delivered to
consumers.
A A 400 kV cable requires less insulation than a 240 V cable.

B Birds are subject to a high-voltage shock when resting on a high-voltage cable.
C The current in the transmission wires is equal to the current delivered to the consumers.
D With a 400 kV transmission system, a smaller proportion of the energy is used to heat the
atmosphere than with a 240 V system.
© UCLES 2018 0625/22/O/N/18

15
36 The diagram shows a coil of wire between the poles of a magnet.
20 turns
N S
+ –
power
supply
The coil consists of 20 turns of insulated wire.
The coil is connected to a variable resistor and a power supply.
How can the turning effect on the coil be increased?
A by moving the poles of the magnet closer to the coil

B by reducing the number of turns on the coil while keeping the current constant
C by increasing the resistance of the variable resistor
D by reversing the terminals of the power supply
A B C D
key
– – – –
neutron
++ ++ + proton
+ ++
+ – electron
– – –
220 212
38 A radioactive nucleus 86 Rn decays in two stages to produce 82 Pb .
Which two particles are emitted in this process?
A an α-particle and a β-particle
B an α-particle and a proton
C two α-particles
D two β-particles

16
X Y Z

40 The count rate measured when near a radioactive source drops from 542 counts per minute to
94 counts per minute in 12 hours. The background count remains constant at 30 counts per
minute.
What is the half-life of the source?
A 2 hours B 3 hours C 4 hours D 8 hours
© UCLES 2018 0625/22/O/N/18

CAIE IGCSE Physics
October/November
PUBLISHED 2018
1 B 1
2 B 1
3 B 1
4 D 1
5 A 1
6 D 1
7 A 1
8 D 1
9 C 1
10 C 1
11 C 1
12 A 1
13 A 1
14 A 1
15 A 1
16 D 1
17 A 1
18 A 1
19 C 1
20 A 1
21 C 1
22 D 1
23 C 1
24 B 1
25 B 1
26 B 1
27 A 1
28 B 1

CAIE IGCSE Physics
October/November
PUBLISHED 2018
29 D 1
30 C 1
31 B 1
32 A 1
33 D 1
34 A 1
35 D 1
36 A 1
37 B 1
38 C 1
39 B 1
40 C 1


PHYSICS 0625/23
45 minutes
Soft clean eraser
*9510057274*

IB18 11_0625_23/4RP

2

45
012 40
mm
35
30
A 0.0001 mm B 0.01 mm C 0.1 mm D 1 mm
2 An object falls in a gravitational field with air resistance.
Which distance-time graph shows this motion?
A B
distance distance
fallen fallen
0 0
0 time 0 time
C D
distance distance
fallen fallen
0 0
0 time 0 time
3 A boy runs 400 m at an average speed of 4.0 m / s.
He runs the first 200 m in 40 s.
How long does he take to run the second 200 m?
A 60 s B 66.7 s C 80 s D 140 s
© UCLES 2018 0625/23/O/N/18

3
helium balloon
metal block
91 g

5 A student carries out experiments to find the mass and the volume of four samples of rock.
The graph shows the results.
sample P sample Q
200
mass / g
sample R sample S
100
0
0 50 100
volume / cm3
Which pair are samples of the same type of rock?
A P and Q B P and S C R and Q D Q and S

4
6 An object accelerates from 10 m / s to 30 m / s in 4.0 seconds.
The accelerating force is 150 N.
What is the mass of the object?
A 0.033 kg B 5.0 kg C 7.5 kg D 30 kg
7 The diagram shows a uniform bar of length 120 cm and weight W. The bar is pivoted at a point
40 cm from the left end of the bar.
A load of W is suspended from the right-hand end of the bar.

2
A downward force F is applied to the left-hand end of the bar to keep it in equilibrium.
0 40 cm 60 cm 120 cm
pivot bar
F bar’s weight
W
W
2
What is the magnitude of force F ?
A W B W C 3W D 2W
2 2
8 An electron is moving at a speed of 5 × 106 m / s.

A neutron is moving at a speed of 5 × 104 m / s.
The mass of the electron is m.

The mass of the neutron is 2000m.
greater greater
momentum kinetic energy
A electron electron
B electron neutron
C neutron electron
D neutron neutron
© UCLES 2018 0625/23/O/N/18

5
A an a.c. generator
C a car engine
10 A barrel of mass 40 kg is raised to a height of 1.5 m by rolling it up a ramp. The length of the ramp
is 8.0 m. The force F applied to the barrel acts parallel to the ramp. The frictional force is
negligible.
8.0 m
F
40 kg
1.5 m
gain in gravitational
force F / N
potential energy / J
A 60 7.5
B 60 40
C 600 75
D 600 400
11 What is the main process by which energy is produced in the Sun?
A combustion
B nuclear fission
C nuclear fusion
D radioactive decay

6
manometer
connection
to gas supply
h
liquid

chain
plug
A 0.96 N B 800 N C 9600 N D 80 000 N
© UCLES 2018 0625/23/O/N/18

7
diagram 1 diagram 2
eye
random
movement
microscope
air molecules
light and
smoke particles

15 A bubble of air has a volume of 2.0 cm3 at the bottom of a lake where the total pressure is
4.0 × 105 Pa. The temperature of the water in the lake is constant. The atmospheric pressure at
the surface is 1.0 × 105 Pa.
What is the volume of the bubble when it rises to the surface?
A 0.13 cm3 B 0.17 cm3 C 6.0 cm3 D 8.0 cm3
16 Which row shows the relative order of thermal expansion of solids, liquids and gases?
most expansion least expansion
A solids liquids gases

B solids gases liquids
C gases solids liquids
D gases liquids solids

8
17 A block of ice is at a temperature of –100 °C. Energy is supplied at a constant rate. The graph
shows how its temperature changes.
200
temperature
/ °C 3
100
4
1
0
2
–100
time
At which points has the ice completely changed state to water and all the water completely
changed state to steam?
completely completely
changed to water changed to steam
A 1 3
B 1 4
C 2 3
D 2 4
18 The temperature of the water at the bottom of a waterfall is greater than the temperature of the
water at the top.
The gravitational potential energy of the water at the top is transferred to thermal energy at the
bottom.
The specific heat capacity of water is 4200 J / (kg °C).
What is the temperature difference for a waterfall of height 21 m?
A 0.005 °C B 0.05 °C C 20 °C D 200 °C
19 One end of a shiny metal rod is heated and the other end quickly gets hot.
Which statement describes why the other end quickly gets hot?
A Metals are good thermal conductors.

B Metals are poor thermal conductors.
C Shiny surfaces are good emitters of infra-red radiation.
D Shiny surfaces are poor emitters of infra-red radiation.
© UCLES 2018 0625/23/O/N/18

9
20 Four different surfaces are at the same high temperature.
Which surface will emit thermal radiation at the slowest rate?
colour of texture of surface

surface surface area / cm2
A black dull 10
B black dull 100
C white shiny 10
D white shiny 100
the deeper water.
shallow water
boundary
wave
direction
deep water
A B C D
22 An object is placed 8.0 cm from a thin converging lens of focal length 5.0 cm.
converging lens
object
F
5.0 cm
8.0 cm
Which statement about the image formed by the lens is correct?
A The image is real and inverted.

B The image is real and upright.
C The image is virtual and inverted.
D The image is virtual and upright.

10
23 Light travels through air and then enters and travels through a parallel-sided glass block.
A The angle of incidence is greater than the angle of refraction as the light leaves the block.
B The light emerging from the block is parallel to the light entering the block.
C The speed of the light decreases as it leaves the block.
D The wavelength of the light does not change as it enters the block.

air
B
D S
ice
water
© UCLES 2018 0625/23/O/N/18

11
26 Which diagram shows the pattern and the direction of the magnetic field lines around a bar
magnet?
A B
N S N S
C D
N S N S
experiments.
1 2

removed removed
+ –
3 4

+ –

12
28 Which row shows the meaning of the quantity e.m.f. and the unit in which it is measured?
meaning unit
A electromagnetic force N
B electromagnetic force V
C electromotive force N
D electromotive force V
29 Which diagram shows the current-voltage (I - V) characteristic for a filament lamp?
A B C D
I I I I
0 0 0 0
0 V 0 V 0 V 0 V
30 The diagram shows a light-dependent resistor (LDR) connected in a potential divider circuit.
The brightness of the light falling on the LDR is increased.
Which row shows what happens to the resistance of the LDR, and what happens to the reading
on the voltmeter?
resistance of LDR reading on voltmeter
© UCLES 2018 0625/23/O/N/18

13
31 The diagram shows part of an electric circuit. The reading on the voltmeter is 16 V. The current in
the resistor is 8.0 A.
8.0 A P Q
One coulomb of charge flows from P to Q through the resistor.
How much energy is transferred in the resistor?
A 2.0 J B 8.0 J C 16 J D 128 J
32 Which symbol represents an AND gate?
A B C D
X cable
live
supply
neutral
cable
A X X
B X Y
C Y X
D Y Y

14
34 The circuit diagram shows an a.c. power supply connected to two diodes and a resistor.
a.c. X
power
supply
The graph shows the current from the supply.
current
0
0 time
Which graph shows the current in diode X?
A B
current current
0 0
0 time 0 time
C D
current current
0 0
0 time 0 time
35 A 100% efficient step-down transformer has primary voltage Vp and primary current Ip.
Which row compares the secondary voltage with Vp and the secondary current with Ip?
secondary voltage secondary current
A greater than Vp greater than Ip

B greater than Vp less than Ip
C less than Vp greater than Ip
D less than Vp less than Ip
© UCLES 2018 0625/23/O/N/18

15
36 There is an electric current in a wire. The wire is placed in a magnetic field. A force acts on the
wire due to the current.
A The magnetic field must be produced by a permanent magnet and not by an electromagnet.
B The wire must be made from a magnetic material.
C When both the current and the magnetic field are reversed, the direction of the force is
unchanged.
D When the current is reversed, but not the magnetic field, there will be no force on the wire.
A B C D
key
– – – –
neutron
++ ++ + proton
+ ++
+ – electron
– – –
228
38 A nucleus of 88 Ra decays into an isotope of actinium, which then decays into a nucleus of
228
90 Th .
What types of radiation have been emitted during this process?
A one alpha particle only

B one alpha particle and one beta particle
C two alpha particles
D two beta particles

16
X Y Z

40 The count rate due to a sample of a radioactive isotope is measured for 80 minutes.
time count rate

/ minutes counts / second
0 480
20 380
40 300
60 240
80 190
A 20 minutes B 40 minutes C 60 minutes D 80 minutes
© UCLES 2018 0625/23/O/N/18

CAIE IGCSE Physics
0625/23 112– Mark Scheme
October/November
PUBLISHED 2018
1 B 1
2 A 1
3 A 1
4 D 1
5 C 1
6 D 1
7 C 1
8 C 1
9 C 1
10 C 1
11 C 1
12 A 1
13 A 1
14 A 1
15 D 1
16 D 1
17 D 1
18 B 1
19 A 1
20 C 1
21 C 1
22 A 1
23 B 1
24 B 1
25 B 1
26 A 1
27 B 1
28 D 1

CAIE IGCSE Physics
October/November
PUBLISHED 2018
29 C 1
30 A 1
31 C 1
32 D 1
33 A 1
34 C 1
35 C 1
36 C 1
37 B 1
38 D 1
39 B 1
40 C 1

Cambridge Assessment International Education

PHYSICS 0625/22
45 minutes
Soft clean eraser
*1358010994*

Write your name, centre number and candidate number on the Answer Sheet in the spaces provided
This syllabus is regulated for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.
IB19 03_0625_22/3RP

2
1 Which row shows the best choice of measuring instruments to obtain accurate values for the
distances shown?
diameter of wire height of bench length of laboratory

A measuring tape measuring tape micrometer
screw gauge
B metre rule micrometer measuring tape
screw gauge
C micrometer measuring tape metre rule
screw gauge
D micrometer metre rule measuring tape
screw gauge
2 An object is moving with uniform deceleration.
Which statement describes its motion?
A Its rate of change of speed is decreasing.

B Its speed is constant.
C Its speed is decreasing.
D Its speed is increasing.
3 The graph shows how the speed of a car varies during part of its journey.
20
speed
m/s 15
10
0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12
time / s
What is the value of the car’s acceleration between 6 s and 10 s?
A 0.50 m / s2 B 0.80 m / s2 C 1.25 m / s2 D 1.50 m / s2
© UCLES 2019 0625/22/F/M/19

3
4 The gravitational field strength on the Moon is less than on the Earth.
Which of these is different when done on the Moon compared with when done on the Earth?
A the gravitational potential energy gained by a stone lifted through the same vertical height
B the kinetic energy gained by a ball when hit with the same force for the same period of time
C the momentum gained by a bullet when fired from the same gun
D the work done in accelerating a stone from rest to the same speed
5 The mass of a full bottle of cooking oil is 1.30 kg.
When exactly half of the oil has been used, the mass of the bottle plus the remaining oil is
0.90 kg.
1.30 0.90
kg kg
What is the mass of the empty bottle?
A 0.40 kg B 0.50 kg C 0.65 kg D 0.80 kg
6 A solid ball has a volume of 4.0 cm3. The density of the ball is 1.6 g / cm3.
What is the mass of the ball?
A 0.4 g B 2.5 g C 4.0 g D 6.4 g

4
7 The extension / load graph for a spring is shown. The unstretched length of the spring is 15.0 cm.
3
extension / cm
0
0 1 2 3 4 5
load / N
When an object of unknown weight is suspended on the spring, the length of the spring is
16.4 cm.
What is the weight of the object?
A 0.55 N B 0.67 N C 3.5 N D 4.1 N
8 A box of mass 2.0 kg is pulled across the floor by a force of 6.0 N.
The frictional force acting on the box is 1.0 N.
What is the acceleration of the box?
A 0.40 m / s2 B 2.5 m / s2 C 3.0 m / s2 D 3.5 m / s2
9 Which moving body has a resultant force acting on it?
A a diver rising vertically through water at constant speed

B an aircraft circling an airport at constant speed
C a train going up a straight incline at constant speed
D a parachutist descending vertically at terminal velocity
© UCLES 2019 0625/22/F/M/19

5
10 A constant force acts on a body causing the momentum of the body to increase.
Which expression relates the force to the momentum and the time taken?
change in momentum
A force =
time taken
B force = momentum
time taken
C force = change in momentum × time taken
D force = momentum × time taken
11 A car of mass 1500 kg has a speed of 20 m / s. It accelerates until its speed is 25 m / s.
What is the increase in the kinetic energy of the car?
A 19 kJ B 38 kJ C 170 kJ D 340 kJ
12 Which source of energy uses the production of steam to generate electrical energy?
A hydroelectric
B nuclear
C tides
D waves
13 A car, travelling on a straight horizontal road, has 1.6 MJ of kinetic energy. It accelerates for 20 s
until it has 2.5 MJ of kinetic energy.
What is the average power output used to increase the kinetic energy of the car?
A 45 W B 205 W C 45 kW D 205 kW
14 Which diagram shows an athlete exerting least pressure on the ground?
A B C D

6
15 The diagram shows a U-tube manometer containing three liquids: mercury, liquid X and liquid Y.
Neither liquid X or liquid Y mixes with mercury.
liquid X liquid Y
mercury
Which row compares the pressure exerted by liquid X and by liquid Y on the mercury, and the
density of liquid X and the density of liquid Y?
pressure exerted by X and densities of

by Y on the mercury X and of Y
A pressure of X is greater than Y density of X is greater than Y

B pressure of Y is greater than X density of Y is greater than X
C pressure of X and of Y is the same density of X is greater than Y
D pressure of X and of Y is the same density of Y is greater than X
16 Gas molecules exert a pressure when they collide with the walls of a container.
A They experience a change in force which exerts a pressure equal to momentum × area on
the walls.
B They experience a change in force which exerts a pressure equal to momentum on the
area
walls.
C They experience a change in momentum which exerts a pressure equal to force × area on
the walls.
D They experience a change in momentum which exerts a pressure equal to force on the
area
walls.
© UCLES 2019 0625/22/F/M/19

7
17 A thermometer has graduations which start at –10 °C and end at 110 °C.
–10 0 100 110
°C
What is the lower fixed point and what is the upper fixed point of the Celsius scale?

/ °C / °C
A –10 100
B –10 110
C 0 100
D 0 110
18 A 1 kg block of aluminium requires more thermal energy to raise its temperature by 1 °C than a
1 kg block of copper requires.
Why is this?
A Aluminium is a better conductor of thermal energy than copper.

B Aluminium is a poorer conductor of thermal energy than copper.
C Aluminium has a higher specific heat capacity than copper.
D Aluminium has a lower specific heat capacity than copper.
19 Four campers are warming their food on a fire.
They use different rods, each of the same dimensions, to hold their food near the fire.
rod
food
fire
Which material is the best choice to prevent their hands from getting too hot?
A aluminium
B copper
C steel
D wood

8
20 Two metal cans are identical, except that one has a shiny silver outer surface and the other has a
dull black outer surface. They each have 300 g of water at 80 °C sealed inside them. They are
both in a vacuum, in the darkness of outer space.
How does the temperature of the water in each one change?
A Neither one will cool down.

B The water in the black can cools more slowly than that in the shiny can.
C The water in the shiny can cools more slowly than that in the black can.
D They both cool down at the same rate.
21 The diagram shows a wave before it reflects from a barrier.
Which labelled section of the diagram represents a wavefront?
barrier
C D
22 A vibrating object produces ripples on the surface of a liquid. The object completes 20 vibrations
every second. The spacing of the ripples, from one crest to the next, is 3.0 cm.
What is the speed of the ripples?
A 0.15 cm / s B 6.7 cm / s C 60 cm / s D 120 cm / s
© UCLES 2019 0625/22/F/M/19

9
23 A narrow beam of light is travelling through a transparent liquid. It meets the surface as shown, at
an angle of incidence of 40°. The refractive index of the liquid is 1.5.
air
liquid
40°
What is the angle of refraction as the light enters the air?
A 25° B 27° C 60° D 75°
24 Which diagram correctly represents rays of light passing through a converging lens in a camera?
A B
camera camera
object object
image image
lens lens
C D
camera camera
object object
image image
lens lens
25 What is the speed of X-rays in a vacuum and in air?
in a vacuum in air
A 3.0 × 106 m / s 2.0 × 106 m / s

B 3.0 × 106 m / s 3.0 × 106 m / s
C 3.0 × 108 m / s 2.0 × 108 m / s
D 3.0 × 108 m / s 3.0 × 108 m / s

10
26 A sound wave passes a point. The air pressure at that point increases and then decreases
300 times every second.
Which descriptions apply to this sound wave?
the type of wave motion the frequency of the sound
A longitudinal outside human hearing range

B longitudinal within human hearing range
C transverse outside human hearing range
D transverse within human hearing range
27 A boy stands 150 m from a wall. He claps and when he hears the echo, he immediately claps
again. He continues this for some time.
Another student has a stop-watch. She starts the watch on the first clap and stops it on the
eleventh clap. The watch reads 10.0 s.
Which value do her measurements give for the speed of sound in air?
A 150 m / s B 170 m / s C 300 m / s D 330 m / s
28 The ends of three metal rods are tested by holding end Q of rod 1 close to the others in turn.
R T
Q S U
rod 1 rod 2 rod 3
The results are as follows.
End Q attracts end R.

End Q attracts end S.
End Q attracts end T.
End Q repels end U.
Which of the metal rods is a magnet?
A rod 1 only
B rod 1 and rod 2
C rod 1 and rod 3
D rod 3 only
© UCLES 2019 0625/22/F/M/19

11
29 A metal sphere is charged by induction. There are four stages W, X, Y and Z in this process.
W a charged rod is brought near to the sphere

X the sphere is earthed
Y the charged rod is taken away from the sphere
Z the earth connection is removed
In which order are the four stages carried out?
A W → X → Y → Z
B W → X → Z → Y
C Z → W → X → Y
D X → Z → W → Y
30 Which electrical quantity is defined in terms of the energy supplied in driving charge round a
complete circuit?
A current
B electromotive force
C potential difference
D power
31 A student sets up a circuit containing a battery of two cells and three lamps, as shown.
– + – +
What is the circuit diagram for this arrangement?
A B C D

12
32 In which circuit does the lamp light?
A B C D
33 Each potential divider is placed in a circuit with a power supply.
Which potential divider makes the potential difference across component Y increase when the
light intensity increases?
A B C D
X X X X
Y Y Y Y
© UCLES 2019 0625/22/F/M/19

13
34 There are two inputs to the combination of logic gates shown, and one output.
input 1
output
input 2
Which truth table represents the action of this combination of gates?
A B
input 1 input 2 output input 1 input 2 output

0 0 0 0 0 0
0 1 0 0 1 1
1 0 0 1 0 1
1 1 1 1 1 1
C D

0 0 1 0 0 1
0 1 1 0 1 0
1 0 1 1 0 0
1 1 0 1 1 0
35 The current in a kettle is 10 A and the kettle is protected by a 13 A fuse.
The owner of the kettle replaces the 13 A fuse with a 3 A fuse.
What happens when the kettle is switched on?
A The fuse melts and the kettle might be damaged.

B The fuse melts and the kettle is undamaged.
C The fuse does not melt and the kettle works correctly.
D The fuse does not melt but the kettle fails to work.
36 Which statement about the direction of a magnetic field at a point is correct?
A It is the direction of the force on a north pole placed at that point.

B It is the direction of the force on a south pole placed at that point.
C It is the direction of the force on a positive charge placed at that point.
D It is the direction of the force on a negative charge placed at that point.

14
37 A current-carrying coil is placed in a magnetic field.
view from above
coil magnetic field lines
Which effect does the coil experience?
A a change in shape C a resultant force

B a change in weight D a turning effect
38 What are isotopes of an element?
A atoms of a different element with a different number of neutrons

B atoms of a different element with a different number of protons
C atoms of the same element with a different number of neutrons
D atoms of the same element with a different number of protons
39 A radioactive isotope of carbon 14C decays by beta emission to give an isotope of nitrogen 14
N
and a beta particle. The equation for the reaction is shown.
14
XC → 14
7N + Y0β
What is the value of X and of Y?
X Y
A 6 –1
B 6 1
C 8 –1
D 8 1
40 A beta particle is a fast moving electron.
Which statement explains how beta particles are emitted from an atom?
A An electron is emitted as a beta particle from an inner electron shell of the atom.
B An electron is emitted as a beta particle from an outer electron shell of the atom.
C A neutron changes into a proton and a beta particle is emitted from the nucleus.
D A proton changes into a neutron and a beta particle is emitted from the nucleus.
© UCLES 2019 0625/22/F/M/19

CAIE IGCSE Physics
Cambridge IGCSE MCQs Paper
March 2
2019
PUBLISHED
1 D 29 B
2 C 30 B
3 C 31 A
4 A 32 C
5 B 33 A
6 D 34 A
7 C 35 B
8 B 36 A
9 B 37 D
10 A 38 C
11 C 39 A
12 B 40 C
13 C
14 B
15 D
16 D
17 C
18 C
19 D
20 C
21 C
22 C
23 D
24 A
25 D
26 B
27 C
28 C


PHYSICS 0625/21
45 minutes
Soft clean eraser
*7296374499*

IB19 06_0625_21/3RP

2
1 Which quantity can be measured directly using a micrometer screw gauge?
A the area of a sheet of paper

B the mass of a sheet of paper
C the thickness of a sheet of paper
D the volume of a sheet of paper
2 The velocity of an object increases from 30 m / s to 50 m / s in 5.0 seconds.
What is the average acceleration of the object?
A 0.10 m / s2 B 0.25 m / s2 C 4.0 m / s2 D 10 m / s2
3 A heavy metal ball falls vertically downwards through air past four equally spaced levels J, K, L
and M.
metal ball
level J
level K
level L
level M
The times taken to fall from one level to the next are measured.
Where is the speed of the ball greatest and which time is shortest?
speed is time is
greatest between shortest between
A J and K J and K
B J and K L and M
C L and M J and K
D L and M L and M
© UCLES 2019 0625/21/M/J/19

3
4 A body is moved from place X to place Y where the gravitational field strength is different.
What happens to its mass and to its weight due to the move?
mass weight
A changes changes
B changes stays the same
C stays the same changes
D stays the same stays the same
5 The diagrams show four solid blocks with their dimensions and masses.
Which block has the greatest density?
A area = 10 cm2 B area = 20 cm2
2.0 cm 2.0 cm
mass = 14 g mass = 48 g
C area = 10 cm2 D area = 20 cm2
2.0 cm 2.0 cm
mass = 54 g mass = 68 g
6 A student wishes to determine the spring constant of a spring where it obeys Hooke’s law.
Different loads are hung from the spring and its length is measured for each different load.
The table shows the results of the experiment.
weight of load / N 0 2.0 4.0 5.0

length of spring / cm 12 20 28 38
What is the value of the spring constant of the spring?

4
7 A mass of 20 kg is held stationary by a rope passing over a frictionless pulley.
pulley
20 kg
What is the tension T in the rope?
A 10 kg B 20 kg C 100 N D 200 N
8 A boat starts moving across a river at velocity v perpendicular to the river bank.
The boat encounters a current along the river of velocity u, as shown.
u river
Which vector diagram shows the resultant velocity r of the boat?
A B C D
u u
r r
v v
v v
r r
u u
© UCLES 2019 0625/21/M/J/19

5
9 A ball of mass 0.50 kg falls and hits the floor at 10 m / s.
It rebounds at speed 8.0 m / s, as shown.
before collision after collision
10 m / s 8m/s
The collision between the ball and the floor lasts for 0.50 s.
What is the average force acting on the ball during the collision?
A 2.0 N upwards
B 2.0 N downwards
C 18 N upwards
D 18 N downwards
10 An object falls from the top of a building that is 25 m high. Air resistance is negligible.
What is the speed of the object when it hits the ground?
A 10 m / s B 22 m / s C 25 m / s D 625 m / s
11 A machine is very efficient.
A It produces a large amount of power.

B It uses very little energy.
C It wastes very little energy.
D It works very quickly.
12 A crane takes 2.0 minutes to lift a load to the top of a building. The change in gravitational
potential energy of the load is 360 kJ.
What is the useful power output of the crane?
A 3.0 kW B 180 kW C 720 kW D 43 200 kW

6
13 The diagram shows a stone suspended on a string under the surface of a liquid. The stone
experiences a pressure caused by the liquid.
string
stone
liquid
What would increase the pressure on the stone?
A decreasing the surface area of the stone

B increasing the mass of the stone
C lowering the stone deeper into the liquid
D using a liquid with a lower density
14 A stationary smoke particle is hit by a fast-moving nitrogen molecule.
Which row describes the motion of the smoke particle and of the nitrogen molecule after the
collision?
smoke particle nitrogen molecule
A moves rebounds
B moves stops
C remains stationary rebounds
D remains stationary stops
© UCLES 2019 0625/21/M/J/19

7
15 A night storage heater contains a large block of material that is heated electrically during the
night. During the day the block cools down, releasing thermal energy into the room.
Which thermal capacity and which night-time temperature increase will cause the most energy to
be stored by the block?
thermal capacity night-time

of block temperature increase
A large large
B large small
C small large
D small small
16 100 g of water at 25 °C is poured into an insulating cup. 50 g of ice at 0 °C is added to the water.
The water is stirred until the temperature of the water has fallen to 0 °C.
18 g of ice remains unmelted.
The specific heat capacity of water is 4.2 J / g °C.
Which value does this experiment give for the specific latent heat of fusion of ice?
A 210 J / g B 330 J / g C 580 J / g D 770 J / g
17 In which does thermal conduction not occur?
A a gas
B a liquid
C a solid
D a vacuum

8
18 The metal surface of a kettle is hot.
What happens to the cool air outside the kettle when it comes into contact with the hot kettle?
A The density of the air decreases and the air falls.

B The density of the air decreases and the air rises.
C The density of the air increases and the air falls.
D The density of the air increases and the air rises.
19 Some hot water is sealed inside a metal can. The can is in a vacuum in outer space. The hot
water slowly cools down.
How does the thermal energy escape into space?
A by conduction then convection

B by conduction then radiation
C by evaporation then convection
D by evaporation then radiation
20 When water waves pass through a gap they diffract.
The diagrams show wavefronts approaching a narrow gap.
In which diagram will the diffraction be least?
A B C D
21 An object is placed 30 cm in front of a plane mirror.
Which statement describes the image of the object?
A The image is the same size and 30 cm from the object.

B The image is the same size and 60 cm from the object.
C The image is smaller and 30 cm from the object.
D The image is smaller and 60 cm from the object.
© UCLES 2019 0625/21/M/J/19

9
22 A small object O is placed near a converging lens, as shown. The lens forms an image I.
I O
A The image I is diminished.
B The image I is inverted.
C The image I is real.

D The object O is closer to the lens than its principal focus.
23 An eclipse of the Sun happens when the Moon comes between the Earth and the Sun.
A Infra-red radiation from the Sun disappears before visible light and ultra-violet radiation.
B Ultra-violet radiation from the Sun disappears before visible light and infra-red radiation.
C Visible light from the Sun disappears before ultra-violet radiation and infra-red radiation.
D Infra-red radiation, ultra-violet radiation and visible light from the Sun all disappear at the
same moment.
24 A pulse of sound is produced at the bottom of a boat. The sound travels through the water and is
reflected from a shoal of fish. The sound reaches the boat again after 1.2 s. The speed of sound
in the water is 1500 m / s.
boat
shoal of fish
How far below the bottom of the boat is the shoal of fish?
A 450 m B 900 m C 1800 m D 3600 m

10
25 What is the approximate value of the speed of sound in air at normal temperature?
A 340 m / s B 34 000 m / s C 340 km / s D 3.0 × 108 m / s
26 Why is soft iron used for the core of an electromagnet?
A Soft iron easily becomes a permanent magnet.

B Soft iron is a good electrical conductor.
C Soft iron is a poor thermal conductor.
D Soft iron loses its magnetism when the current in the coil is switched off.
27 Diagram 1 shows two thin, uncharged strips of plastic.
Diagram 2 shows the same strips after they have been rubbed with a dry cloth.
strips strips
of plastic of plastic
diagram 1 diagram 2
Which row describes the charge on the strips after rubbing, and the force between the strips after
rubbing?
charge on strips force between strips
A opposite attraction
B opposite repulsion
C the same attraction
D the same repulsion
© UCLES 2019 0625/21/M/J/19

11
28 A cell has an electromotive force (e.m.f.) of 1.5 V.
What does this statement mean?
A The cell converts 1.0 J of energy when driving 1.5 C of charge round a complete circuit.
B The cell converts 1.5 J of energy when driving 1.0 C of charge round a complete circuit.
C The cell converts 1.5 J of energy per second when driving 1.0 C of charge round a complete
circuit.
D The cell converts 1.5 W of power when driving 1.0 C of charge round a complete circuit.
29 Which two changes to a metal wire both increase resistance?
A decreasing its length and increasing its temperature

B increasing its length and decreasing its temperature
C decreasing its thickness and increasing its temperature
D increasing its thickness and decreasing its temperature
30 The diagram shows a circuit containing a d.c. power supply, a motor and a variable resistor.
Three ammeters X, Y and Z show the current in different parts of the circuit.
+ –
X A A Z
A M
Y
The reading on X is 4.0 A.
A The readings on Y and Z are both less than 4.0 A.

B The readings on Y and Z are both equal to 4.0 A.
C The readings on Y and Z are both greater than 4.0 A.
D The reading on Z is zero.

12
31 A lamp is to be connected in a circuit so that the potential difference (p.d.) across it can be varied
from 0 to 6 V.
Which circuit would be most suitable?
A B
6V 6V
C D
6V 6V
32 Which logic gate is represented by the symbol shown?
33 The diagram shows a combination of logic gates.
Which single logic gate is equivalent to this combination?
A AND B NOR C NOT D OR
© UCLES 2019 0625/21/M/J/19

13
34 An alternating current (a.c.) power supply is connected in series with a resistor R and a diode.
Which graph shows how the voltage V across the resistor R varies with time?
A B
voltage V voltage V
0 0
0 time 0 time
C D
voltage V voltage V
0 0
0 time 0 time
35 An electric heater is plugged into the mains supply using a fused plug.
The current in the heater is 10 A.
The cable attached to the heater is rated at 15 A.
The fuses available are rated at 1 A, 3 A, 5 A and 13 A.
Which fuse should be used?
A 1A B 3A C 5A D 13 A
36 What is the purpose of the commutator in a d.c. electric motor?
A to control the speed at which the motor rotates

B to reverse the direction of the voltage across the power supply every half-turn
C to reverse the direction of the current in the motor coil every half-turn
D to reverse the direction of spin of the motor coil every half-turn

14
37 The diagram shows a wire between two magnetic poles. The wire is connected in a circuit with an
ammeter.
wire
N S
A
The wire is moved downwards, towards the bottom of the page. A current is induced in the wire.
In which direction is the force on the wire caused by this current?
A towards the bottom of the page

B towards the left of the page
C towards the right of the page
D towards the top of the page
38 The chemical symbol for sodium is Na. The equation represents the radioactive decay of
sodium-24.
24
11Na → 24
xMg + y
–1e
What are the numbers x and y?
x y
A 10 0
B 10 1
C 12 0
D 12 1
© UCLES 2019 0625/21/M/J/19

15
39 A radioactive source emits α-particles, β-particles and γ-rays into a vacuum where there is a
magnetic field.
The magnetic field acts perpendicularly into the plane of the paper.
The paths X, Y and Z of the three types of radiation through the magnetic field are shown.
Y
X
magnetic field
into paper
radioactive
source
Which radiation follows path X, path Y and path Z?
X Y Z

B α-particles γ-rays β-particles
C β-particles α-particles γ-rays
D β-particles γ-rays α-particles

16
40 A student measures the level of radiation emitted from a radioactive substance. He places a
detector very close to the substance. He puts different absorbers between the radioactive
substance and the detector.
radioactive
substance counter
detector
absorber
The student’s results are shown. These results are corrected for background radiation.
counter reading
absorber
counts per minute
none 95
thin paper 52
few mm of aluminium 52
several cm of lead 12
Which types of radiation are being emitted by the substance?
A α-particles and β-particles only
B α-particles and γ-rays only
C β-particles and γ-rays only
D α-particles, β-particles and γ-rays
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.
Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which itself is a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2019 0625/21/M/J/19

CAIE IGCSE Physics
May/June 2
2019
PUBLISHED
1 C 29 C
2 C 30 B
3 D 31 B
4 C 32 A
5 C 33 B
6 D 34 C
7 D 35 D
8 C 36 C
9 C 37 D
10 B 38 C
11 C 39 B
12 A 40 B
13 C
14 A
15 A
16 B
17 D
18 B
19 B
20 C
21 B
22 D
23 D
24 B
25 A
26 D
27 D
28 B


PHYSICS 0625/22
45 minutes
Soft clean eraser
*4781377226*

IB19 06_0625_22/4RP

2

2 Four objects are moving along a straight line.
The distance of an object from a fixed point on the line is plotted against time for each object.
Which object is decelerating?
A B
distance from distance from

fixed point fixed point
0 0
0 time 0 time
C D
distance from distance from

fixed point fixed point
0 0
0 time 0 time
© UCLES 2019 0625/22/M/J/19

3
and M.
metal ball
level J
level K
level L
level M
speed is time is
A J and K J and K
B J and K L and M
C L and M J and K
D L and M L and M
4 Four students make statements about the mass of an object.
A The mass of an object depends on the gravitational field which acts on the object.
B The mass of an object divided by its weight is equal to the acceleration with which it falls
freely.
C The mass of an object increases when the temperature of the object increases.
D The mass of an object resists change in motion of the object.
5 A metal has a density of 8.0 g / cm3. A solid cube of mass 1.0 kg is made from this metal.
How long is each side of the cube?
A 0.50 cm B 2.0 cm C 5.0 cm D 42 cm

4
6 An experiment is carried out to determine the spring constant for a spring.
Different loads are hung from the spring and its length is measured for each different load.
The graph shows how its length varies with load.
4.0
weight of
load / N 3.0
2.0
1.0
0
0 4 8 12 16 20
length of
spring / cm
What is the value of the spring constant?
7 A beam is pivoted at its centre of mass.
It is acted upon by two forces, 10 N and 5.0 N, as shown.
25 cm
15 cm
pivot
10 N 5.0 N
What is the resultant moment about the pivot?
A 25 N cm anticlockwise
B 25 N cm clockwise
C 175 N cm anticlockwise
D 175 N cm clockwise
© UCLES 2019 0625/22/M/J/19

5
8 Which object is in equilibrium?
A B C D
2N 2N
2N 2N 2N
2N
2N 2N
9 An object of mass 4.0 kg is moving with a velocity of 3.0 m / s in a straight line.
What is the momentum of the object?
A 0.75 kg m / s B 1.3 kg m / s C 12 kg m / s D 24 kg m / s

11 A force F acts on a body and the body moves a distance d in the direction of the force.
Which expression for the work done W is correct?
A W = Fd B W = Fd 2 C W= 1
2
Fd D W= 1
2
Fd 2
12 A boy produces an average power output of 60 W as he rides his bicycle for 2.0 minutes.
How much useful energy does he expend?
A 0.50 J B 30 J C 120 J D 7200 J

6
string
stone
liquid

14 At room temperature, iron is difficult to compress.
At the same temperature, oxygen is much easier to compress.
Which comparison of the structures of iron and oxygen explains this?
A The iron particles are closer together.

B The iron particles have a greater mass.
C The iron particles can be magnetised.
D The iron particles have less average kinetic energy.
© UCLES 2019 0625/22/M/J/19

7

A large large
B large small
C small large
D small small
16 100 g of water at 25 °C is poured into an insulated cup. 50 g of ice at 0 °C is added to the water.
A 210 J / g B 330 J / g C 580 J / g D 770 J / g
17 The handle of a metal saucepan is made of plastic. As the saucepan heats up, the handle gets
warmer.
Which statement explains this?
A Molecules of the plastic radiate their energy to other molecules.

B Molecules of the plastic vibrate more and pass on their energy to nearby molecules.
C The free electrons in the plastic transfer the thermal energy along the handle.
D The heated molecules very slowly move along the plastic handle.

8

19 Vacuum flasks usually have silvered walls that help to keep the contents of the flask hot.
Why are the walls silvered?
A to absorb thermal energy from the air around the flask

B to increase the rate of convection inside the flask
C to reduce energy loss to the surroundings by conduction
D to reflect thermal radiation back into the flask
A B C D
21 Which conditions are necessary for light to be totally internally reflected?
the incident light is in angle of incidence
A the less dense medium less than the critical angle

B the less dense medium greater than the critical angle
C the more dense medium less than the critical angle
D the more dense medium greater than the critical angle
© UCLES 2019 0625/22/M/J/19

9
22 Light is travelling through air. It strikes a glass block at an angle of incidence of 45°. The glass
has a refractive index of 1.4.
What is the angle of refraction of the light as it enters the glass?
A 29° B 30° C 32° D 82°
same moment.
boat
shoal of fish
A 450 m B 900 m C 1800 m D 3600 m
25 An observer stands at the finish line of a 100 m race. He wants to time the winner’s run. He starts
his stop-watch as soon as he sees the smoke from the starting gun instead of when he hears the
bang.
What is the reason for doing this?
A Light travels much faster than sound.

B There is a risk he might respond to an echo from a wall.
C Humans react slower to sound than to light.
D Humans react more quickly to sound than to light.

10
26 A soft iron bar is a long way from any magnetic field.
How can the material of the bar be described?
A It is magnetic and strongly magnetised.

B It is magnetic and unmagnetised.
C It is non-magnetic and strongly magnetised.
D It is non-magnetic and unmagnetised.
strips strips
diagram 1 diagram 2
rubbing?
circuit.
© UCLES 2019 0625/22/M/J/19

11
29 A metal wire of length 100 cm and cross-sectional area 0.20 mm2 has a resistance of 8.0 Ω.
What is the resistance of a wire of the same metal of length 50 cm and cross-sectional area of
0.40 mm2?
A 2.0 Ω B 8.0 Ω C 16 Ω D 32 Ω
30 The diagram shows a circuit.
What is connected in parallel with the thermistor?
A heater
B lamp
C light-dependent resistor
D variable resistor

12
from 0 to 6 V.
A B
6V 6V
C D
6V 6V
32 The circuit below can be completed by inserting components at X and at Y. The completed circuit
is a potential divider in which the potential difference across component Y increases when the
temperature increases.
Y V
Which row shows the components X and Y?
X Y
A light-dependent resistor resistor

B resistor light-dependent resistor
C resistor thermistor
D thermistor resistor
© UCLES 2019 0625/22/M/J/19

13
33 Which two logic gates each have a high output (1) when both of their inputs are low (0)?
A AND and OR
B AND and NOR
C NAND and NOR
D NAND and OR
34 Two NAND gates are joined together as shown.
input 1
output
input 2
35 Which components are designed to improve the safe working of a mains electrical supply?
circuit earth
fuse
breaker wire
A
B
C
D

14
36 The diagram shows a current-carrying wire placed between two magnetic poles. The current is in
the direction shown.
wire
S N
current direction
What is the direction of the force on the wire?

B towards the top of the page
C towards the left-hand side of the page
D towards the right-hand side of the page
© UCLES 2019 0625/22/M/J/19

15
37 Diagram 1 shows an a.c. generator. The coil is turning as shown.
diagram 1
coil
N
S
Diagram 2 shows the output voltage produced by the generator as the coil turns.
Which point on diagram 2 shows the voltage induced when the coil is moving through the position
shown in diagram 1?
diagram 2
output A
voltage
B
0
0 C time
38 Which observation provides evidence for the nuclear atom?
A attraction of opposite charges
B emission of γ-rays during the decay of a radioactive nuclide
C scattering of α-particles by thin metal foils
D scattering of γ-rays by a thin metal foil

16
39 The chemical symbol for uranium is U. The equation represents the radioactive decay of
uranium-235.
235
92U → xyTh + 24He
What are the numbers x and y?
x y
A 231 94
B 231 90
C 239 94
D 239 90
40 An experiment is carried out to measure the radiation from a radioactive source that has a
half-life of 10 minutes.
The source is placed close to a detector that is connected to a counter, as shown.
radioactive
counter
detector source
The average background count-rate is 20 counts / minute.
At the start of the experiment, the count-rate recorded by the counter is 1000 counts / minute.
What is the count-rate 10 minutes later?
A 490 counts / minute

B 500 counts / minute
C 510 counts / minute
D 530 counts / minute
© UCLES 2019 0625/22/M/J/19

CAIE IGCSE Physics
May/June 2
2019
PUBLISHED
1 C 29 A
2 C 30 A
3 D 31 B
4 D 32 D
5 C 33 C
6 B 34 A
7 B 35 D
8 C 36 A
9 C 37 B
10 C 38 C
11 A 39 B
12 D 40 C
13 C
14 A
15 A
16 B
17 B
18 B
19 D
20 C
21 D
22 B
23 D
24 B
25 A
26 B
27 D
28 B


PHYSICS 0625/23
45 minutes
Soft clean eraser
*7151954492*

IB19 06_0625_23/4RP

2

2 A brass ball and a feather are released at the same time.
On Earth, the ball reaches the ground first.
On the Moon, they reach the ground at the same time.
What is the explanation for this?
A Both weigh the same on the Moon.

B Both weigh less on the Moon.
C There is a greater air resistance on the Moon.
D There is no air resistance on the Moon.
and M.
metal ball
level J
level K
level L
level M
speed is time is
A J and K J and K
B J and K L and M
C L and M J and K
D L and M L and M
© UCLES 2019 0625/23/M/J/19

3
4 On Earth, a spring stretches by 5.0 cm when a mass of 3.0 kg is suspended from one end.
1
The gravitational field strength on the Moon is of that on Earth.
6
Which mass, on the Moon, would stretch the spring by the same extension?
A 0.50 kg B 3.0 kg C 5.0 kg D 18 kg
5 X, Y and Z are three regularly shaped solid objects.
Their dimensions and masses are shown in the diagrams.
object X object Y
2 cm
3 cm
5 cm
10 cm 4 cm
6 cm
200 200
g g
electronic
object Z
balance
1 cm
1 cm
25 cm
50 g
Which objects have the same density?
A X, Y and Z B X and Y only C X and Z only D Y and Z only

4
6 An experiment is carried out to determine the spring constant for a spring that obeys Hooke’s law.
A load is hung from the spring and the extension of the spring is measured.
Which calculation is used to calculate the spring constant?
A extension
mass of the load
B extension
weight of the load
C mass of the load

extension
weight of the load

D
extension
7 A car is driven from rest on a long straight road. The car engine exerts a constant driving force.
The diagram shows the horizontal forces acting on the car. The resistive forces are proportional
to the speed of the car.
resistive
driving force
forces
(from engine)
Why does the car eventually reach a maximum speed?
A The resistive forces decrease to make the acceleration of the car negative.
B The resistive forces decrease to make the acceleration of the car zero.
C The resistive forces increase to make the acceleration of the car negative.
D The resistive forces increase to make the acceleration of the car zero.
© UCLES 2019 0625/23/M/J/19

5
8 A beam of weight 6.0 N is suspended from two strings P and Q.
String P is 30 cm from the left-hand end of the beam, as shown. String Q is not shown.
2.0 N
string P
30 cm
20 cm
beam
6.0 N
The tension in string P is 2.0 N.
What is the tension in string Q and where is it attached so that the beam is in equilibrium?
A 4.0 N at 10.0 cm from the left-hand end

B 4.0 N at 15.0 cm from the left-hand end
C 6.0 N at 10.0 cm from the left-hand end
D 8.0 N at 7.5 cm from the left-hand end
9 How is momentum p calculated in terms of the mass m of a body and its velocity v, and what type
of quantity is p?
equation type of quantity
A p=m×v scalar
B p=m×v vector
C p= m scalar
v
D p= m vector
v
10 An object is in free fall. The change in gravitational potential energy of the body depends upon its
mass m, the change in height ∆h and the gravitational field strength g.
What is the correct expression for the change in gravitational potential energy?
gm g∆h m∆h
A gm∆h B C D
∆h m g

6

12 A box is pulled along a floor by a force of 3.0 N.
The friction acting on the box is 1.0 N, as shown.
box
1.0 N 3.0 N
How much kinetic energy does the box gain in moving 2.0 m?
A 2.0 J B 4.0 J C 6.0 J D 8.0 J
string
stone
liquid

© UCLES 2019 0625/23/M/J/19

7
14 Water in a beaker evaporates when it is left on a bench for a period of time.
Increasing the surface area and increasing the temperature of the water each change the rate of
evaporation.
increasing the surface area increasing the temperature
A rate of evaporation decreases rate of evaporation decreases

B rate of evaporation decreases rate of evaporation increases
C rate of evaporation increases rate of evaporation decreases
D rate of evaporation increases rate of evaporation increases

A large large
B large small
C small large
D small small
16 100 g of water at 25 °C is poured into an insulating cup. 50 g of ice at 0 °C is added to the water.
A 210 J / g B 330 J / g C 580 J / g D 770 J / g

8
17 Why does a metal rod conduct thermal energy much better than a similar-sized plastic rod?
A The molecules in the plastic are much closer together than the atoms in the metal.
B The molecules in the plastic are much larger than the atoms in the metal.
C The molecules in the plastic are much more tightly held together than the atoms in the metal.
D The molecular structure in the plastic contains no free electrons, but the metal has free
electrons.

A B C D
20 Sound travels through air at a speed of 340 m / s. A source generates sound waves at a frequency
of 1.2 kHz.
What is the wavelength of the sound waves?
A 0.28 m B 3.5 m C 280 m D 410 m
© UCLES 2019 0625/23/M/J/19

9
21 Which conditions are necessary for light to be totally internally reflected?
the incident light is in angle of incidence
A the less dense medium less than the critical angle

B the less dense medium greater than the critical angle
C the more dense medium less than the critical angle
D the more dense medium greater than the critical angle
22 A beam of light passes through a vacuum and then enters a liquid. The diagram shows the path it
takes.
40°
vacuum
liquid
25°
The light travels through the vacuum at a speed of 3.0 × 108 m / s.
What is the speed of light in the liquid?
A 1.9 × 108 m / s
B 2.0 × 108 m / s
C 4.6 × 108 m / s
D 4.8 × 108 m / s
same moment.

10
boat
shoal of fish
A 450 m B 900 m C 1800 m D 3600 m
25 Which statement about ultrasound is correct?
A It has a higher frequency than audible sound, and it is a longitudinal wave.

B It has a higher frequency than audible sound, and it is a transverse wave.
C It has a lower frequency than audible sound, and it is a longitudinal wave.
D It has a lower frequency than audible sound, and it is a transverse wave.
26 A metal bar is placed inside a current-carrying coil, as shown in diagram 1.
There is a small current in the coil. The bar holds a few nails, as shown in diagram 2.
nails
diagram 1 diagram 2
When there is no current in the coil, the nails drop off.
metal from which effect of a larger

the bar is made current in the coil
A soft iron it makes no difference

B soft iron the bar holds more nails
C steel it makes no difference
D steel the bar holds more nails
© UCLES 2019 0625/23/M/J/19

11
strips strips
diagram 1 diagram 2
rubbing?
circuit.

12
29 Two wires X and Y are made from the same metal and have the same resistance.
Which row identifies a possible pair of values for X and for Y?
length of X diameter of X length of Y diameter of Y

/ cm / mm / cm / mm
A 50 0.40 200 0.10

B 50 0.40 200 0.20
C 50 0.40 200 0.80
D 50 0.40 200 1.60
30 The diagram shows a circuit including a lamp, an electric bell and three switches S1, S2 and S3.
The lamp and bell are not faulty.
S1
S2
S3
The bell is ringing but the lamp is not lit.
Which switches are closed?
A S1 only
B S1 and S2 only
C S1 and S3 only
D S1, S2 and S3
© UCLES 2019 0625/23/M/J/19

13
from 0 to 6 V.
A B
6V 6V
C D
6V 6V
32 A 12 V battery is connected to a combination of 2.0 Ω resistors as shown.
12 V
2.0 Ω
2.0 Ω
2.0 Ω
What is the current in the battery?
A 1.5 A B 2.0 A C 4.0 A D 6.0 A

14
33 A student is designing a lighting circuit for a dolls’ house. He sets up two different circuits.
Each circuit contains a 12 V power supply and three identical lamps.
Each lamp is designed to operate at normal brightness when connected individually to a 12 V

supply.
12 V power 12 V power
supply supply
12
12
circuit 1 circuit 2
A In circuit 1, each of the lamps is at normal brightness.

B In circuit 1, if one lamp fails, the other lamps remain lit.
C In circuit 2, if one lamp fails, the other lamps remain lit.
D In circuit 2, the current from the power supply is less than in circuit 1.
34 The combination of logic gates shown has two inputs and one output.
input 1
output
input 2
© UCLES 2019 0625/23/M/J/19

15
35 A simple wiring diagram for an electric cooker is shown.
electric cooker
metal casing
live
neutral
earth
connection to casing
Why is there a wire connecting the metal case of the cooker to earth?
A It improves the efficiency of the cooker.

B It prevents the metal case from becoming too hot when the cooker is left on.
C It reduces the risk of an electric shock if the live wire touches the metal case.
D The electric cooker will not switch on without it.
36 α-particles are directed at a metal foil.
Most of the particles pass through the foil with little change in direction.
A small proportion of the particles are scattered back through large angles.
What does this evidence suggest about the structure of an atom?
A It consists of a charged centre much smaller than the size of the atom and with little of the
mass of the atom.
B It consists of a negative charge the size of the atom containing small positive charges
scattered through it.
C It consists of a charged centre much smaller than the size of the atom but with most of the
mass of the atom.
D It consists of a positive charge the size of the atom containing small negative charges
scattered through it.

16
37 A conductor carrying a current is placed in a magnetic field.
In which direction does the force on the conductor act?
current
A
D B
N S
C
38 What is nuclear fission?
A the merging of two nuclei to create a heavier nucleus

B the process by which electrons are removed from an atom
C the process by which stars generate energy
D the splitting of a nucleus to create two smaller nuclei
39 Which statement about γ-radiation is correct?
A It consists of very small charged particles.

B It is a form of electromagnetic radiation.
C It is less penetrating than β-radiation.
D It is more highly ionising than α-radiation.
40 A radium nucleus with nucleon number 226 decays by emitting an α-particle.
The proton number of radium is 88.
What are the nucleon number and proton number for the nucleus produced by this decay?
nucleon number proton number
A 222 86
B 222 87
C 226 86
D 226 87
© UCLES 2019 0625/23/M/J/19

CAIE IGCSE Physics
May/June 2
2019
PUBLISHED
1 C 29 C
2 D 30 C
3 D 31 B
4 D 32 C
5 C 33 C
6 D 34 B
7 D 35 C
8 B 36 C
9 B 37 A
10 A 38 D
11 C 39 B
12 B 40 A
13 C
14 D
15 A
16 B
17 D
18 B
19 C
20 A
21 D
22 B
23 D
24 B
25 A
26 B
27 D
28 B


PHYSICS 0625/21
45 minutes
Soft clean eraser
*8731446642*

IB19 11_0625_21/4RP

2
1 A student measures the diameter of a pencil.
Which measuring instrument will give the most precise reading?
A a measuring tape
B a metre rule
C a micrometer screw gauge
D a ruler
2 A light object is dropped from rest. It falls a large distance vertically through air.
How can the motion of the object be described?
A constant acceleration
B increasing acceleration
C decreasing acceleration and then moving at terminal velocity
D increasing acceleration and then moving at terminal velocity
3 A car travels at an average speed of 60 km / h for 15 minutes.
How far does the car travel in 15 minutes?
A 4.0 km B 15 km C 240 km D 900 km
4 Which quantity is a force due to a gravitational field?
A density
B mass
C weight
D volume
5 The density of air is 1.2 kg / m3.
A room has dimensions 5.0 m × 4.0 m × 3.0 m.
What is the mass of the air in the room?
A 0.02 kg B 0.10 kg C 50 kg D 72 kg
© UCLES 2019 0625/21/O/N/19

3
6 A car is travelling around a circular track at a constant speed, as shown.
In which direction is the resultant force on the car?
D
car
C A
direction of
movement
7 Two forces P and Q act on a metre rule as shown. The metre rule is pivoted at one end. The rule
starts to rotate in a clockwise direction.
a b metre rule
pivot
A P equals Q
B P is less than Q
C (P × a) is equal to (Q × b)
D (P × a) is greater than (Q × (a + b))
8 Which statement gives a complete description of any object that is in equilibrium?
A There are no forces acting.

B There is no resultant force.
C There is no resultant force and no resultant turning effect.
D There is no resultant turning effect.

4
9 Two objects X and Y move directly towards each other. The objects have the same mass.
Object X has a velocity of 5.0 m / s to the right. Object Y has a velocity of 3.0 m / s to the left.
5.0 m / s 3.0 m / s
X Y
Object X and object Y collide and stick together.
What is their velocity after colliding?
A 1.0 m / s to the left

B 1.0 m / s to the right
C 4.0 m / s to the left
D 4.0 m / s to the right
10 Brakes are used to slow down a moving car.
Into which form of energy is most of the kinetic energy converted as the car slows down?
A chemical
B elastic
C thermal
D sound
11 A man carries 20 tiles from the ground to the roof of a house. Each tile has a mass of 1.2 kg. The
roof of the house is 15 m above the ground.
How much work does the man do against gravity on the tiles in carrying them to the roof?
A 36 J B 180 J C 360 J D 3600 J
12 A car is moving along a straight horizontal road. The car has 1.6 MJ of kinetic energy. The car
accelerates for 20 s until the kinetic energy of the car increases to 2.5 MJ.
What is the minimum average power developed by the car engine for this acceleration?
A 45 W B 205 W C 45 kW D 205 kW
© UCLES 2019 0625/21/O/N/19

5
13 A drawing pin (thumb tack) has a sharp point at one end and a flat surface at the other end.
sharp point flat surface
The pin is pushed into a wooden board.
How do the pressure and the force at the sharp point compare with the pressure and the force on
the flat surface?
force at the sharp point pressure at the sharp point
A greater than on the flat surface greater than on the flat surface
B greater than on the flat surface less than on the flat surface
C the same as on the flat surface greater than on the flat surface
D the same as on the flat surface less than on the flat surface
14 An object is 20 cm below the surface of a liquid. The density of the liquid is 1200 kg / m3.
What is the pressure on the object due to the liquid?
A 600 Pa B 2400 Pa C 60 000 Pa D 240 000 Pa
15 Which statement about the evaporation of a liquid is correct?
A The least energetic molecules escape from the surface and the temperature of the liquid
decreases.
B The least energetic molecules escape from the surface and the temperature of the liquid
increases.
C The most energetic molecules escape from the surface and the temperature of the liquid
decreases.
D The most energetic molecules escape from the surface and the temperature of the liquid
increases.
16 A bubble of gas is formed deep under water. The bubble has a volume of 40 cm3 and the
pressure inside the bubble is P.
The bubble rises up through the water. The volume of the bubble increases to 56 cm3 and the
pressure becomes 100 kPa. The temperature of the gas does not change.
What is the initial pressure P ?
A 71 Pa B 71 kPa C 140 Pa D 140 kPa

6
17 Which change in the design of a liquid-in-glass thermometer makes it more sensitive?
A a larger liquid reservoir

B a longer tube
C a smaller liquid reservoir
D a wider tube
18 A liquid turns into a gas. This occurs only at one particular temperature, and the change happens
throughout the liquid.
What is this process called?
A boiling
B condensation
C evaporation
D fusion
19 One end of a rod of copper is placed in hot water. Thermal energy travels along the rod to make
the other end warmer.
What is the behaviour of the copper at an atomic level that accounts for most of the transfer of
thermal energy from one end to the other?
A Atoms at the hot end gain kinetic energy and move towards the other end.
B Atoms at the hot end expand, colliding with other atoms and transferring energy.
C Free electrons at the hot end gain energy and move towards the other end, colliding with
atoms along the rod.
D Free electrons at the hot end gain energy from the hot water and move directly to the other
end.
20 A surface is made so that it is a good source of infrared radiation.
Which surface is not suitable?
A a surface that is painted matt black

B a surface that is painted white
C a surface that is heated to a high temperature
D a surface that has a large surface area
© UCLES 2019 0625/21/O/N/19

7
21 A large hill blocks the direct path between a transmitter of radio waves and a receiver, as shown.
transmitter
hill receiver
The receiver picks up the signal from the transmitter even though the radio waves do not travel
through the hill.
A possible way A stronger signal is

for this to happen is received using
A diffraction round the hill. longer wavelengths.

B diffraction round the hill. shorter wavelengths.
C refraction round the hill. longer wavelengths.
D refraction round the hill. shorter wavelengths.
22 The diagram shows the image of a clock in a plane mirror.
Which is the actual time?
A 04:15 B 04:45 C 07:15 D 07:45

8
23 A converging lens produces an image of an object O. The focal length of the lens is f.
Which position of the object produces a virtual image?
A B
O O
f f
2f 2f
C D
O O
f f
2f 2f
24 The diagram shows the electromagnetic spectrum.
radio
γ-rays X-rays ultraviolet visible light infrared microwaves
waves
increasing ......................
A word is missing from the label below the spectrum.
Which word is missing?
A amplitude
B frequency
C speed
D wavelength
© UCLES 2019 0625/21/O/N/19

9
25 Which row gives a possible set of values for the speed of sound in ice, in water and in steam?
speed of sound speed of sound speed of sound

in ice in water in steam
m/ s m/ s m/ s
A 500 1500 4000

B 1500 4000 500
C 4000 500 1500
D 4000 1500 500
26 A steel bar is placed in an East-West direction for it to be demagnetised. No other magnet is

nearby.
Which method is not suitable?
A Hammering the bar.

B Heating the bar to a very high temperature.
C Slowly taking the bar out of a coil that carries an alternating current.
D Slowly taking the bar out of a coil that carries a direct current.
27 A plastic rod is rubbed with a dry cloth. The rod becomes positively charged.
Why has the rod become positively charged?
A It has gained electrons.

B It has gained neutrons.
C It has lost electrons.
D It has lost neutrons.
28 A circuit contains a cell of electromotive force (e.m.f.) of 2.0 V. The current in the circuit is 2.0 A.
How much energy is converted by the cell in 2.0 minutes?
A 2.0 J B 4.0 J C 8.0 J D 480 J

10
29 The circuit diagram shows a cell connected in series to a resistor and a component X.
What is component X?
A bell
B diode
C heater
D thermistor
30 Identical resistors are connected together to form arrangements X, Y and Z.
X Y Z
What is the correct order of the resistances of the arrangements from the largest to the smallest?
A X→Y→Z
B Y→X→Z
C Z→X→Y
D Z→Y→X
© UCLES 2019 0625/21/O/N/19

11
31 A circuit contains a cell of electromotive force (e.m.f.) 2.0 V, three resistors, three ammeters and
two voltmeters. One ammeter is labelled P and one voltmeter is labelled Q.
The readings on the other two ammeters and on the other voltmeter are shown.
2.0 V
2.0 A A 0.50 A
A
A
V P
0.50 V V
Q
What is the reading on ammeter P and what is the reading on voltmeter Q?
reading on P / A reading on Q / V
A 1.5 1.5
B 1.5 2.5
C 2.5 1.5
D 2.5 2.5

12
32 There are two inputs and one output for the combination of logic gates shown.
input 1
output
input 2
Which truth table represents the operation of this combination of logic gates?
A B

0 0 0 0 0 0
0 1 0 0 1 0
1 0 1 1 0 1
1 1 1 1 1 0
C D

0 0 1 0 0 1
0 1 1 0 1 0
1 0 0 1 0 1
1 1 0 1 1 1
33 Where must a fuse be connected in a mains electric circuit?
A the earth wire only

B the live wire only
C the neutral wire only
D the live wire and the earth wire
34 A student investigates the output voltage induced across a coil of wire by a bar magnet.
When will the induced voltage have the greatest value?
A The student slowly moves the bar magnet into the coil of wire.
B The student leaves the bar magnet stationary in the coil of wire.
C The student quickly removes the bar magnet from the coil of wire.
D The student places the bar magnet at rest outside the coil of wire.
© UCLES 2019 0625/21/O/N/19

13
35 There is a current in a wire. The direction of the current is out of the page.
Which diagram shows the magnetic field pattern produced?
A B
key
wire carrying a current
out of the page
C D

14
36 Diagram 1 shows a coil of wire P between the poles of a magnet. The ends of coil P are
connected to a battery by slip rings.
Diagram 2 shows a coil of wire Q between the poles of a different magnet. The ends of coil Q are
connected to a battery by a split-ring commutator.
P Q
N S N S
diagram 1 diagram 2
What happens to coils P and Q?
coil P coil Q
A continuously turns makes one quarter turn
anticlockwise anticlockwise then stops
B continuously turns makes one quarter turn
clockwise clockwise then stops
C makes one quarter turn continuously turns
anticlockwise then stops anticlockwise
D makes one quarter turn continuously turns
clockwise then stops clockwise
37 Which diagram shows a possible structure of a neutral atom?
A B
key
proton
neutron
electron
C D
© UCLES 2019 0625/21/O/N/19

15
38 The scattering of particles by a thin gold foil provided scientists with evidence for the nuclear
atom.
Which particles were scattered by the gold nuclei in the thin foil?
A α-particles
B β-particles
C neutrons
D protons
39 The diagram shows β-particles being directed between the poles of a magnet.
N
β-particles
In which direction will the particles be deflected?
A into the page

B out of the page
C towards the bottom of the page
40 Why are some radioactive sources stored in boxes made from lead?
A Lead absorbs emissions from the radioactive sources.

B Lead decreases the half-life of radioactive sources.
C Lead increases the half-life of radioactive sources.
D Lead repels emissions from the radioactive sources.
© UCLES 2019 0625/21/O/N/19

CAIE IGCSE Physics
October/November
PUBLISHED 2019
1 C 29 B
2 C 30 D
3 B 31 A
4 C 32 B
5 D 33 B
6 B 34 C
7 D 35 B
8 C 36 C
9 B 37 A
10 C 38 A
11 D 39 B
12 C 40 A
13 C
14 B
15 C
16 D
17 A
18 A
19 C
20 B
21 A
22 C
23 A
24 D
25 D
26 D
27 C
28 D


PHYSICS 0625/22
45 minutes
Soft clean eraser
*9597730633*

IB19 11_0625_22/5RP

2
1 A student measures the dimensions of a cylindrical glass beaker.
For which measurement should she use a micrometer screw gauge?
A circumference of the beaker

B diameter of the beaker
C height of the beaker
D thickness of the glass wall of the beaker
2 The graph shows how the speed of a car varies during part of a journey.
20.0
speed
m / s 15.0
10.0
5.0
0
0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10.0 12.0
time / s
What is the acceleration of the car between 6.0 s and 10.0 s?
A 0.50 m / s2 B 0.80 m / s2 C 1.25 m / s2 D 1.50 m / s2
A 4.0 km B 15 km C 240 km D 900 km
4 A box is placed on the ground. An upward force of 15 N is needed to lift the box at constant
speed.
Which row correctly describes the box?
mass of the box weight of the box
A 1.5 kg 15 N
B 15 N 1.5 kg
C 15 N 150 kg
D 150 kg 15 N
© UCLES 2019 0625/22/O/N/19

3
5 The table gives the mass and the volume of three objects P, Q and R.
object mass / g volume / cm3
P 23 36
Q 170 720
R 240 340
Which objects can float in a liquid of density 0.85 g / cm3?
A P and Q only
B P and R only
C Q and R only
D P, Q and R
6 A hook is used to lift a metal plate, as shown.
100 N
hook
50 cm 40 cm
pivot metal plate
An upward force of 100 N is needed to lift the metal plate about the pivot, as shown.
What is the weight W of the metal plate?
A 80 N B 100 N C 180 N D 225 N
7 What is the unit of the moment of a force?
A N B N / kg C N/m D Nm

4
8 A ship travels due North through still water at a speed of 20 m / s.
It enters a channel where there is a current in the water from West to East. The speed of the
current is 20 m / s.
Which diagram shows the resultant velocity v of the ship?
A B
v v W E
20 m / s 20 m / s
S
20 m / s 20 m / s
C D
20 m / s v 20 m / s v
20 m / s 20 m / s
9 A ball is at rest on the ground. A boy kicks the ball. The boy’s boot is in contact with the ball for
0.040 s.
The average force on the ball is 200 N. The ball leaves the boy’s boot with a speed of 20 m / s.
Which row gives the impulse of the boot on the ball and the average acceleration of the ball?
impulse on ball average acceleration of ball

Ns m / s2
A 8 0.8
B 8 500
C 5000 0.8
D 5000 500
© UCLES 2019 0625/22/O/N/19

5
10 An object P of mass 80 g collides with another object Q of mass 40 g.
After the collision, P and Q stick together and then travel on together.
Before the collision, P is travelling at a speed of 6.0 m / s and Q is at rest.
What is the speed of P and Q after the collision?
A 2.0 m / s B 3.0 m / s C 4.0 m / s D 6.0 m / s
A chemical
B elastic
C thermal
D sound
12 A box of mass 8.0 kg is lifted from the ground and placed on a shelf. The box gains 100 J of
potential energy.
The box falls off the shelf. Air resistance can be ignored.
At what speed does the box hit the ground?
A 3.5 m / s B 5.0 m / s C 25 m / s D 28 m / s
A 45 W B 205 W C 45 kW D 205 kW

6
the flat surface?
15 The density of mercury is 13 600 kg / m3.
What is the pressure at the bottom of a column of mercury that has a height of 75.0 cm?
A 1.02 × 104 Pa
B 1.02 × 105 Pa
C 1.02 × 106 Pa
D 1.02 × 107 Pa
16 Which row describes the arrangement and the motion of the molecules in a gas?
arrangement motion
A far apart move freely

B far apart vibrate only
C tightly packed move freely
D tightly packed vibrate only
17 A bubble of air of volume 3.0 mm3 is under water. The bubble is at a depth where the pressure of
the air inside the bubble is four times atmospheric pressure.
The temperature of the air in the bubble stays the same as it rises to the surface.
What is the volume of the air in the bubble as it reaches the surface?
A 3.0 mm3 B 9.0 mm3 C 12 mm3 D 15 mm3
© UCLES 2019 0625/22/O/N/19

7
18 The same quantity of thermal energy is supplied to each of four blocks. Each block is made from
a different material.
Which block has the greatest thermal capacity?
A B C D
temperature temperature temperature temperature

increase is increase is increase is increase is
1 °C 4 °C 2 °C 3 °C
A boiling
B condensation
C evaporation
D fusion
20 In a cold country, a bicycle has been left outside all night. The cyclist finds the plastic hand grips
feel less cold to the touch than the steel handlebars.
Which row correctly describes the temperature and the property of the two materials?
the temperature of the two materials the property of the two materials
A the temperature of the steel is the plastic is a better thermal
much lower than that of the plastic conductor than the steel
B the temperature of the steel is the steel is a better thermal
much lower than that of the plastic conductor than the plastic
C the steel and the plastic are the plastic is a better thermal
both at the same temperature conductor than the steel
D the steel and the plastic are the steel is a better thermal
both at the same temperature conductor than the plastic

8
21 The diagram shows a tent made from a new material.
new material
What type of material should the tent be made of to reflect the radiant energy from the Sun?
material material
texture surface colour
A dull black
B dull white
C shiny black
D shiny white
transmitter
hill receiver
through the hill.


© UCLES 2019 0625/22/O/N/19

9
23 A ray of light is incident on a plane mirror. A student measures the angle of incidence i and the
angle of reflection r.
incident i r reflected
ray ray
The student varies the angle of incidence and then plots a graph of r against i.
What does the graph look like?
A B C D
r r r r
0 0 0 0
0 i 0 i 0 i 0 i
24 What is monochromatic light?
A light of a single amplitude

B light of a single frequency
C light of more than one colour
D light which travels with constant velocity
radio
waves
increasing ......................
A amplitude
B frequency
C speed
D wavelength

10

m/ s m/ s m/ s
A 500 1500 4000

B 1500 4000 500
C 4000 500 1500
D 4000 1500 500

nearby.


29 There is a current of 2.0 A in a resistor for 30 s. The potential difference (p.d.) across the resistor
is 12 V.
How much energy is transferred in the resistor?
A 1.25 J B 5.0 J C 180 J D 720 J
© UCLES 2019 0625/22/O/N/19

11
X Y Z
A X→Y→Z
B Y→X→Z
C Z→X→Y
D Z→Y→X
31 Resistors of 1.0 Ω, 2.0 Ω and 3.0 Ω are connected in parallel with a cell.
A The current in each resistor is different but the potential difference (p.d.) across each resistor
is the same.
B The current in each resistor is the same but the potential difference across each resistor is
different.
C The potential difference across the 3.0 Ω is greater than the potential difference across the
1.0 Ω resistor.
D The sum of the potential differences across each resistor is equal to the electromotive force
(e.m.f.) of the cell.
32 The diagram shows a circuit component.
What is it used for?
A to allow current in one direction only

B to change the direction of the current
C to emit light when there is a current
D to increase the size of the current

12
33 Which single logic gate behaves the same as the combination of logic gates shown?

35 The N-pole of a magnet is moved into a coil of wire connected to a galvanometer.
coil
S N
The needle of the galvanometer moves.
Which situation must give a smaller galvanometer reading?
A Use a coil with fewer turns and a stronger magnet.

B Use a coil with fewer turns and a weaker magnet.
C Use a coil with more turns and a stronger magnet.
D Use a coil with more turns and a weaker magnet.
36 A step-down transformer is 100% efficient. It has an input voltage of 240 V a.c. and an output
voltage of 60 V a.c.
The current in the primary coil is 0.50 A.
What is the current in the secondary coil?
A 0.13 A B 0.50 A C 2.0 A D 8.0 A
© UCLES 2019 0625/22/O/N/19

13
37 The diagrams show the simple atomic structure for two neutral atoms X and Y of different
elements.
X Y
atom with atom with a more

more electrons positively charged nucleus
A X X
B X Y
C Y X
D Y Y
38 Plutonium-238 decays by the emission of an α-particle.
Which equation represents the decay of a plutonium-238 nucleus?
A
238
94
Pu → 238
95
U + –10 α
B
238
94
Pu → 234
92
U + 42 α
C
238
94
Pu → 234
92
U + 42 α
D
238
94
Pu → 242
96
U + 42 α
39 A radioactive isotope has a half-life of 8 days.
A detector close to a sample of this isotope gives a count rate of 200 counts per minute.
Without the source, the background count is 20 counts per minute.
What is the count rate due to the source after 8 days?
A 80 counts per minute

B 90 counts per minute
C 100 counts per minute
D 110 counts per minute

14

© UCLES 2019 0625/22/O/N/19

CAIE IGCSE Physics
October/November
PUBLISHED 2019
Question Answer Mark
1 D 29 D
2 C 30 D
3 B 31 A
4 A 32 A
5 D 33 A
6 C 34 B
7 D 35 B
8 C 36 C
9 B 37 D
10 C 38 B
11 C 39 B
12 B 40 A
13 C
14 C
15 B
16 A
17 C
18 A
19 A
20 D
21 D
22 A
23 C
24 B
25 D
26 D
27 D
28 C


PHYSICS 0625/23
45 minutes
Soft clean eraser
*5638834072*

IB19 11_0625_23/4RP

2
1 Which is the best apparatus to use to measure the thickness of a coin?
A balance
B ruler with a millimetre scale
C micrometer screw gauge
D pressure gauge
2 The graph shows how the speed of an object varies with time.
At which labelled time is the object decelerating?
speed
0
0 A B C D
time
A 4.0 km B 15 km C 240 km D 900 km
4 Which equation shows the relationship between the weight W and the mass m of an object?
m
A W=
g
B W = mg
C W=m+g
g
D W=
m
5 A box of mass 2.0 kg is pulled across a horizontal floor by a force of 6.0 N.
The frictional force acting on the box is 1.0 N.
What is the acceleration of the box?
A 0.40 m / s2 B 2.5 m / s2 C 3.0 m / s2 D 3.5 m / s2
© UCLES 2019 0625/23/O/N/19

3
6 Four hollow glass spheres P, Q, R and S each have a mass of 72 g.
Their volumes are given in the table.
volume / cm3
P 55
Q 65
R 75
S 85
Which spheres sink in a liquid of density 0.9 g / cm3?
A P, Q and R B Q, R and S C R and S only D S only
7 The diagram shows a uniform metre rule. The rule is pivoted at its mid-point. A downward force of
4.0 N acts on the rule at the 5 cm mark. The rule is held by a string at the 30 cm mark. The rule is
in equilibrium.
string metre rule

0 cm mark 100 cm mark
5 50
30
pivot
4.0 N
What is the upward force that the string exerts on the rule?
A 0.67 N B 4.0 N C 6.0 N D 9.0 N
8 A ship sails due North at a speed of 20 m / s. A current in the water begins to move from East to
West. The speed of this current is 20 m / s.
What is the magnitude of the resultant velocity of the ship?
A 0m/s B 20 m / s C 28 m / s D 40 m / s
9 The momentum of a body is changed by a force acting on it for a period of time.
Which action increases the change in momentum?
A doubling the force and halving the time

B doubling the force for the same time
C halving both the force and time
D halving the force and doubling the time

4
10 A toy train P of mass 0.50 kg is travelling along a straight track with a velocity of 3.0 m / s. It
collides with a stationary train Q of mass 1.0 kg. The two trains then stick together.
What is the velocity of the combined trains?
A 1.0 m / s in the same direction as P was travelling originally

B 1.0 m / s in the reverse direction to that in which P was travelling originally
C 1.5 m / s in the same direction as P was travelling originally
D 1.5 m / s in the reverse direction to that in which P was travelling originally
A chemical
B elastic
C thermal
D sound
12 A force of 25 N acts on an object. The work done by the force is 400 J.
How far does the object move in the direction of the force?
A 6.3 cm B 16 cm C 16 m D 10 km
A 45 W B 205 W C 45 kW D 205 kW
© UCLES 2019 0625/23/O/N/19

5
the flat surface?
15 Which row compares the separation and the motion of the molecules of a hot gas with those of a
cool liquid? (Both the gas and the liquid are at the same pressure.)
separation motion
A greater for a gas faster for a gas

B greater for a gas slower for a gas
C smaller for a gas faster for a gas
D smaller for a gas slower for a gas
16 A fixed mass of gas has a volume of 25 cm3. The pressure of the gas is 100 kPa.
The volume of the gas is slowly decreased by 15 cm3 at constant temperature.
What is the change in pressure of the gas?
A 67 kPa B 150 kPa C 170 kPa D 250 kPa

6
A boiling
B condensation
C evaporation
D fusion
liquid thread
°C
–10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110
When the temperature of the thermometer rises, the changes produced cause the liquid thread to
move to the right.
Why does this happen when the temperature of the thermometer rises?
A Gases contract and liquids expand.

B Gases contract and solids expand.
C Liquids expand more than gases.
D Liquids expand more than solids.
© UCLES 2019 0625/23/O/N/19

7
19 A sealed metal box contains a fixed mass of air. The sides of the box are insulated.
air top
insulation
metal box bottom
A scientist investigates the thermal conductivity of air. She measures how quickly thermal energy
passes between the top and bottom of the box.
Which row gives the correct procedure and conclusion?
procedure conclusion
A heat bottom surface air is a good thermal conductor

B heat bottom surface air is a poor thermal conductor
C heat top surface air is a good thermal conductor
D heat top surface air is a poor thermal conductor
20 In a cold country, the ground is covered in snow. There is a pile of black sand outdoors and its
temperature is the same as that of the snow. A man sprinkles a thin layer of this sand over the
snow.
Why does the black sand help to melt the snow during the day?
A Any thermal energy still left in the sand will melt the snow.
B The black sand is a good absorber of the infrared radiation from the Sun.
C The black sand is a good conductor of thermal energy.
D The black sand lowers the melting point of the snow.

8
transmitter
hill receiver
through the hill.


22 A person stands 1.0 m in front of a plane mirror. The mirror is moved away from the person at a
speed of 1.0 m / s.
A The image moves away from the person at a speed of 1.0 m / s.

B The image moves away from the person at a speed of 2.0 m / s.
C The image moves towards the person at a speed of 1.0 m / s.
D The image moves towards the person at a speed of 2.0 m / s.
23 White light is refracted and dispersed when it enters a glass prism from air.
Which colour has the lowest speed as it moves through the glass prism?
A blue light
B orange light
C red light
D violet light
© UCLES 2019 0625/23/O/N/19

9
radio
waves
increasing ......................
A amplitude
B frequency
C speed
D wavelength

m/ s m/ s m/ s
A 500 1500 4000

B 1500 4000 500
C 4000 500 1500
D 4000 1500 500

nearby.


10

28 There is a current of 3.0 A in a resistor for time t. During time t, a charge of 120 C flows through
the resistor.
What is time t ?
A 0.025 minutes
B 0.025 s
C 40 minutes
D 40 s
X Y Z
A X→Y→Z
B Y→X→Z
C Z→X→Y
D Z→Y→X
© UCLES 2019 0625/23/O/N/19

11
30 Resistors of resistance 1.0 Ω, 2.0 Ω and 3.0 Ω are connected in parallel across the terminals of
a cell.
A The currents in the resistors are equal.

B The sum of the currents in the three resistors is equal to the current in the cell.
C The sum of the potential differences (p.d.’s) across the resistors is equal to the electromotive
force (e.m.f.) of the cell.
D The potential difference across the 3.0 Ω resistor is greater than the potential difference
across the other two resistors.
31 Diagram 1 shows a circuit containing an a.c. power supply, an unknown component X and a fixed
resistor.
The graph in diagram 2 shows how the potential difference (p.d.) across the resistor varies with
time.
X p.d.
0
0 time
diagram 1 diagram 2
What is component X?
A thermistor
B relay coil
C diode
D light-dependent resistor

12
32 An AND gate has two inputs and one output.
Which truth table represents the action of the AND gate?
A B
0 0 0 0 0 0
0 1 1 0 1 0
1 0 1 1 0 0
1 1 1 1 1 1
C D
0 0 1 0 0 1
0 1 1 0 1 0
1 0 1 1 0 0
1 1 0 1 1 0

34 A wire XY is connected to a resistor R. The wire is moved in the magnetic field between two
magnetic poles.
In which direction must the wire be moved so that the induced current is in the direction shown?
induced
current
X
S N
C D
R
© UCLES 2019 0625/23/O/N/19

13
35 A step-up transformer produces a 60 V a.c. output from a 12 V a.c. input.
There are 50 turns on the secondary coil.
How many turns are there on the primary coil?
A 5 B 10 C 50 D 250
36 An a.c. generator contains a coil that rotates at a rate of 4500 revolutions per minute.
What is the frequency of the alternating current?
A 1.25 Hz B 75 Hz C 150 Hz D 4500 Hz

38 The diagram represents a neutral atom.
nucleus
Which row identifies each type of particle in the diagram?
A electron neutron proton

B electron proton neutron
C neutron electron proton
D proton electron neutron

14
39 A thin metal foil is placed in a vacuum. α-particles are fired at the foil and most go straight
through. A very small proportion of the α-particles are deflected through large angles.
What does this provide evidence for?
A α-particles are very small.

B There are negative electrons in each atom.
C There is a tiny nucleus in each atom.
D There are neutrons in each atom.
40 The background count rate measured by a radiation counter is 40 counts per minute.
With the counter close to a radioactive source, the counter reading is 960 counts per minute.
The half-life of the source is 20 minutes.
What is the counter reading one hour later?

© UCLES 2019 0625/23/O/N/19

CAIE IGCSE Physics
October/November
PUBLISHED 2019
1 C 29 D
2 D 30 B
3 B 31 C
4 B 32 B
5 B 33 B
6 A 34 B
7 D 35 B
8 C 36 B
9 B 37 A
10 A 38 A
11 C 39 C
12 C 40 C
13 C
14 C
15 A
16 B
17 A
18 D
19 D
20 B
21 A
22 B
23 D
24 D
25 D
26 D
27 C
28 D

Cambridge IGCSE™
PHYSICS 0625/22
45 minutes
You must answer on the multiple choice answer sheet.

*6305326820*
You will need: Multiple choice answer sheet

Soft clean eraser
Soft pencil (type B or HB is recommended)
INSTRUCTIONS
• There are forty questions on this paper. Answer all questions.
• For each question there are four possible answers A, B, C and D. Choose the one you consider correct
and record your choice in soft pencil on the multiple choice answer sheet.
• Follow the instructions on the multiple choice answer sheet.
• Write in soft pencil.
• Write your name, centre number and candidate number on the multiple choice answer sheet in the
spaces provided unless this has been done for you.
• Do not use correction fluid.
• Do not write on any bar codes.
• You may use a calculator.
• Take the weight of 1.0 kg to be 10 N (acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s2).
INFORMATION
• The total mark for this paper is 40.
• Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer.
• Any rough working should be done on this question paper.
This document has 20 pages. Blank pages are indicated.
IB20 03_0625_22/5RP

2
1 The diagram shows a rectangular metal sheet close to two rulers.
30
metal sheet
20
10
cm
0
0 cm 10 20 30 40 50
What is the area of the metal sheet?
A 700 cm2 B 875 cm2 C 900 cm2 D 1125 cm2
2 A ball falls from rest through the air towards the ground. The diagram shows two forces acting on
the ball.
air resistance
gravitational force
As the ball falls, the air resistance increases.
A The acceleration of the ball decreases.

B The acceleration of the ball increases.
C The speed of the ball decreases.
D The gravitational force on the ball decreases.
© UCLES 2020 0625/22/F/M/20

3
3 A compressed spring projects a ball horizontally in a vacuum chamber.
On the Earth, the ball reaches the chamber floor 4.0 m in front of the spring.
An identical experiment is done on the Moon. The gravitational field strength is lower on the
Moon than on the Earth.
The experimental results on the Moon are compared with those on the Earth.
A The horizontal speed is greater on the Moon and the ball hits the floor 4.0 m in front of the
spring.
B The horizontal speed is greater on the Moon and the ball hits the floor more than 4.0 m in
front of the spring.
C The horizontal speed is the same on the Moon and the ball hits the floor 4.0 m in front of the
spring.
D The horizontal speed is the same on the Moon and the ball hits the floor more than 4.0 m in
front of the spring.
4 Diagram 1 shows a piece of flexible material that contains many pockets of air. Diagram 2 shows
the same piece of flexible material after it has been compressed so that its volume decreases.
diagram 1 diagram 2
(before compression) (after compression)
What happens to the mass and to the weight of the flexible material when it is compressed?
mass weight
A increases increases
B increases no change
C no change increases
D no change no change

4
5 The graph shows how the strength of the Earth’s gravitational field varies as the distance from
the Earth’s surface increases.
strength of
the Earth’s
gravitational
field
0
0 distance from the
surface of the Earth
Which row describes the effect that this has on the mass and on the weight of an object as it
moves further away from the Earth’s surface?
mass of object weight of object
B decreases unchanged
C unchanged decreases
D unchanged unchanged
6 A measuring cylinder contains 40 cm3 of water.
A solid metal ball is dropped into the water and the water level rises to 56 cm3.
The mass of the ball is 80 g.
What is the density of the metal from which the ball is made?
© UCLES 2020 0625/22/F/M/20

5
7 A car travels along a horizontal road at constant speed. Three horizontal forces act on the car.
The diagram shows two of these forces.
direction of
motion forwards
air resistance force from engine

300 N 1500 N
What is the size and the direction of the third horizontal force acting on the car?
A 1200 N backwards
B 1200 N forwards
C 1800 N backwards
D 1800 N forwards
8 A car is driven round a bend in the road at a constant speed.
car
direction of the
motion of the car
What is the direction of the resultant force on the car when it is going round the bend?
A parallel to the motion and in the same direction as the motion

B parallel to the motion and in the opposite direction to the motion
C perpendicular to the motion and towards the inside of the bend
D perpendicular to the motion and towards the outside of the bend

6
9 An athlete with mass 70 kg trains by performing press-ups with a load on his back. The diagram
shows the perpendicular distances involved.
The centre of mass of the athlete is CM and the centre of mass of the load he is carrying is CL.
0.1 m 0.3 m 0.9 m
load
CL
CM
The mass of the load is 6.0 kg.
What is the upward force exerted by his two arms?
A 54 N B 76 N C 540 N D 760 N
10 An air pistol fires a pellet forwards.
What is the motion of the air pistol?
A The air pistol moves backwards with speed greater than the pellet.
B The air pistol moves backwards with speed less than the pellet.
C The air pistol moves forward with speed greater than the pellet.
D The air pistol moves forward with speed less than the pellet.
11 Which row describes an advantage and a disadvantage of wind turbines?
advantage disadvantage
A no fuel needed harmful gases released

B variable supply fuel needed
C no harmful gases released variable supply
D constant supply noisy
12 An electric motor provides 900 J of useful output energy. The efficiency of the motor is 60 %.
How much electrical energy is supplied to the motor?
A 15 J B 540 J C 1500 J D 5400 J
© UCLES 2020 0625/22/F/M/20

7
13 A crane takes 2.0 minutes to lift a 500 kg load to the top of a building that is 12 m high.
What is the useful power developed against gravity by the crane?
A 21 W B 50 W C 500 W D 30 000 W
14 A skier is standing still on a flat area of snow.
skis
The weight of the skier is 550 N. The total area of his skis in contact with the ground is 0.015 m2.
What is the pressure exerted on the ground by the skier?
A 0.83 N / m2 B 8.3 N / m2 C 3700 N / m2 D 37 000 N / m2

8
15 A tall cylinder is partly filled with two liquids which do not mix. The two liquids have different
densities. A student measures the pressure due to the liquids at different depths.
position P
two liquids with

different densities
position Q
Which graph shows how the liquid pressure varies between positions P and Q?
A B
Q
Q
pressure pressure
P P
depth depth
C D
Q
pressure pressure
P Q
P
depth depth
16 When pollen grains in water are viewed through a microscope, they are seen to be in continuous,
rapid random motion.
What causes a pollen grain to move in this way?
A convection currents in the water

B bombardment by a single molecule of water
C uneven bombardment on different sides by water molecules
D collision with another pollen grain due to their kinetic energies
© UCLES 2020 0625/22/F/M/20

9
17 A student measures the mass of warm water in an open container over two minutes. The
container is kept at a constant temperature. The results are in the table.
time / minutes mass / g
0.0 33.9
0.5 30.6
1.0 27.6
1.5 24.9
2.0 22.5
Why does the mass of the water change?
A The water evaporates.

B The water freezes.
C The water condenses.
D The water boils.
18 Which points are the fixed points of the liquid-in-glass thermometer shown?
–10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110

°C
A the beginning and end points of the column of liquid
B the points marked –10 °C and 110 °C
C the points marked 0 °C and 100 °C

D the top and bottom points of the thermometer bulb

10
19 The specific heat capacities of aluminium, iron, ethanol and water are given.
specific heat capacity

substance
J / kg °C
aluminium 900
iron 450
ethanol 2400
water 4200
1 kg of each metal is put into 5 kg of each liquid.
The starting temperature of each metal is 60 °C. The starting temperature of each liquid is 10 °C.
Which example has the highest final temperature?
metal liquid
A aluminium ethanol
B iron ethanol
C aluminium water
D iron water
20 Metals are good thermal conductors.
Insulators are poor thermal conductors.
Which description of the mechanism of thermal conductivity is correct?
A In insulators, conduction takes place by electron transfer and molecular vibrations.

B In insulators, conduction takes place by electron transfer only.
C In metals, conduction takes place by electron transfer and molecular vibrations.
D In metals, conduction takes place by electron transfer only.
© UCLES 2020 0625/22/F/M/20

11
21 A teacher shows his class a polystyrene cup. The cup is made from thick plastic with lots of tiny
air bubbles in it.
He asks the class why the cup is so good at keeping a hot drink warm. Three suggestions are
made.
1 It contains air which is a poor thermal conductor.

2 The air is trapped in tiny bubbles so very little convection is possible.
3 The plastic is a poor thermal conductor.
Which suggestions are correct?
A 1 and 2 only B 1 and 3 only C 2 and 3 only D 1, 2 and 3
22 A boy jumps into an indoor swimming pool. He notices that the water appears to get colder as he
goes deeper underwater. This is due to convection.
A Cold water is more dense than warm water so it sinks to the bottom of the pool.
B Warm water is more dense than cold water so it rises to the surface of the pool.
C The molecules in cold water have more kinetic energy than the molecules in warm water so
they move to the bottom of the pool faster.
D The molecules in warm water are closer together than the molecules in cold water so they
rise to the surface of the pool.
23 Four students A, B, C and D, investigate the diffraction of water waves through a gap.
Each student uses a different gap size and a different wavelength for the water waves.
Which student produces the waves which have the most diffraction?
gap size wavelength

/ cm / cm
A 2.0 1.8
B 3.0 2.1
C 4.0 2.0
D 5.0 0.9

12
24 The diagrams show examples of wave motion.
1 2
ripple tank
drum
waves on water waves in air
3 4
waves on a rope waves in a spring
Which waves are longitudinal?
A 1 only B 2 and 3 only C 2, 3 and 4 D 2 and 4 only
© UCLES 2020 0625/22/F/M/20

13
25 Which diagram shows how the light from a candle is reflected by a mirror, and shows the position
of the image formed?
A B
image of image of
candle candle
candle candle
eye
eye
mirror mirror
C D
candle candle
image of
candle eye
image of eye
candle
mirror mirror
26 A converging lens can be used as a magnifying glass.
What will be the nature of the image?
A real, inverted, diminished

B real, upright, enlarged
C virtual, inverted, enlarged
D virtual, upright, enlarged

14
27 The wavelength of blue light changes from 4.7 × 10–7 m to 3.5 × 10–7 m as it passes from air to
water.
What is the speed of this light in water?
A 7.4 × 107 m / s
B 1.3 × 108 m / s
C 2.2 × 108 m / s
D 3.0 × 108 m / s
28 The diagram shows compressions and rarefactions in air as a sound wave moves from left to
right.
rarefaction compression
A quieter sound of the same frequency is made.
What will happen to the number of particles in a region of rarefaction and in a region of
compression?
number of particles in number of particles in

region of rarefaction region of compression
A decrease decrease
B decrease increase
C increase decrease
D increase increase
© UCLES 2020 0625/22/F/M/20

15
29 The diagrams show three different metal rods P, Q and R, inside coils of wire.
Small iron nails are placed on a wooden bench under the rods.
Diagram 1 shows the situation when there are electric currents in the wires.
Diagram 2 shows the situation when the currents are switched off.
diagram 1
P Q R
current
in coils
wooden
bench
diagram 2
P Q R
no
current
in coils
wooden
bench
Which row correctly identifies the metal rods?
P Q R
A copper soft iron steel

B soft iron copper steel
C steel soft iron copper
D copper steel soft iron

16
30 Which row describes conventional current and electron flow in a circuit containing a cell?
conventional current electron flow

A from the negative terminal of the cell from the negative terminal of the cell
to the positive terminal of the cell to the positive terminal of the cell
B from the negative terminal of the cell from the positive terminal of the cell to
to the positive terminal of the cell the negative terminal of the cell
C from the positive terminal of the cell to from the negative terminal of the cell
the negative terminal of the cell to the positive terminal of the cell
D from the positive terminal of the cell to from the positive terminal of the cell to
the negative terminal of the cell the negative terminal of the cell
31 A student makes four resistors using different pieces of wire. The wires have different diameters
and lengths. All the pieces of wire are made of the same material.
Which piece of wire will make the resistor with the largest resistance?
diameter / mm length / cm
A 0.8 10
B 0.8 17
C 2.0 10
D 2.0 17
32 A student is to determine the resistance of resistor R. She uses a circuit including a voltmeter and
an ammeter.
Which circuit should be used?
A B C D
V A V V A
R R R R
A A V
© UCLES 2020 0625/22/F/M/20

17
33 The diagram shows a battery connected to two resistors. Three ammeters M1, M2 and M3 are
connected in the circuit.
M1 A A M3
A
M2
Ammeter M1 reads 1.0 A.
What are the readings on M2 and on M3?
reading on reading on
M2 / A M3 / A
A 0.0 0.0
B 0.5 0.5
C 0.5 1.0
D 1.0 1.0
34 A cell is connected to a parallel combination of a 2.0 Ω resistor and a 4.0 Ω resistor. The current
in the 4.0 Ω resistor is 1.0 A.
2.0 Ω
4.0 Ω
1.0 A
What is the current in the cell?
A 1.0 A B 1.5 A C 2.0 A D 3.0 A

18
35 The two inputs of a NAND gate are joined together.
input output
Which truth table represents the action of this gate?
A B C D
input output input output input output input output
0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1
1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1
36 The diagram shows a transformer that has an output voltage of 12 V.
primary coil with

1000 turns soft iron core
240 V a.c. 12 V a.c.

input output
secondary coil
How many turns of wire are in the secondary coil?
A 12 B 20 C 50 D 20 000
© UCLES 2020 0625/22/F/M/20

19
37 The diagrams show different particles moving through a magnetic field.
Which particle experiences a magnetic force acting up out of the plane of the paper?
A B
proton electron
C D
proton electron
38 When Rutherford bombarded thin gold foil with α-particles, he found that some α-particles were
deflected through large angles.
Which statement explains this deflection?
A Most of the atom consists of empty space.

B All of the positive charge and most of the mass of the gold atom are concentrated in a small
volume.
C Positive charge in the gold atom is spread evenly throughout the atom.
D All of the negative charge is concentrated at its centre.

20
39 The diagram shows the path followed by α-particles as they pass between two charged plates.
They are deflected downwards.
+ + + + + + + + +
β-particles
α-particles
– – – – – – – – –
What happens to β-particles passing through the same electric field?
A They are deflected downwards more than the α-particles.

B They are deflected upwards.
C They are not deflected at all.
D They are deflected downwards by the same amount as the α-particles.
40 The graph shows the count rate from a radioactive source over a period of time.
2000
count rate
counts / s
1500
1000
500
0
0 1 2 3
time / hours
A 0.5 hour B 1.0 hour C 1.5 hours D 3.0 hours
© UCLES 2020 0625/22/F/M/20

CAIE IGCSE Physics
March 2
2020
PUBLISHED
1 A 29 A
2 A 30 C
3 D 31 B
4 D 32 D
5 C 33 D
6 D 34 D
7 A 35 B
8 C 36 C
9 C 37 C
10 B 38 B
11 C 39 B
12 C 40 B
13 C
14 D
15 B
16 C
17 A
18 C
19 A
20 C
21 D
22 A
23 A
24 D
25 A
26 D
27 C
28 C

Cambridge IGCSE™
PHYSICS 0625/21
45 minutes

*6425434103*

Soft clean eraser
INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION
IB20 06_0625_21/4RP

2
1 A pendulum makes 50 complete swings in 2 min 40 s.
What is the time period for 1 complete swing?
A 1.6 s B 3.2 s C 4.8 s D 6.4 s
2 A student investigates the motion of a ball rolling down a slope.
The diagram shows the speed v of the ball at different times t.
t = 0s
v = 0 cm / s
t = 0.2 s
v = 2.8 cm / s
t = 0.4 s
ball v = 5.1 cm / s t = 0.6 s
v = 7.0 cm / s
Which statement describes the motion of the ball?
A The acceleration is not constant.

B The acceleration is negative.
C The speed is decreasing.
D The velocity is constant.
3 Which statement about acceleration is correct?
A It is related to the changing speed of an object.

B It is the distance an object travels in one second.
C It is the force acting on an object divided by the distance it travels in one second.
D It is the force acting on an object when it is near to the Earth.
4 Which statement correctly describes the effects of placing a heavy load in a car?
A It is easier to accelerate the car and easier to bring the car to rest.
B It is easier to accelerate the car but more difficult to bring the car to rest.
C It is more difficult to accelerate the car and more difficult to bring the car to rest.
D It is more difficult to accelerate the car but easier to bring the car to rest.
© UCLES 2020 0625/21/M/J/20

3
5 A mass of 6.0 kg rests on the surface of a planet.
On this planet, g = 20 N / kg.
A 0.30 N B 0.60 N C 60 N D 120 N
6 The mass of a measuring cylinder is 190 g.
400 cm3 of liquid is put into the measuring cylinder.
The total mass of the measuring cylinder and the liquid is 560 g.
Four solid objects are lowered in turn into the liquid. The densities of the objects are shown.
1 0.40 g / cm3
2 0.90 g / cm3
3 1.2 g / cm3
4 2.7 g / cm3
Which objects will float in the liquid?
A 1 only B 1 and 2 only C 1, 2 and 3 D 3 and 4 only
7 The diagram shows a wooden beam PQ, of negligible weight, which is attached to a wall by a
hinge at P and kept in a horizontal position by a vertical rope attached at Q.
The beam is 3.0 m in length.
A man of weight 800 N walks along the beam from P to Q.
wall man
rope
beam
P Q
hinge
What is the distance of the man from P when the tension in the rope at Q becomes equal to
500 N?
A 0.53 m B 1.1 m C 1.9 m D 2.5 m

4
8 Which quantity is a vector?
A acceleration
B distance
C speed
D mass
9 An object of mass 1.2 kg is moving with a velocity of 2.0 m / s when it is acted on by a force of
4.0 N. The velocity of the object increases to 5.0 m / s.
For what period of time does the force act on the object?
A 0.90 s B 1.1 s C 1.5 s D 3.6 s
10 The diagram shows part of a rollercoaster ride with the car at different positions.
The car runs freely down from position X to position Y and up the hill on the other side.
car
X
What happens to the kinetic energy and to the gravitational potential energy of the car as it
moves from position X to position Y?
gravitational
kinetic energy
potential energy
© UCLES 2020 0625/21/M/J/20

5
11 Which energy resource does not have the Sun as the original source?
A coal
B geothermal
C hydroelectric
D wind
12 The diagram shows a solid block resting on a bench. The dimensions of the block are shown.
40 cm
20 cm
Q
R bench
80 cm P
On which labelled surface should the block rest to produce the smallest pressure on the bench?
A P
B Q
C R
D P, Q and R produce the same pressure
13 The pressure due to the liquid on an object immersed in that liquid is 4500 Pa.
The density of the liquid is 900 kg / m3.
What is the depth of the object below the surface of the liquid?
A 0.5 cm B 2.0 cm C 50 cm D 200 cm
14 A gas is heated in a sealed container.
The volume of the container does not change.
What happens to the molecules of the gas?
A The average distance between molecules increases.

B The average kinetic energy of the molecules increases.
C The mass of each molecule increases.
D The volume of each molecule increases.

6
15 Water in a beaker evaporates when left on a bench for a period of time.
Which three factors all affect the rate of evaporation of the water?
A wind speed, surface area, temperature

B wind speed, temperature, volume
C wind speed, surface area, volume
D surface area, temperature, volume
16 A solid is heated causing it to expand.
What effect does this have on its mass and on its density?
mass density
B decreases stays constant
C stays constant decreases
D stays constant stays constant
17 The diagrams show four blocks of steel. The blocks are all drawn to the same scale.
The same quantity of thermal energy is given to each block.
Which block shows the greatest rise in temperature?
A B C D
18 Why are metals better thermal conductors than other solids?
A Metals contain free electrons which help transfer the energy.

B Molecules in metals are in fixed positions.
C Molecules in metals can move freely.
D Molecules in metals vibrate faster than those in other solids.
© UCLES 2020 0625/21/M/J/20

7
19 Two freezers X and Y are identical except that one has a door opening at the front and the other
has a door opening at the top.
door
freezer
freezer
door
X Y
Both doors are the same size and are opened for the same amount of time.
Which freezer gains the least amount of thermal energy in this time and why?
freezer gaining the

reason
least thermal energy
A X cold air falls

B X warm air falls
C Y cold air falls
D Y warm air falls
20 A wave of frequency 6600 Hz travels 1320 m in 4.0 s.
What is the wavelength?
A 0.050 m B 0.80 m C 1.3 m D 20 m

8
8 cm
3 cm
6 cm
4 cm
What are the amplitude and the wavelength of this wave?
amplitude / cm wavelength / cm
A 3 4
B 3 8
C 6 4
D 6 8
22 Which statement is correct?
A The speed of light in glass is equal to the speed of light in a vacuum multiplied by the
refractive index of glass.
B The incident angle of a light ray at an air-glass surface is the angle between the ray and the
glass surface.
C The sine of the critical angle at an air-glass surface is equal to 1 .

refractive index of glass
D The angle of refraction for light passing through an air-glass surface is proportional to the
angle of incidence at that surface.
© UCLES 2020 0625/21/M/J/20

9
23 A narrow beam of white light passes through a prism and is dispersed into a spectrum.
1
white 2
light 3
colour 1 colour 2 colour 3
A blue yellow red

B red blue yellow
C red yellow blue
D yellow blue red
24 An intruder alarm sensor detects that a person is warmer than his surroundings.
Which type of electromagnetic wave does the sensor detect?
A infrared
B radio
C ultraviolet
D visible light
25 Sound travels through air as a series of compressions and rarefactions.
Which statement correctly compares a compression with a rarefaction?
A In a compression the wavelength is longer than in a rarefaction.

B In a compression the wavelength is shorter than in a rarefaction.
C In a compression the density of the air is greater than in a rarefaction.
D In a compression the density of the air is lower than in a rarefaction.

10
26 Four nails A, B, C and D are tested to find which makes the strongest permanent magnet.
One of the nails is placed against a bar magnet and the number of paper clips which the nail can
support is recorded.
nail
N S
bar magnet
paper clips
The bar magnet is then removed and the number of paper clips remaining attached to the nail is
recorded. Each nail is tested individually.
Which nail becomes the strongest permanent magnet?
number of paper clips attached to the nail

bar magnet present bar magnet removed
A 2 0
B 2 1
C 4 3
D 5 2
27 The circuit shows one method of magnetising a steel bar.
+ –
steel bar
How can the circuit be altered so that it can be used to demagnetise the magnetised steel bar?
A remove the steel bar from the coil whilst the current is switched on
B replace the d.c. supply with an a.c. supply and gradually reduce the supply voltage to zero
C reverse the polarity of the d.c. supply
D reverse the polarity of the d.c. supply and gradually reduce the supply voltage to zero
© UCLES 2020 0625/21/M/J/20

11
28 A student uses the circuit shown to determine the resistance of two identical resistors.
The voltmeter reading is 2.2 V and the ammeter reading is 0.25 A.
What is the resistance of each resistor?
A 0.275 Ω B 0.55 Ω C 4.4 Ω D 8.8 Ω
29 An electric fire is connected to a 240 V supply and transfers energy at a rate of 1.0 kW.
How much charge passes through the fire in 1.0 h?
A 42 C B 250 C C 1.5 × 104 C D 2.4 × 105 C
30 The diagram shows an incomplete circuit. The temperature and light levels around the circuit
remain unchanged.
P Q
A
Four electrical components are connected in turn across PQ. The cell is reversed and the four
electrical components are connected again in turn across PQ.
For which component is there a significant change in the magnitude of the current?
A diode
B light-dependent resistor
C resistor
D thermistor

12
31 In the circuit shown, A1 and A2 are ammeters.
A1 A2
S
Switch S is closed.
the resistance of
reading of A1 reading of A2
the whole circuit
A decreases stays the same increases

B decreases increases increases
C increases stays the same stays the same
D increases decreases decreases
32 Which symbol represents an OR gate?
A B C D
© UCLES 2020 0625/21/M/J/20

13
33 A digital circuit consists of two logic gates.
When the input to the circuit is 1 and 1, the output is 0.
1
digital
input 0 output
circuit
1
Which combination of logic gates gives this result?
A B
C D
34 The diagram shows a wire between the poles of a magnet.
The wire is perpendicular to the page.
N
wire
LEFT RIGHT
The wire is moved and a current is induced upwards, out of the paper.
In which direction is the wire moved?
A left to right
B right to left
C up the page
D down the page

14
35 A 100% efficient transformer converts a 240 V input voltage to a 12 V output voltage. The output
power of the transformer can be a maximum of 20 W.
The output is connected to two 0.30 A bulbs in parallel. One of the bulbs fails.
How does the current in the primary coil change?
A It decreases by 0.30 A.
B It decreases by 0.015 A.
C It increases by 0.15 A.
D It remains unchanged.
36 Cables transmit electrical power from the output of the transformer at a power station to the input
of the transformer at a substation.
cables
output input
transformer at transformer at
power station substation
The power at the output of the transformer at the power station is 400 MW.
Which situation delivers the most power to the input of the transformer at the substation?
potential difference at
power station transformer diameter of cables
output / kV
A 200 large
B 200 small
C 400 large
D 400 small
© UCLES 2020 0625/21/M/J/20

15
37 Uranium-235 is a radioactive isotope. It undergoes a chain of decays and eventually forms the
stable isotope lead-207. These two isotopes are represented as shown.
235 207
92U 82 Pb
During this chain of decay, how many protons and how many neutrons are lost from a single
nucleus of uranium-235 to form a single nucleus of lead-207?
protons neutrons
A 10 18
B 10 28
C 18 10
D 28 10
38 A radioactive material has a half-life of 20 days.
A sample of the material contains 8.0 × 1010 atoms.
How many atomic nuclei have decayed after 60 days?
A 1.0 × 1010 B 4.0 × 1010 C 6.0 × 1010 D 7.0 × 1010
39 A thin sheet of paper is placed between a radioactive source and a radiation detector. The count
rate falls to a very low reading.
paper
detector
counter
source
From this result, which type of radiation is the source emitting?
A α-particles
B β-particles
C γ-rays
D X-rays

16
40 α-particles, β-particles and γ-rays are emitted by radioactive nuclei when they decay.
Which emissions can be deflected by an electric field?
B β-particles and γ-rays only
C γ-rays and α-particles only
© UCLES 2020 0625/21/M/J/20

CAIE IGCSE Physics
May/June 2
2020
PUBLISHED
1 B 29 C
2 A 30 A
3 A 31 B
4 C 32 A
5 D 33 C
6 B 34 B
7 C 35 B
8 A 36 C
9 A 37 A
10 C 38 D
11 B 39 A
12 A 40 A
13 C
14 B
15 A
16 C
17 A
18 A
19 C
20 A
21 B
22 C
23 C
24 A
25 C
26 C
27 B
28 C

Cambridge IGCSE™
PHYSICS 0625/22
45 minutes

*2715201136*

Soft clean eraser
INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION
IB20 06_0625_22/4RP

2
1 Five athletes P, Q, R, S and T compete in a race. The table shows the finishing times for the
athletes.
athlete P Q R S T
finishing time / s 22.50 24.40 25.20 26.50 23.20
A Athlete P won the race and was 0.70 s ahead of the athlete in second place.
B Athlete P won the race and was 1.90 s ahead of the athlete in second place.
C Athlete S won the race and was 1.30 s ahead of the athlete in second place.
D Athlete S won the race and was 2.10 s ahead of the athlete in second place.
t = 0s
v = 0 cm / s
t = 0.2 s
v = 2.8 cm / s
t = 0.4 s
ball v = 5.1 cm / s t = 0.6 s
v = 7.0 cm / s


© UCLES 2020 0625/22/M/J/20

3
5 A space probe is taken from the Earth to Mars.
The force of gravity on the surface of Mars is less than the force of gravity on the surface of the
Earth.
How do the weight and the mass of a space probe on the surface of Mars compare to their values
when the probe is on the surface of the Earth?
weight on Mars mass on Mars
A decreased decreased
B decreased unchanged
C unchanged decreased
6 Water has a density of 1000 kg / m3.
A rectangular swimming pool has an average depth of 1.6 m.
The length of the pool is 25 m.
The width of the pool is 10 m.
What is the mass of the water in the swimming pool?
A 2.5 kg B 400 kg C 400 000 kg D 800 000 kg
7 A satellite orbits the Earth at constant speed in a circular orbit.
A The resultant force on the satellite is zero.

B The resultant force on the satellite is towards the Earth.
C The resultant force on the satellite is away from the Earth.
D The resultant force on the satellite is in the direction of motion.

4
8 Two forces P and Q act on an object.
Which diagram shows the resultant of these two forces?
A B C D
P resultant P resultant P P
resultant resultant
Q Q Q Q
9 An object is moving at +3.0 m / s.
A force acts on the object.
After a time, the object is moving at – 4.0 m / s.
The mass of the object is 5.0 kg.
What is the change in momentum of the body?
A –35 kg m / s B –5.0 kg m / s C +5.0 kg m / s D +35 kg m / s
10 Which energy resource is not renewable?
A geothermal
B nuclear fission
C solar
D wind
11 A car of mass 500 kg is moving at 10 m / s. The engine does work on the car and the speed
increases to 16 m / s.
How much work is done by the engine to increase the speed of the car?
A 3000 J B 9000 J C 39 000 J D 78 000 J
© UCLES 2020 0625/22/M/J/20

5
40 cm
20 cm
Q
R bench
80 cm P
A P
B Q
C R
13 An object is 60 cm below the surface of a liquid. The pressure due to the liquid at this depth is
9000 Pa.
A 15 kg / m3 B 540 kg / m3 C 1500 kg / m3 D 54 000 kg / m3
14 Which row describes the forces between the molecules and the motion of the molecules in a
solid?
forces between motion

molecules of molecules
A strong move freely

B strong vibrate only
C weak move freely
D weak vibrate only

6
15 Wet clothes are hanging outside to dry.
Which condition decreases the rate of evaporation of the water from the clothes?
A folded clothes
B higher temperature
C wetter clothes
D windy day
glass bulb stem capillary tube
–10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
liquid
The design of this thermometer includes the following features.
1 a liquid which expands linearly when it is heated

2 a glass bulb which has a thick glass wall
3 a capillary tube with a very small diameter
Which features increase the sensitivity of the thermometer?
A 1 only B 1 and 2 C 2 and 3 D 3 only
A B C D
© UCLES 2020 0625/22/M/J/20

7
18 A room is heated by a radiator. The diagrams X and Y show two possible circulations of hot air,
which heat the room.
diagram X ceiling diagram Y ceiling
radiator radiator
floor floor
Which diagram and reason explain the heating of the room by convection?
diagram reason
A X air density decreases when air is heated

B X air density increases when air is heated
C Y air density decreases when air is heated
D Y air density increases when air is heated
19 Two copper containers P and Q are filled with hot water.
The diagrams are both drawn to the same scale.
P Q
Container P emits more infrared radiation from its surfaces than container Q.
What is a possible reason for this?
A The surfaces of P are painted white and the surfaces of Q are painted black.
B The surfaces of P are shiny and the surfaces of Q are dull.
C The surfaces of P have a smaller area than the surfaces of Q.
D The water in P is hotter than the water in Q.

8
8 cm
3 cm
6 cm
4 cm
A 3 4
B 3 8
C 6 4
D 6 8
21 The frequency of the microwaves used in a microwave oven is 2400 MHz.
What is the wavelength of these microwaves?
A 0.125 m B 8.00 m C 125 m D 7200 m
© UCLES 2020 0625/22/M/J/20

9
22 An object O is placed in front of a plane mirror as shown.
O
plane mirror
1 2
position of nature of
the image the image
A 1 real
B 1 virtual
C 2 real
D 2 virtual
glass surface.

A infrared
B radio
C ultraviolet
D visible light
25 A dolphin sends out a sound wave. An echo returns 0.010 s later from a fish which is 7.5 m from
the dolphin.
What is the speed of the sound wave in water?
A 0.075 m / s B 0.15 m / s C 750 m / s D 1500 m / s

10
nail
N S
bar magnet
paper clips

A 2 0
B 2 1
C 4 3
D 5 2
© UCLES 2020 0625/22/M/J/20

11
27 A student wants to demagnetise a steel bar. He uses the apparatus shown. He switches on the
circuit for a few seconds and then switches off. He finds that the steel bar is still magnetised.
steel bar coil
a.c.
supply
What should he do to improve his method?
A change the supply from an alternating to a direct voltage

B use a lower alternating voltage
C remove the steel bar from the coil whilst the circuit is switched on
D use a coil that has fewer turns on it
28 A cloth is used to rub an uncharged plastic rod.
Both the rod and the cloth become charged.
Why does the plastic rod become negatively charged and the cloth become positively charged?
A The rod gains electrons and the cloth gains positive charges.
B The rod gains electrons and the cloth loses electrons.
C The rod loses electrons and the cloth gains electrons.
D The rod loses electrons and the cloth loses positive charges.

12
A 0.275 Ω B 0.55 Ω C 4.4 Ω D 8.8 Ω
30 A cell passes a current of 2.0 A in a circuit for 30 s. In this time the cell transfers 120 J of energy.
What is the electromotive force (e.m.f.) of the cell?
A 0.50 V B 1.5 V C 2.0 V D 8.0 V
31 The circuit shown contains five lamps J, K, L, M and N. All the lamps are glowing.
lamp L
lamp K
lamp J
lamp N
lamp M
One lamp is removed and two other lamps go out.
Which lamp is removed?
A lamp J
B lamp K
C lamp L
D lamp M
© UCLES 2020 0625/22/M/J/20

13
32 What is the effective resistance of the following combination of resistors?
6.0 Ω
4.0 Ω
8.0 Ω
A 1.8 Ω B 7.4 Ω C 11 Ω D 18 Ω
33 Which symbol represents a NAND gate?
A B C D
34 The diagram shows a circuit used to switch on a heater when the temperature drops below a
certain value.
Which row shows the components that should be connected at X and at Y?
X Y

14
35 The diagram shows the magnetic field due to a current in a solenoid.
Where is the magnetic field the strongest?
36 A beam of electrons is passed through the magnetic field of a magnet.
How must the magnet be positioned to deflect the beam in the direction shown?
A B
e–
e–
N S direction S
of beam
direction
of beam
N
C D
e–
e–
S N direction N
of beam
direction
of beam
S
© UCLES 2020 0625/22/M/J/20

15
37 Uranium-235 can undergo nuclear fission in many ways.
Which equation correctly shows a possible fission reaction for uranium-235?
1 + 235U → 141Ba + 92Kr +

A
0n 92 56 36 301n
1 + 235U → 91Sr + 144Xe +
B
0n 92 38 54 201n
1 + 235U → 95Rb + 136Cs +
C
0n 92 37 55 301n
1 + 235U → 87Br + 146La +
D
0n 92 35 57 401n
A 1.0 × 1010 B 4.0 × 1010 C 6.0 × 1010 D 7.0 × 1010
paper
detector
counter
source
A α-particles
B β-particles
C γ-rays
D X-rays

16
© UCLES 2020 0625/22/M/J/20

CAIE IGCSE Physics
May/June 2
2020
PUBLISHED
1 A 29 C
2 A 30 C
3 A 31 A
4 C 32 B
5 B 33 B
6 C 34 B
7 B 35 C
8 C 36 B
9 A 37 A
10 B 38 D
11 C 39 A
12 A 40 A
13 C
14 B
15 A
16 D
17 A
18 A
19 D
20 B
21 A
22 B
23 C
24 A
25 D
26 C
27 C
28 B

Cambridge IGCSE™
PHYSICS 0625/23
45 minutes

*4570649359*

Soft clean eraser
INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION
IB20 06_0625_23/3RP

2
1 Diagram 1 shows a solid, rectangular-sided block.
top
front side
diagram 1
Diagram 2 shows the same block from the front and from the side.
7
6
5
4
front side
3
2
cm 1
cm 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
diagram 2
Metre rules have been shown close to the edges of the block.
What is the volume of the block?
A 120 cm3 B 168 cm3 C 264 cm3 D 1155 cm3
© UCLES 2020 0625/23/M/J/20

3
t = 0s
v = 0 cm / s
t = 0.2 s
v = 2.8 cm / s
t = 0.4 s
ball v = 5.1 cm / s t = 0.6 s
v = 7.0 cm / s



4
5 Which row gives the correct weight for the mass shown?
The value of g is 10 N / kg.
mass / kg weight / N
A 2 20
B 10 1
C 10 10
D 20 2
6 A rectangular gymnasium is 50 m long, 25 m wide and 8.0 m high.
The density of air is 1.2 kg / m3.
What is the best estimate of the mass of air in the gymnasium?
A 0.00012 kg B 100 kg C 8300 kg D 12 000 kg
7 Which moving object has a resultant force acting on it?
A a diver rising vertically through water at constant speed

B an aircraft circling an airport at constant speed
C a parachutist descending vertically at terminal velocity
D a train going up a straight slope at constant speed
8 Which quantity is not a vector?
A acceleration
B temperature
C velocity
D weight
© UCLES 2020 0625/23/M/J/20

5
9 A ball falls vertically to the floor and rebounds vertically upwards.
Just before it hits the floor, its speed is 4.0 m / s.
As it rebounds, its speed is 3.0 m / s.
The mass of the ball is 0.50 kg.
What is the change in momentum of the ball?
A 0.50 kg m / s downwards
B 0.50 kg m / s upwards
C 3.5 kg m / s downwards
D 3.5 kg m / s upwards
10 A mass bounces up and down on a steel spring. The diagram shows the mass and the spring at
different points during the motion.
highest mass mass

point moving moving
down up
lowest
point
At which point does the mass have the least gravitational potential energy and at which point is
the most elastic energy stored in the spring?
least amount of
most elastic energy
gravitational
stored in spring
potential energy
A mass moving down mass moving up

B mass moving down lowest point
C lowest point mass moving up
D lowest point lowest point

6
11 The velocity v of an object increases as it falls towards the ground.
Which quantity is directly proportional to v2?
A the speed of the object

B the gravitational potential energy of the object
C the kinetic energy of the object
D the momentum of the object
40 cm
20 cm
Q
R bench
80 cm P
A P
B Q
C R
13 A pipe full of water connects a water supply on a hill to a tap lower down the hill.
The length of the pipe is 500 m. The height of the supply above the tap is 100 m.
The density of the water is 1000 kg / m3. The effect of atmospheric pressure is negligible.
What is the water pressure at the tap?
A 100 000 Pa
B 500 000 Pa
C 1 000 000 Pa
D 5 000 000 Pa
© UCLES 2020 0625/23/M/J/20

7
14 When a molecule rebounds from a wall, a force is exerted on the wall.
What causes this force?
A the kinetic energy gained by the molecule

B the kinetic energy lost by the molecule
C the change of momentum of the molecule
D the change of speed of the molecule
15 The relationship between pressure p and volume V of a gas is given as pV = constant.
Under which conditions for the mass of a gas and for its temperature does the equation hold?
mass temperature
A changing changing
B changing constant
C constant changing
D constant constant
X Y
Which row gives the correct labels for the thermometer?
X Y
A water narrow tube of uniform diameter

B alcohol narrow tube of uniform diameter
C water this end immersed in substance to be measured
D alcohol this end immersed in substance to be measured

8
A B C D
18 Why are metals better conductors of thermal energy than non-metals?
A They contain free electrons.

B Their molecules are further apart.
C Their molecules vibrate at a higher frequency.
D They have smoother surfaces.
19 The diagram shows a vacuum flask used to keep a liquid warm.
airtight lid
outer cover
vacuum
silvered walls
Which methods of heat loss are reduced by the vacuum between the silvered walls?
A conduction only
B conduction and convection only
C convection and radiation only
D conduction, convection and radiation
© UCLES 2020 0625/23/M/J/20

9
20 An earthquake-monitoring station records the arrival of 16 complete waves of an earthquake

wave in 20 s.
The speed of the earthquake wave is 6.0 km / s.
What is the wavelength of the earthquake wave?
A 1.3 × 10–4 m
B 2.1 × 10–4 m
C 4.8 × 103 m
D 7.5 × 103 m
8 cm
3 cm
6 cm
4 cm
A 3 4
B 3 8
C 6 4
D 6 8
glass surface.


10
23 Which statement about converging lenses is correct?
A A real image of an object projected onto a screen by a converging lens is always inverted.
B The image formed by a converging lens is always upright.
C The image formed by a converging lens when used as a magnifying glass is a real image.
D Parallel rays entering a converging lens are focused at a distance greater than the focal
length from the lens.
A infrared
B radio
C ultraviolet
D visible light
25 Two people are standing outdoors on either side of a high wall.
person 1 person 2
Person 1 can hear person 2 talking although he cannot see her.
A The sound waves have diffracted around the wall.

B The sound waves have passed unaffected through the wall.
C The sound waves have reflected around the wall.
D The sound waves have refracted around the wall.
© UCLES 2020 0625/23/M/J/20

11
nail
N S
bar magnet
paper clips

A 2 0
B 2 1
C 4 3
D 5 2

12
27 The diagrams show a magnetised steel rod inside a solenoid connected to a potentiometer.
In diagram 1, the potentiometer is connected to a d.c. power supply.
In diagram 2, the potentiometer is connected to an a.c. power supply.
magnetised magnetised
steel steel
P Q R S
d.c. a.c.
diagram 1 diagram 2
Which action would demagnetise the piece of steel?
A In diagram 1, move the potentiometer slide from P to Q.

B In diagram 1, move the potentiometer slide from Q to P.
C In diagram 2, move the potentiometer slide from R to S.
D In diagram 2, move the potentiometer slide from S to R.
28 The diagram shows a positively charged conducting sphere and a wire connected to earth.
positively charged sphere

+
+ +
wire + +
+
earth
insulating support
What happens when the wire is touched onto the sphere?
A Electrons flow from earth to the sphere.

B Electrons flow from the sphere to earth.
C Positive charges flow from earth to the sphere.
D Positive charges flow from the sphere to earth.
© UCLES 2020 0625/23/M/J/20

13
A 0.275 Ω B 0.55 Ω C 4.4 Ω D 8.8 Ω
30 There is a current of 2.0 A in a resistor of resistance 8.0 Ω.
How much power is dissipated in the resistor?
A 0.25 W B 4.0 W C 16 W D 32 W
31 The lamps, the diodes and the batteries in the circuits are identical.
In which circuit does the ammeter give the greatest reading?
A B C D
A A A
A
32 Two resistors are connected in series with a power supply.
Which statement about the circuit is correct?
A The current from the supply is greater than the current in each resistor.
B The current from the supply is equal to the current in each resistor.
C The current from the supply is less than the current in each resistor.
D The current from the supply is the sum of the currents in each resistor.

14
33 Which two logic gates each have a high output when both of their inputs are high?
A AND and OR
B AND and NOR
C NAND and NOR
D NAND and OR
34 The diagram shows a series of logic gates and part of its corresponding truth table.
P R
Q
P Q R S T
0 0 0 0 1
0 1
1 0 0 1 1
1 1 1 1 0
What are the missing values in row 2 of the truth table?
A 010 B 011 C 100 D 111
© UCLES 2020 0625/23/M/J/20

15
35 The graphs show how the currents in three circuits vary with time.
circuit 1 circuit 2
1.5 1.5
current / A 1.0 current / A 1.0
0.5 0.5
0.0 0.0
–0.5 –0.5
–1.0 –1.0
–1.5 –1.5
time time
circuit 3
1.5
current / A 1.0
0.5
0.0
–0.5
–1.0
–1.5
time
In which circuits is there a direct current?
A 1 and 2 B 1 and 3 C 2 only D 3 only

16
36 The coil of a simple a.c. generator rotates steadily in a uniform magnetic field.
The diagram shows the position of the coil at time t = 0.
coil
N S
Which graph shows the output voltage for one revolution of the coil?
A B
V V
0 0
0 t 0 t
C D
V V
0 0
0 t 0 t
37 What occurs during nuclear fusion?
A Two light atomic nuclei join together and emit energy.

B Two light atomic nuclei join together and absorb energy.
C A heavy atomic nucleus splits and emits energy.
D A heavy atomic nucleus splits and absorbs energy.
© UCLES 2020 0625/23/M/J/20

17
A 1.0 × 1010 B 4.0 × 1010 C 6.0 × 1010 D 7.0 × 1010
paper
detector
counter
source
A α-particles
B β-particles
C γ-rays
D X-rays
© UCLES 2020 0625/23/M/J/20

CAIE IGCSE Physics
May/June 2
2020
PUBLISHED
1 B 29 C
2 A 30 D
3 A 31 A
4 C 32 B
5 A 33 A
6 D 34 B
7 B 35 B
8 B 36 A
9 D 37 A
10 D 38 D
11 C 39 A
12 A 40 A
13 C
14 C
15 D
16 B
17 A
18 A
19 B
20 D
21 B
22 C
23 A
24 A
25 A
26 C
27 D
28 A

Cambridge IGCSE™
PHYSICS 0625/21
45 minutes

*8691247406*

Soft clean eraser
INSTRUCTIONS
 There are forty questions on this paper. Answer all questions.
 For each question there are four possible answers A, B, C and D. Choose the one you consider correct
 Follow the instructions on the multiple choice answer sheet.
 Write in soft pencil.
 Write your name, centre number and candidate number on the multiple choice answer sheet in the
 Do not use correction fluid.
 Do not write on any bar codes.
 You may use a calculator.
 Take the weight of 1.0 kg to be 10 N (acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s2).
INFORMATION
 The total mark for this paper is 40.
 Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer.
 Any rough working should be done on this question paper.
IB20 11_0625_21/3RP

2
1 For which one of the following measurements would a micrometer screw gauge be most
suitable?
A length of this page

B length of a pencil
C diameter of a wire
D diameter of an atom
2 The speed–time graph represents a journey.
speed
X Y
0
0 time
How does the graph show that the distance travelled in section X of the journey is greater than
the distance travelled in section Y?
A The area below section X of the graph is greater than the area below section Y.
B The gradient of section X of the graph is greater than the gradient of section Y.
C The speed at the end of section X of the journey is greater than the speed at the end of
section Y.
D The time for section X of the journey is greater than the time for section Y.
3 A car is travelling at a velocity of 2.0 m / s. It accelerates at a constant 0.20 m / s2 for 2.5 minutes.
What is the final velocity of the car?
A 2.5 m / s B 5.2 m / s C 30 m / s D 32 m / s
4 Which quantity is weight an example of?
A acceleration
B force
C mass
D pressure
© UCLES 2020 0625/21/O/N/20

3
5 A sphere P, made of steel, has a weight of 10 N on Earth.
Another sphere Q, also made of steel, has a weight of 10 N on Mars.
The gravitational field strength on Earth is greater than the gravitational field strength on Mars.
A The mass of sphere P is the same as the mass of sphere Q.

B The mass of sphere P is less than the mass of sphere Q.
C On Mars, the weight of sphere P is more than 10 N.
D On Earth, the weight of sphere Q is less than 10 N.
6 A metal ball is attached to a cork and is lowered into a measuring cylinder, pulling the cork into
the water, as shown.
cork
80 cm3
ball
56 cm3
3
48 cm
water
ball and cork ball fully submerged both ball and cork
above the water but cork above the water fully submerged
The mass of the cork is 4.8 g.
What is the density of the cork?

4
7 A uniform plank rests on a pivot at its centre.
Two children P and Q sit on the plank in the positions shown.
1.2 m 1.5 m
child P child Q
pivot
The mass of child P is 25 kg.
The plank is balanced.
What is the mass of child Q?
A 20 kg B 25 kg C 31 kg D 45 kg
8 The diagram shows three forces acting on an object.
6N
1N 9N
What is the value of the resultant force acting on the object?
A 2N B 10 N C 14 N D 16 N
© UCLES 2020 0625/21/O/N/20

5
9 An object with a mass of 0.20 kg moves at 0.20 m / s, as shown.
0.20 m / s
0.20 kg
Which other object has a momentum that is identical to the momentum of this object?
A B
0.20 m / s 0.40 kg
0.20 kg 0.10 m / s
C D
0.10 m / s 0.20 m / s
0.40 kg 0.20 kg
10 A stone is dropped from rest at a height of 2.0 m above the surface of a planet.
The planet has no atmosphere.
The speed of the stone just before reaching the surface of the planet is 3.8 m / s.
What is the acceleration of free fall on the planet?
A zero B 1.9 m / s2 C 3.6 m / s2 D 7.2 m / s2
11 An electric motor uses 1000 J of electrical energy. It provides 450 J of useful output energy.
What is the efficiency of the motor?
A 4.5% B 5.5% C 45% D 55%
12 To calculate the power produced by a force, the size of the force must be known.
What else needs to be known to calculate the power?
the distance that the force the time for which the
moves the object force acts on the object
A key
B = needed
C = not needed
D

6
13 A barometer reads 780 mm Hg. Mercury has a density of 1.36  104 kg / m3.
What is the pressure of the atmosphere in N / m2?
A 1.1  104 N / m2
B 1.1  105 N / m2
C 1.1  107 N / m2
D 1.1  108 N / m2
14 The diagram shows a mercury barometer.
Which height is used as a measurement of atmospheric pressure?
D
mercury
C
B
15 A student splashes water on to her face. Here are three statements about the effects.
P The water uses energy to evaporate.

Q The water gains energy from the student.
R The face of the student cools.
A P and Q only B P and R only C Q and R only D P, Q and R
16 When a bridge is built, a gap is left between each concrete slab.
Why are these gaps left?
A Concrete expands on warm days.

B Concrete contracts on warm days.
C The gaps expand on warm days.
D The gaps contract on cold days.
© UCLES 2020 0625/21/O/N/20

7
17 The specific heat capacity of solid P is greater than that of solid Q.
A Less energy is needed to raise the temperature by 1 C of unit mass of solid P than unit mass
of solid Q.
B Less energy is needed to melt unit mass of solid P than unit mass of solid Q.
C More energy is needed to raise the temperature by 1 C of unit mass of solid P than unit
mass of solid Q.
D More energy is needed to melt unit mass of solid P than unit mass of solid Q.
18 A student placed a number of ice cubes in a container with a hole in the base. He left them to
melt so that the water dripped into a beaker placed on a balance. The student recorded the initial
mass of the beaker and the final mass of the beaker and water after five minutes.
ice in a container
with a hole
in the base
beaker
balance
0.05 kg 0.16 kg
before after
The specific latent heat of fusion for water is 334 J / g.
How much energy was absorbed from the surroundings in order to melt the ice?
A 37 J B 54 J C 37 000 J D 54 000 J

8
19 The diagram shows four rods. Each rod is made of a different metal.
P Q
brass copper
silver iron
S R
Wax is used to attach small metal balls at the rod ends P, Q, R and S.
Each rod is the same size. They are heated uniformly by a Bunsen burner at point X.
As the rods warm up, the wax melts and the balls fall off.
Why does the ball on the silver rod fall first?
A Silver is the best conductor of heat.

B Silver is the worst conductor of heat.
C Silver is the best radiator of heat.
D Silver is the worst radiator of heat.
20 Four cups A, B, C and D contain hot coffee.
Which cup keeps the coffee warm the longest?
the outside
the top of the cup
surface of the cup
A black covered with a lid

B black no lid
C white covered with a lid
D white no lid
© UCLES 2020 0625/21/O/N/20

9
21 Which row correctly describes light waves?
wave type direction of vibrations
A longitudinal parallel to direction of wave travel

B longitudinal perpendicular to direction of wave travel
C transverse parallel to direction of wave travel
D transverse perpendicular to direction of wave travel
22 The diagram shows part of a diffracted wave pattern.
barrier
direction
of waves
Changes are made to the wavelength and to the gap size to produce a semicircular diffracted
wave pattern.
Which row produces the required semicircular diffracted wave pattern?
gap in barrier wavelength
A larger same
B larger smaller
C same larger
D same smaller
23 Which statement about a thin converging lens is correct?
A All rays of light refracted by the lens pass through the principal focus.
B All rays initially parallel to the principal axis of the lens are refracted through the principal
focus.
C The focal length of the lens is the distance between the image and the principal focus.
D The focal length of the lens is the distance between the object and the image.

10
24 The diagram shows white light passing through a prism.
red
violet
white
light
Which description of what happens as the light passes into the prism is correct?
A The speed of the red light is less than the speed of the violet light and the red light is the
least refracted.
B The speed of the red light is greater than the speed of the violet light and the red light is the
least refracted.
C The speed of the violet light is less than the speed of the red light and the violet light is the
least refracted.
D The speed of the violet light is greater than the speed of the red light and the violet light is the
least refracted.
25 Which row gives possible values for the speed of sound?
speed in gas speed in liquid speed in solid

m/s m/s m/s
A 972 1450 3560

B 972 3560 1450
C 1450 3560 972
D 3560 972 1450
26 A police car with its siren sounding is stationary in heavy traffic. A pedestrian notices that,
although the loudness of the sound produced does not change, the pitch varies.
Which row describes the amplitude and the frequency of the sound?
amplitude frequency
A constant constant
B constant varying
C varying constant
D varying varying
© UCLES 2020 0625/21/O/N/20

11
27 A piece of steel is slightly magnetised. It is hit several times with a hammer.
What effect will this have on the steel?
the steel is parallel to the steel is at right-angles

a strong magnetic field to a weak magnetic field
A it becomes magnetised more strongly it becomes magnetised more strongly

B it becomes magnetised more strongly it loses its magnetism
C it loses its magnetism it becomes magnetised more strongly
D it loses its magnetism it loses its magnetism
28 Two soft-iron pins are suspended from the S pole of a bar magnet.
Which diagram shows how the pins are deflected?
A B C D
S S S S
29 A negatively charged plastic rod is brought near to an uncharged metal sphere and held there.
What happens when the metal sphere is earthed?
A Electrons flow from the metal sphere to earth.

B Electrons flow from earth to the metal sphere.
C Positive charge flows from the metal sphere to earth.
D Positive charge flows from earth to the metal sphere.
30 Which statement defines the electromotive force (e.m.f.) of a cell?
A the current in the cell when 1.0 C of charge flows in 1.0 s

B the current supplied by the cell to drive 1.0 C of charge around a complete circuit
C the energy supplied by the cell to drive 1.0 C of charge around a complete circuit
D the energy supplied by the cell to drive 1.0 A of current around a complete circuit

12
31 Four wires are made of the same metal.
Which wire has the greatest resistance?
A a 100 cm long wire with a diameter of 3.0 mm

B a 100 cm long wire with a diameter of 6.0 mm
C a 10 cm long wire with a diameter of 3.0 mm
D a 10 cm long wire with a diameter of 6.0 mm
32 In which circuit is there just a single lamp lit?
A B
C D
© UCLES 2020 0625/21/O/N/20

13
33 A student uses four ammeters P, Q, R and S to measure the current in different parts of the
circuit shown.
P Q
A A
R
A
S
A
Which two ammeters read the largest current?
A P and Q B P and R C R and Q D R and S
34 Which combination of logic gates gives the truth table shown?
inputs output
X Y Z
0 0 1
0 1 1
1 0 1
1 1 0
A B
X X
Z Z
Y Y
C D
X X
Z Z
Y Y

14
35 A transformer is needed to convert a supply of 240 V a.c. into 4800 V a.c..
NP NS
240 V a.c. 4800 V a.c.
Which pair of coils would be suitable for this transformer?
number of turns number of turns

on primary coil NP on secondary coil NS
A 50 1 000
B 240 48 000
C 480 24
D 2000 100
36 The diagram shows part of a long current-carrying conductor.
At which point is the magnetic field strongest?
C D
37 A beam of particles moves through a magnetic field.
In which situation do the particles experience a magnetic force?
A a beam of -particles moving parallel to the magnetic field lines

B a beam of electrons moving parallel to the magnetic field lines
C a beam of -particles moving perpendicularly across the magnetic field lines

D a beam of neutrons moving perpendicularly across the magnetic field lines
38 Which statement is correct for the nucleus of any atom?
A The nucleus contains electrons, neutrons and protons.

B The nucleus contains the same number of protons as neutrons.
C The nucleus has a total charge of zero.
D The nucleus is very small compared with the size of the atom.
© UCLES 2020 0625/21/O/N/20

15
39 Two beams of radiation, P and Q, enter an electric field as shown.
+ + + + + + + +
P
Q
– – – – – – – –
Which type of radiations are P and Q?
P Q
A beta () alpha ()

B beta () gamma ()
C gamma () alpha ()
D gamma () gamma ()
40 Which equation represents the -decay of lead-209?
209 0 209
A 82Pb + –1e o 83Bi
209 0 209
B 82Pb + –1e o 81Tl
209 209 0
C 82Pb o 83Bi + –1e
209 209 0
D 82Pb o 81Tl + –1e
© UCLES 2020 0625/21/O/N/20

CAIE IGCSE Physics
October/November
PUBLISHED 2020
1 C 29 A
2 A 30 C
3 D 31 A
4 B 32 C
5 B 33 A
6 B 34 B
7 A 35 A
8 B 36 C
9 C 37 C
10 C 38 D
11 C 39 A
12 A 40 C
13 B
14 C
15 D
16 A
17 C
18 C
19 A
20 C
21 D
22 C
23 B
24 B
25 A
26 B
27 B
28 C

Cambridge IGCSE™
PHYSICS 0625/22
45 minutes

*4531333276*

Soft clean eraser
INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION
IB20 11_0625_22/4RP

2
1 The diagram shows a measuring device.
35
0 1
30
mm
For which measurement is this device suitable?
A diameter of a cylinder of aluminium of about 20 cm

B distance between two molecules of zinc
C length of a rod of iron of about 1 m
D thickness of a sheet of copper of about 1.5 mm
2 The graph shows how the speed of an object varies with time.
speed
0
P Q time
Which row describes the motion of the object at times P and Q?
P Q
A at rest accelerating
B at rest decelerating
C moving with constant speed accelerating
D moving with constant speed decelerating
© UCLES 2020 0625/22/O/N/20

3
3 A concrete block falls vertically from an aeroplane.
The concrete block falls into the sea and sinks.
Which graph shows the vertical motion of the concrete block?
A B
speed speed
0 0
0 time 0 time
C D
speed speed
0 0
0 time 0 time
A acceleration
B force
C mass
D pressure
5 Which statement about the mass of an object is correct?
A It changes when the object is lifted further from the ground.

B It is the gravitational force on the object.
C It is zero if the object is in orbit around the Earth.
D It resists any change in motion of the object.

4
6 A rectangular metal block is 20 cm long.
The cross-sectional area of the block is 25 cm2.
The mass of the block is 4000 g.
What is the density of the metal?
A 0.13 g / cm3 B 0.32 g / cm3 C 8.0 g / cm3 D 2000 g / cm3
7 The diagram shows a beam lying on the ground. End Q is lifted from the ground by the force F.
End P of the beam remains on the ground.
3.0 m
1.0 m F
P Q
G
ground
beam
The length of the beam is 3.0 m and its weight is 600 N.
The centre of mass of the beam at G is 1.0 m from end P.
What is the size of the force F when it just raises end Q from the ground?
A 200 N B 300 N C 400 N D 600 N
8 The diagram shows a stand. The stand holds a heavy mass above the bench.
heavy mass
stand
bench
base
Which two changes would definitely make the stand more stable?
A Lower the mass and make the base narrower.

B Lower the mass and make the base wider.
C Raise the mass and make the base narrower.
D Raise the mass and make the base wider.
© UCLES 2020 0625/22/O/N/20

5
9 A footballer kicks a stationary football.
His foot is in contact with the ball for 0.050 s.
The mass of the ball is 0.40 kg.
The speed of projection of the ball is 25 m / s.
What is the average force exerted on the ball by his foot?
A 0.32 N B 0.50 N C 200 N D 1300 N
10 A woman of mass 50 kg has 81 J of kinetic energy.
What is her speed?
A 1.3 m / s B 1.6 m / s C 1.8 m / s D 3.2 m / s
11 What is the source of the Sun’s energy?
A chemical reactions in the Sun’s core
B -emissions in the Sun’s core

C nuclear fission in the Sun’s core
D nuclear fusion in the Sun’s core
A key
B = needed
C = not needed
D
13 A research submarine is at a depth of 10 000 m below the surface of the sea.
The average density of the water above the submarine is 1030 kg / m3.
The atmospheric pressure at the surface of the sea is 103 000 Pa.
How many times greater is the pressure due to the sea water than the atmospheric pressure?
A 10 B 100 C 1000 D 100 000

6
D
mercury
C
B

16 A bimetallic strip is used to control the temperature of electrical appliances. It is made of two
different metals fixed together.
The diagram shows the shape of the bimetallic strip before and after heating.
metal P
metal Q
before heating after heating
A Metal P contracts more than metal Q on heating.

B Metal Q contracts more than metal P on heating.
C Metal P expands more than metal Q on heating.
D Metal Q expands more than metal P on heating.
© UCLES 2020 0625/22/O/N/20

7
17 A student writes three statements about thermocouples.
1 They have a small thermal capacity.

2 They respond very slowly to temperature changes.
3 They can measure temperatures above 500 C.
A 1 only B 2 only C 1 and 3 D 2 and 3
18 Four blocks are made from different metals. Each block is heated for five minutes with an
identical heater.
Assume there is no energy loss from the blocks.
The table gives the masses of the blocks and the temperature rises.
Which metal has the highest specific heat capacity?
mass of block / kg temperature rise / C
A 2.0 5.0
B 2.0 9.0
C 4.0 5.0
D 4.0 9.0
19 A scientist measures the air temperature at different heights from the floor in a cave. The results
are recorded in the table.
height / m temperature / C
0 10
10 11
20 13
30 14
40 16
Why does altering the height affect the temperature of the air?
A The molecules in warm air have less energy than the molecules in cool air.
B The molecules in cool air are further apart than the molecules in warm air.
C Warm air is less dense than cool air.
D Cool air rises above warm air.

8
20 Four solid spheres made of the same metal are heated to the same temperature.
Which sphere initially loses thermal energy by radiation at the greatest rate?
A diameter of 10 cm with a dull surface

B diameter of 10 cm with a shiny surface
C diameter of 5 cm with a dull surface
D diameter of 5 cm with a shiny surface

22 A radio transmitter broadcasts at a frequency of 200 kHz.
What is the wavelength of these radio waves?
A 6.7  10–4 m B 1.5 m C 1.5  103 m D 1.5  106 m
© UCLES 2020 0625/22/O/N/20

9
23 An optical lever is a very sensitive device for detecting small rotations. A lamp sends a narrow
beam of light on to a small plane mirror attached to a shaft whose rotation is to be measured. The
operation of the device is shown in plan view.
scale just scale just

above lamp above lamp
lamp lamp
shaft shaft
small small
mirror mirror
The beam from the lamp reflects from the mirror to give a small spot of light on a scale placed
just above the lamp. The shaft and mirror rotate through 1. The spot of light moves along the
scale.
The table shows the angle  through which the reflected beam rotates and the conditions
required for high sensitivity.
angle  to achieve high sensitivity

A 1 the lamp and scale need to be
as close to the mirror as possible
B 1 the lamp and scale need to be
as far from the mirror as possible
C 2 the lamp and scale need to be
as close to the mirror as possible
D 2 the lamp and scale need to be
as far from the mirror as possible
24 A student draws a diagram to illustrate the different sections of a longitudinal wave.
Which labelled section is a rarefaction?
A B D

10
red
violet
white
light
least refracted.
least refracted.
least refracted.
least refracted.
amplitude frequency
A constant constant
B constant varying
C varying constant
D varying varying


© UCLES 2020 0625/22/O/N/20

11
28 A student sets up four experiments using bar magnets and other metal objects. The N and S
poles of the bar magnets are labelled N and S.
1 2
S N S N S N iron
3 4
S N copper S N N S
Which pairs attract each other?
29 Which diagram represents the strength and direction of the magnetic field around a
current-carrying conductor? (The direction of the current is into the page.)
A B C D
30 Which quantity is defined as the energy transferred by a cell in driving unit charge around a
complete circuit?
A current
B electromotive force (e.m.f.)
C power
D resistance
31 There is a current in a variable resistor when a potential difference (p.d.) is applied across it.
In which situation is the current increased?
A Decrease the p.d. and keep the resistance the same.

B Decrease the p.d. and increase the resistance.
C Keep the p.d. the same and decrease the resistance.
D Keep the p.d. the same and increase the resistance.

12
circuit shown.
P Q
A A
R
A
S
A
inputs output
X Y Z
0 0 1
0 1 1
1 0 1
1 1 0
A B
X X
Z Z
Y Y
C D
X X
Z Z
Y Y
© UCLES 2020 0625/22/O/N/20

13
34 The diagram shows an a.c. generator used to power a lamp. The coil rotates in a clockwise
direction.
rotation
of coil
coil
X Y
Which magnetic poles are X and Y?
X Y
A N pole N pole
B N pole S pole
C S pole N pole
D S pole S pole
NP NS
240 V a.c. 4800 V a.c.

A 50 1 000
B 240 48 000
C 480 24
D 2000 100

14
36 The diagram shows a coil of wire wrapped around a soft-iron rod.
The wire is connected to a d.c. power supply as indicated.
The apparatus is in a region which is totally shielded from the Earth’s magnetic field.
+ –
soft-iron rod
A small compass needle is placed at point P.
In which direction does the N pole of the compass needle point?

B towards the left of the page
C towards the right of the page

38 The symbol represents a nucleus of zinc.
Which row gives the numbers of protons and neutrons in this nucleus?
number of number of
protons neutrons
A 30 38
B 30 68
C 38 30
D 38 68
© UCLES 2020 0625/22/O/N/20

15
39 The diagram shows a beam of -particles passing through a strong electric field.
β-particles
–
In which direction will the -particles be deflected?
A upwards towards the top of the page

B downwards towards the bottom of the page
C into the plane of the page
D out of the plane of the page
209 0 209
A 82Pb + –1e 83Bi
209 0 209
B 82Pb + –1e 81Tl
209 209 0
C 82Pb 83Bi + –1e
209 209 0
D 82Pb 81Tl + –1e
© UCLES 2020 0625/22/O/N/20

CAIE IGCSE Physics
October/November
PUBLISHED 2020
1 D 29 C
2 C 30 B
3 C 31 C
4 B 32 A
5 D 33 B
6 C 34 B
7 A 35 A
8 B 36 C
9 C 37 D
10 C 38 A
11 D 39 A
12 A 40 C
13 C
14 C
15 D
16 C
17 C
18 A
19 C
20 A
21 D
22 C
23 D
24 B
25 B
26 B
27 B
28 A

Cambridge IGCSE™
PHYSICS 0625/23
45 minutes

*8629790535*

Soft clean eraser
INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION
IB20 11_0625_23/4RP

2
1 A micrometer screw gauge reads 0.02 mm when the jaws are fully closed. It reads 0.56 mm when
measuring the diameter of a metal wire.
What is the diameter of the wire?
A 0.36 mm B 0.54 mm C 0.56 mm D 0.58 mm
2 Object P moves at a constant speed of 5 m / s repeatedly backwards and forwards in a straight

line.
Object Q moves at a constant speed of 5 m / s vertically downwards.
Object R moves at a constant speed of 5 m / s in a circle.
Which objects are moving with uniform velocity?
A P only B Q only C R only D Q and R
3 The diagram shows a velocity–time graph for an object which is accelerating.
120
velocity 110
m/s 100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
0 10 20 30 40
time / s
What is the acceleration of the object?
A 0.40 m / s2 B 2.5 m / s2 C 3.0 m / s2 D 100 m / s2
A acceleration
B force
C mass
D pressure
© UCLES 2020 0625/23/O/N/20

3
5 An object of mass 1.0 kg is at rest on Earth. An identical object is at rest on a planet with a
gravitational field strength of twice that on Earth.
Which row correctly compares the object on the planet to the object on Earth?
its acceleration when the same

its weight
horizontal force is applied
A double equal to that on Earth

B double half that on Earth
C half equal to that on Earth
D half half that on Earth
6 A square wooden raft floats on a lake. The density of the water in the lake is 1000 kg / m3.
The sides of the raft are 2.0 m long and the thickness of the raft is 0.20 m.
The mass of the raft is 700 kg.
How many barrels, each of mass 100 kg, could be placed on the raft before its surface sinks to
the surface of the water?
A 1 B 7 C 8 D 15
7 The diagram shows a car moving along a road.
The force due to the engine is 1500 N and the total drag force is 200 N.
engine force
drag force
1500 N
200 N
road
What is the motion of the car?
A constant speed
B decreasing speed
C increasing speed
D reversing

4
8 The diagram shows a trolley used to transport a load of 400 N.
A force F vertically downwards is needed to balance the trolley as shown.
The centre of mass of the trolley is vertically above the pivot.
40 cm
F
90 cm 15 cm
30 cm
400 N
pivot
What is the value of F ?
A 133 N B 150 N C 300 N D 400 N
9 A ball of mass m falls vertically and hits a hard surface.
Its speed on hitting the surface is v1.
It rebounds vertically upwards with speed v2.
What is the change in momentum of the ball?
A mv1 B mv2 C m(v1 + v2) D m(v2 – v1)
10 An object of mass 4.5 kg is travelling at 7.0 m / s.
How much kinetic energy does the object have?
A 16 J B 32 J C 110 J D 220 J
11 A number of ways in which we use energy are listed.
In which is the ultimate source of energy not the Sun?
A Energy is provided by a horse to pull a cart.

B Energy is provided by hydroelectric generators to heat a house.
C Energy is provided by a nuclear power station.
D Energy is provided by a windmill to pump water to a fountain.
© UCLES 2020 0625/23/O/N/20

5
A key
B = needed
C = not needed
D
13 A student calculates the pressure due to the liquid at point X.
liquid
The student takes four measurements.
1 density of the liquid

2 temperature of the liquid
3 depth of point X below the surface of the liquid
4 surface area of the liquid
Which measurements must the student use in her pressure calculation?
D
mercury
C
B

6

16 Equal volumes of solids and liquids experience different changes of volume when they are
heated through the same temperature range.
What is the reason for this?
A The average increase in separation of the particles in a liquid is greater than the average
increase in separation of those in a solid.
B The average increase in separation of the particles in a liquid is less than the average
increase in separation of those in a solid.
C The particles in liquids expand by less than those in solids.
D The particles in liquids expand by more than those in solids.
17 Which physical property changes when temperature is measured with a liquid-in-glass

thermometer?
A electromotive force
B pressure
C resistance
D volume
© UCLES 2020 0625/23/O/N/20

7
18 The diagram shows steam being passed into water to raise the temperature of the water.
steam from
steam generator
water
The specific latent heat of steam is 2200 J / g.
The specific heat capacity of water is 4.2 J / (g C).
The mass of water being heated is 490 g.
Which mass of steam must be passed into the water to raise the water temperature from 19 C to
100 C?
A 19 g B 76 g C 80 g D 95 g
19 The diagram shows the view of a room heated by a radiator. The arrowed line from X to Y is the
path of the convection current in the air.
ceiling
X
Y
radiator
floor
Which row about the air temperature and the air density at X and at Y is correct?
air temperature air density
A higher at X higher at X
B higher at X higher at Y
C higher at Y higher at Y
D higher at Y higher at X

8
20 A warm dark-coloured surface emits radiation. It is decided to increase the amount of radiation
produced.
Three suggestions are made.
1 Make the surface hotter.

2 Colour the surface white.
3 Increase the area of the surface.
A 1 only B 1 and 2 only C 1 and 3 only D 1, 2 and 3

22 A water wave has a speed of 2.0 m / s.
4.0 complete waves pass a point every 10 seconds.
What is the wavelength of the wave?
A 0.50 m B 0.80 m C 5.0 m D 8.0 m
23 A driver sits in a car. She has a rear-view plane mirror 0.5 m in front of her. A bus is 7.5 m behind
the driver.
bus
car driver
mirror
The driver looks at the image of the bus in her mirror.
How far is the image away from her?
A 1.0 m B 7.5 m C 8.0 m D 8.5 m
© UCLES 2020 0625/23/O/N/20

9
red
violet
white
light
least refracted.
least refracted.
least refracted.
least refracted.
25 The diagram shows three types of electromagnetic radiation listed in a particular order. The
electromagnetic radiation is travelling in a vacuum.
microwaves infrared X-rays
Which quantities increase in magnitude going from left to right across the list?
A frequency only
B neither speed nor frequency
C speed and frequency
D speed only
26 A sound wave travels through air.
What name is given to a region in which the air molecules are further apart than normal?
A compression
B contraction
C rarefaction
D vacuum

10
amplitude frequency
A constant constant
B constant varying
C varying constant
D varying varying


29 A negatively charged cloud passes over a tall steel-framed building. A charge is induced on the
building by the cloud because charges flow through the building.
cloud
– – –
– – – –
tall building
earth
What charge is induced on the building and in which direction do the charge carriers move?
charge induced
direction of charge flow
on building
A positive from the building to earth

B positive from earth to the building
C negative from the building to earth
D negative from earth to the building
© UCLES 2020 0625/23/O/N/20

11
30 Electromotive force (e.m.f.) is defined in terms of the energy supplied in driving which physical
quantity around a complete circuit?
A charge
B current
C potential difference (p.d.)
D power
circuit shown.
P Q
A A
R
A
S
A
32 Three statements about a relay are given.
1 A relay has a coil that becomes a temporary magnet when in operation.

2 A large current in a relay coil is used to switch off a smaller current.
3 A small current in a relay coil is used to switch on a larger current.

12
inputs output
X Y Z
0 0 1
0 1 1
1 0 1
1 1 0
A B
X X
Z Z
Y Y
C D
X X
Z Z
Y Y
34 Graph X shows the output from an a.c. generator.
p.d. X
0
0 time
Which changes can be made so that the generator produces graph Y?
A Decrease the magnetic field strength and decrease the speed of rotation only.
B Increase the magnetic field strength and decrease the number of coils only.
C Increase the number of coils only.
D Increase the speed of rotation only.
© UCLES 2020 0625/23/O/N/20

13
NP NS
240 V a.c. 4800 V a.c.

A 50 1 000
B 240 48 000
C 480 24
D 2000 100
36 The diagram shows a wire carrying a current in the direction shown. There is a magnetic field
acting from left to right. The wire experiences a force acting out of the page.
direction
of current
wire
direction of
magnetic field
The current is now reversed.
In which direction does the force on the wire now act?
A into the page

B out of the page
C to the left
D to the right

14

234
38 How many protons and how many neutrons are in a nucleus of 90Th?
protons neutrons
A 90 144
B 90 234
C 144 90
D 234 90
39 Which statement about -rays is correct?
A They are deflected by both electric and magnetic fields.

B They are deflected by magnetic fields but not by electric fields.
C They are deflected by electric fields but not by magnetic fields.
D They are not deflected either by electric fields or by magnetic fields.
209 0 209
A 82Pb + –1e o 83Bi
209 0 209
B 82Pb + –1e o 81Tl
209 209 0
C 82Pb o 83Bi + –1e
209 209 0
D 82Pb o 81Tl + –1e
© UCLES 2020 0625/23/O/N/20

CAIE IGCSE Physics
October/November
PUBLISHED 2020
1 B 29 A
2 B 30 A
3 B 31 A
4 B 32 C
5 A 33 B
6 A 34 D
7 C 35 A
8 B 36 A
9 C 37 D
10 C 38 A
11 C 39 D
12 A 40 C
13 B
14 C
15 D
16 A
17 D
18 B
19 B
20 C
21 D
22 C
23 D
24 B
25 A
26 C
27 B
28 B

Cambridge IGCSE™
PHYSICS 0625/22
45 minutes

*3645684800*

Soft clean eraser
INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION
 Each correct answer will score one mark.
This document has 16 pages.
IB21 03_0625_22/3RP

2
1 A student has a measuring cylinder containing water and also has a balance.
Which of these could she use to find the volume of a small metal sphere?
She has no other apparatus.
A either the measuring cylinder containing water or the balance

B the measuring cylinder containing water only
C the balance only
D neither the measuring cylinder nor the balance
2 A ball hits a bat with a velocity of 30 m / s, and leaves the bat travelling with a velocity of 20 m / s in
the opposite direction. The ball is in contact with the bat for 0.10 s.
What is the magnitude of the acceleration of the ball whilst it is in contact with the bat?
A 1.0 m / s2 B 5.0 m / s2 C 100 m / s2 D 500 m / s2
3 A train begins a journey from a station and travels 60 km in a time of 20 minutes.
What is the average speed of the train?
A 3.0 m / s B 5.0 m / s C 50 m / s D 60 m / s
4 Which statement about mass is correct?
A A mass of 10 kg weighs 1 N near the Earth’s surface.

B Mass is a gravitational force.
C Mass increases when the gravitational field strength increases.
D The greater the mass of a body, the more it resists a change in its motion.
5 A small bottle has a mass of 20 g when empty. The volume of the bottle is 10 cm3.
When full of liquid, the total mass is 150 g.
A 0.50 g / cm3 B 2.0 g / cm3 C 13 g / cm3 D 15 g / cm3
6 An object of mass 0.80 kg is moving in a straight line at a velocity of 2.0 m / s. A force is exerted
on the object, in the direction of motion, for a period of 1.0 minute and the velocity of the object
increases to 6.0 m / s.
What force is exerted on the object?
A 0.053 N B 0.080 N C 3.2 N D 4.8 N
© UCLES 2021 0625/22/F/M/21

3
7 An object moves at constant speed in the circular path shown.
P
Z X
Which statement about the acceleration of the object when it is at point P is correct?
A The acceleration is in the direction of arrow X.

B The acceleration is in the direction of arrow Y.
C The acceleration is in the direction of arrow Z.
D The object is not accelerating.
8 An object is pivoted at point P. A student ties a length of string to a peg on the object. He pulls
the string with a force F.
string
s t
peg
r
q P
object
What is the moment of the force F about the point P?
A Fq B Fr C Fs D Ft

4
9 A gas molecule strikes the wall of a container. The molecule rebounds with the same speed.
wall wall
gas molecule gas molecule
before hitting the wall after hitting the wall
What happens to the kinetic energy and what happens to the momentum of the molecule?
kinetic energy momentum
A changes changes
B changes stays the same
C stays the same changes
10 A horizontal force pulls a box along a horizontal surface.
The box gains 30 J of kinetic energy and 10 J of thermal energy is produced by the friction
between the box and the surface.
How much work is done by the force?
A 10 J B 20 J C 30 J D 40 J
11 A crane is used to lift loads vertically.
The output power of the crane to lift a car is P.
The crane then lifts a lorry, which has 3.0 times the weight of the car, through 0.25 of the distance
in 0.50 of the time.
What is the output power of the crane now?
A 3P B 3P C 8P D 6P
8 2 3
© UCLES 2021 0625/22/F/M/21

5
12 The diagram shows a manometer connected to a gas supply.
mm
500
from 400
gas supply
300
200
100
mercury
0
What is the pressure of the gas supply?
A 100 mm Hg above atmospheric pressure

B 100 mm Hg below atmospheric pressure
C 200 mm Hg above atmospheric pressure
D 200 mm Hg below atmospheric pressure
13 The diagram shows a box of dimensions 6.0 cm  8.0 cm  4.0 cm.
6.0 cm
X
Z
4.0 cm Y 8.0 cm
The box rests on a flat horizontal surface.
On which face must the box rest in order to exert the least pressure?
A face X
B face Y
C face Z
D The pressure is the same for all the faces.

6
14 Air in a sealed syringe is slowly compressed by moving the piston. The temperature of the air
stays the same.
air
syringe piston
Which statement about the air is correct?
A The pressure of the air decreases because its molecules now travel more slowly.
B The pressure of the air decreases because the area of the syringe walls is now smaller.
C The pressure of the air increases because its molecules now hit the syringe walls more
frequently.
D The pressure of the air increases because its molecules now travel more quickly.
15 In an experiment, smoke particles are suspended in air and viewed through a microscope.
The smoke particles move about with short random movements.
Which of the following statements is correct?
A Air particles have large masses compared to smoke particles and they move in one direction
only.
B Air particles have large masses compared to smoke particles and they move in random
directions.
C Air particles move at high speeds compared to smoke particles and they move in one
direction only.
D Air particles move at high speeds compared to smoke particles and they move in random
directions.
© UCLES 2021 0625/22/F/M/21

7
16 The graph shows how the internal energy of 1.0 kg of a metal changes with temperature.
835
830
internal
energy 825
/ kJ
820
815
810
805
800
795
0 20 40 60 80 100
temperature / °C
What is the increase in the internal energy of a block of the same metal of mass 0.25 kg when its
temperature rises from 40 C to 50 C?
A 30 J B 300 J C 750 J D 1200 J
17 A piece of melting ice at 0 C and a beaker of boiling water are both in a laboratory. The
laboratory is at 20 C.
boiling water
Bunsen burner
melting ice heating water
What is happening to the temperature of the melting ice and what is happening to the
temperature of the boiling water?
temperature of temperature of
melting ice boiling water
A constant constant
B constant increasing
C increasing constant
D increasing increasing

8
18 One end of a copper rod is heated.
What is one method by which thermal energy is transferred in the copper rod?
A Free electrons transfer energy from the cooler end to the hotter end.
B Free electrons transfer energy from the hotter end to the cooler end.
C Molecules of copper move from the cooler end to the hotter end.
D Molecules of copper move from the hotter end to the cooler end.
19 Which change will cause a decrease in the rate of radiation emitted by an object?
A changing the surface colour from white to black

B changing the surface texture from dull to shiny
C increasing the surface temperature
D increasing the surface area
20 What is the approximate wavelength in air of the highest frequency sound that can be heard by a
normal healthy person?
A 0.02 m B 60 m C 20 000 m D 7 000 000 m
21 What causes the change in direction when light travels from air into glass?
A The amplitude of the light changes.

B The colour of the light changes.
C The frequency of the light changes.
D The speed of the light changes.
22 Light from a torch is incident on a plane mirror. The angle of incidence is 38.
What is the angle of reflection?
A 38 B 52 C 76 D 142
© UCLES 2021 0625/22/F/M/21

9
23 Two rays with an angle of incidence of 60 pass into dilute and concentrated sugar-water
solutions. The refractions are shown.
60 60
air air
dilute concentrated
sugar sugar
40 35
solution solution
refractive index speed through solution

as concentration increases as concentration increases
24 A thin converging lens is used to produce a sharp image of a candle.
screen
image
lens
candle
Various sharp images are produced on the screen by moving the lens and the screen backwards
and forwards.
Which statement is always correct?
A The image is at the principal focus (focal point) of the lens.

B The image is bigger than the object.
C The image is closer to the lens than the object.
D The image is inverted.

10
25 Which row gives the approximate speeds at which ultraviolet waves travel in air and in a
vacuum?
speed in air speed in a vacuum

m/s m/s
A 340 3.0  108

B 340 340
C 3.0  108 340
D 3.0  108 3.0  108
26 The diagram represents a sound wave.
X Y
What are the names of the parts of the sound wave labelled X and Y?
X Y
A amplitude wavelength
B compression rarefaction
C rarefaction amplitude
D wavelength compression
27 The speed of sound is different in different states of matter.
The speed of sound in liquid water is 1500 m / s.
Which row correctly compares the speed of sound in ice and the speed of sound in water vapour
with the speed of sound in water?
speed of sound in ice speed of sound in steam

m/s m/s
A less than 1500 less than 1500

B less than 1500 more than 1500
C more than 1500 less than 1500
D more than 1500 more than 1500
© UCLES 2021 0625/22/F/M/21

11
28 Three methods to demagnetise a magnet are suggested. The magnet is in an east-west direction.
1 hitting the magnet repeatedly with a hammer

2 heating the magnet until red hot
3 withdrawing the magnet from a coil which has a direct current (d.c.) in it
Which methods demagnetise the magnet?
29 Three cores of different metals P, Q and R are placed inside identical coils of wire.
At least one of the metals is non-magnetic.
The cores are held above some iron nails.
The three diagrams show what happens when there is a current in the coils.
coil
+ + +
– – –
core
P Q R
iron
nails
The three diagrams below show what happens when the current is then switched off.
+ + +
– – –
P Q R
Which core metals are magnetic?
A P only B R only C P and Q D Q and R

12
30 Two uncharged metal spheres X and Y rest on insulating stands and touch each other. A
negatively charged plastic rod is brought near to sphere X.
metal spheres
negatively –
–
charged rod –
– X Y
–
–
insulating stand insulating stand
Using the insulating stand, sphere Y is moved away from sphere X.
What are the signs and the relative magnitudes of the charges induced on X and Y?
relative magnitudes
charge on X charge on Y
of charges
A negative negative equal

B negative positive different
C positive negative equal
D positive positive different
31 Which two changes to a metal wire both decrease its resistance?
cross-sectional
length of wire
area of wire
A decrease decrease
B decrease increase
C increase decrease
D increase increase
32 There is a current I in a resistor of resistance R for a time t. The potential difference across the
resistor is V.
Which equation gives the energy E transferred by the resistor?
A E = IR B E = IV C E = IRt D E = IVt
© UCLES 2021 0625/22/F/M/21

13
33 A resistor R is connected in parallel with an 8.0  resistor. The resistance of this combination
is 4.0 .
8.0 Ω
What is the resistance of resistor R?
A 0.50  B 2.0  C 4.0  D 8.0 
34 A student designs a circuit to use as a dimmer switch for a lamp.
What happens to the brightness of the lamp and the potential difference (p.d.) across the lamp,
when the slider is moved from X to Y?
brightness of lamp p.d. across the lamp

14
35 The circuit shown contains two gates.
Which truth table describes the operation of the circuit?
A B C D
P Q R P Q R P Q R P Q R
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1
0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0
1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1
36 The diagram shows an electromagnet near a coil of wire connected to a voltmeter. The reading
on the voltmeter is zero.
electromagnet coil
soft iron
switch
V
+ –
The switch is closed. The electromagnet magnetises quickly.
What happens to the reading on the voltmeter?
A It keeps increasing.
B It quickly increases and stays at maximum.
C It quickly increases and then decreases.
D It stays on zero.
© UCLES 2021 0625/22/F/M/21

15
37 Which graph shows the voltage output of an a.c. generator with the peaks and zeros correctly
labelled?
A B
peaks peaks
voltage V voltage V
0 0
0 time t 0 time t
zeros zeros
C D
peaks peaks
voltage V voltage V
zeros
0 0
0 time t 0 time t
zeros peaks
38 Three students are describing the structure of an atom.
student 1 All the positively charged particles are in the nucleus.

student 2 Positive electrons are in the nucleus.
student 3 Negative electrons orbit around the nucleus.
Which students are making a correct statement?
39 When alpha particles are incident on a thin metal foil, most of them pass through undeviated.
What does this observation reveal about the nature of the atom?
A The atom has a dense nucleus.

B The atom is mostly empty space.
C The atom is very small.
D The nucleus of the atom is positively charged.

16
40 A laboratory worker measures the count rate from a radioactive source. He records his results in
a table.
time count rate

minutes counts / s
0 100
1.0 73
2.0 54
3.0 41
4.0 31
The average background radiation in the laboratory is 8 counts per second.
A 1.5 minutes
B 2.0 minutes
C 3.0 minutes
D 4.0 minutes
© UCLES 2021 0625/22/F/M/21

CAIE IGCSE Physics
March 2
2021
PUBLISHED
1 B 1
2 D 1
3 C 1
4 D 1
5 C 1
6 A 1
7 C 1
8 C 1
9 C 1
10 D 1
11 B 1
12 C 1
13 A 1
14 C 1
15 D 1
16 C 1
17 A 1
18 B 1
19 B 1
20 A 1
21 D 1
22 A 1
23 C 1
24 D 1
25 D 1
26 B 1
27 C 1
28 B 1

CAIE IGCSE Physics
March 2
2021
PUBLISHED
29 D 1
30 C 1
31 B 1
32 D 1
33 D 1
34 A 1
35 D 1
36 C 1
37 D 1
38 C 1
39 B 1
40 B 1

Cambridge IGCSE™
PHYSICS 0625/21
45 minutes

*6763850843*

Soft clean eraser
INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION
IB21 06_0625_21/3RP

2
1 The diagram shows a stone of irregular shape.
Which property of the stone can be found by lowering it into a measuring cylinder half-filled with
water?
A length
B mass
C volume
D weight
2 Which row describes speed and velocity?
speed velocity
A scalar scalar
B scalar vector
C vector scalar
D vector vector
3 Four balls with different masses are dropped from the heights shown.
Air resistance may be ignored.
Which ball has the smallest average speed?
A B C D
1.0 kg
2.0 kg
3.0 kg
4.0 m
4.0 kg
3.0 m
2.0 m
1.0 m ground
© UCLES 2021 0625/21/M/J/21

3
4 An object of mass 2.0 kg is taken from the Earth, where the gravitational field strength is 10 N / kg,
to the Moon, where the gravitational field strength is 1.6 N / kg.
weight on weight on
the Earth / N the Moon / N
A 0.20 0.80
B 0.20 3.2
C 20 0.80
D 20 3.2
5 The mass of an empty flask is 34 g.
The volume of liquid added to the flask is 20 cm3.
The total mass of the flask and the liquid is 50 g.
6 The extension–load graph for a spring is shown. The unstretched length of the spring is 17.0 cm.
3
extension / cm
0
0 1 2 3 4
load / N
When an object is suspended from the spring, the length of the spring is 19.2 cm.
A 1.4 N B 1.6 N C 2.6 N D 3.0 N

4
7 A cart has a mass of 10 kg. A boy pushes on the cart horizontally with a force of 50 N. The cart
accelerates at 0.50 m / s2.
What is the frictional force acting on the cart?
A 5.0 N B 20 N C 30 N D 45 N
8 A ball has a mass of 2.0 kg. The ball approaches a wall at a speed of 3.0 m / s and rebounds at a
speed of 1.0 m / s.
wall
3.0 m / s
1.0 m / s
What is the impulse on the wall?
A 4.0 N B 4.0 N s C 8.0 N D 8.0 N s
9 Which situation involves no work being done and no energy being transferred?
A a car skidding to a stop on a road

B a crane lifting a load
C a heavy load hanging from a strong bar
D a student dragging a big box over a rough floor
10 A student suggests that there are several ways of transferring energy to a small, stationary block
of iron on a smooth table. He makes the following suggestions.
1 Heat it.
2 Shine light on it.
3 Pass a current through it.
11 An engine produces 240 kJ of energy in 2.0 minutes.
What is the power output of the engine?
A 2.0 kW B 120 kW C 480 kW D 28 800 kW
© UCLES 2021 0625/21/M/J/21

5
12 A book has a mass of 400 g.
The surface of the book in contact with a table has dimensions 0.10 m  0.20 m.
The gravitational field strength g is 10 N / kg.
What is the pressure exerted on the table due to the book?
A 0.08 N / m2 B 8.0 N / m2 C 20 N / m2 D 200 N / m2
At which point is the pressure greater than atmospheric pressure?
mercury
14 The table gives information about molecules.
Which row describes a gas?
force distance
between molecules between molecules
A strong close together

B strong far apart
C negligible far apart
D negligible close together

6
15 Very small pollen grains are suspended in water. A bright light shines from the side.
When looked at through a microscope, small specks of light are seen to be moving in a random,
jerky manner.
eye
microscope
bright light
pollen grains
in water
What are the moving specks of light?
A pollen grains being hit by other pollen grains

B pollen grains being hit by water molecules
C water molecules being hit by other water molecules
D water molecules being hit by pollen grains
16 Why are small gaps left between the metal rails of a railway track?
A to allow for expansion of the rails on a hot day

B to allow for contraction of the rails on a hot day
C to allow for expansion of the rails on a cold day
D to allow for contraction of the rails on a cold day
© UCLES 2021 0625/21/M/J/21

7
17 A block of metal absorbs 2000 J of thermal energy.
The temperature of the block rises from 10 C to 20 C.
The mass of the block is 2.0 kg.
What is the specific heat capacity of the metal?
A 50 J / (kg C) B 100 J / (kg C) C 200 J / (kg C) D 400 J / (kg C)
18 Which statement about boiling and evaporation is correct?
A Boiling requires a supply of thermal energy but evaporation does not.

B Evaporation takes place at the surface of a liquid but boiling takes place throughout the
liquid.
C When water boils in a kettle, its temperature decreases.
D When water evaporates, its temperature increases.
19 A metal rod is heated at end X.
X Y
heat
Why does end Y of the metal rod become hot?
A Energy is transferred from end X of the rod to end Y by vibration of positive ions and by
movement of electrons.
B Energy is transferred from end X of the rod to end Y by movement of positive ions only.
C Energy is transferred from end X of the rod to end Y by vibration of positive ions only.
D Energy is transferred from end X of the rod to end Y by movement of electrons only.

8
20 Two square sheets of metal, P and Q, are heated to the same temperature. The metal sheets are
shown.
P Q
20 cm
40 cm
Sheet Q is emitting more radiation than sheet P.
A Dull black surfaces are better conductors of radiation.

B Dull black surfaces are better emitters of radiation.
C The surface area of Q is larger than that of P.
D White surfaces are better absorbers of radiation.
21 A water wave passes into a region where the wave travels more slowly.
As it passes into the slow region, what happens to the frequency and what happens to the
wavelength of the wave?
frequency wavelength
A decreases remains the same

B increases remains the same
C remains the same decreases
D remains the same increases
© UCLES 2021 0625/21/M/J/21

9
22 Light travelling at a speed of 3.0  108 m / s strikes the surface of a glass block and undergoes
refraction as it enters the block.
The diagram shows a ray of this light before and after it enters the block.
55q
glass block
33q
What is the speed of light in the glass?
A 1.8  108 m / s
B 2.0  108 m / s
C 4.5  108 m / s
D 5.0  108 m / s
23 The diagram shows a narrow beam of light incident on a glass-air boundary. Some of the light
emerges along the surface of the glass and some is reflected back into the glass.
T
glass
air
this is an example of angle  is the

total internal reflection critical angle
A no yes
B no no
C yes no
D yes yes

10
24 An object is placed in front of a thin converging lens.
The diagram shows the paths of two rays from the top of the object.
converging lens
object
An image of the object is formed on a screen to the right of the lens.
How does this image compare with the object?
A It is larger and inverted.

B It is larger and the same way up.
C It is smaller and inverted.
D It is smaller and the same way up.
25 A remote-controlled vehicle is travelling on the surface of a planet. The vehicle senses an

obstacle ahead. It sends a radio message to the control room from where it is being controlled.
The control room is 2.4  106 km away from the vehicle. The control room sends a message back
to the vehicle telling it to stop.
What is the minimum time that elapses between the vehicle sensing the obstacle and receiving
the message back from the control room?
A 8.0 ms B 16 ms C 8.0 s D 16 s
26 A sound wave is travelling outwards from a loudspeaker into the surrounding air.
Here are three statements.
1 The air pressure is lower at a rarefaction compared with undisturbed air.

2 The density of the air is less at a compression compared with undisturbed air.
3 The distance from a compression to a rarefaction equals half a wavelength.
Which statements about the sound wave are correct?
© UCLES 2021 0625/21/M/J/21

11
27 The sound from a loudspeaker must pass through two materials to reach a microphone.
loudspeaker microphone
material 1 material 2
Which combination of materials gives the shortest time for the sound to reach the microphone?
A air hydrogen
B air water
C copper aluminium
D water oil
28 Diagram 1 shows a small compass needle with its poles marked. It is not near any magnetic
materials.
Diagram 2 shows a bar magnet with its poles marked. The compass needle is placed at point P.
diagram 1 diagram 2
N
N S
S
In which direction will the N pole of the compass needle point?
A to the left
B to the right
C down the page
D up the page

12
29 A student rubs a plastic rod with a cloth.
The rod becomes positively charged.
What has happened to the rod?

B It has gained protons.
D It has lost protons.
30 An isolated metal sphere is positively charged.
It is then brought near to another isolated metal sphere that is neutral.
left right
+ +
+ + +
+
+ + +
positively charged + + + neutral
metal sphere metal sphere
What happens to the charges on the neutral sphere as the positively charged sphere is brought
close to it?
A Some positive charges move to the left and some negative charges move to the right.
B Some positive charges move to the right and some negative charges move to the left.
C Some positive charges move to the right, but the negative charges do not move.
D The positive charges do not move, but some negative charges move to the left.
31 Which statement about the resistance of a metal wire is correct?
A The resistance is directly proportional to its length and directly proportional to its
cross-sectional area.
B The resistance is directly proportional to its length and inversely proportional to its
C The resistance is inversely proportional to its length and directly proportional to its
D The resistance is inversely proportional to its length and inversely proportional to its
© UCLES 2021 0625/21/M/J/21

13
32 The circuit diagram shows a light-dependent resistor (LDR) in a potential divider.
A voltmeter is connected across the LDR.
Which row shows the resistance of the LDR and the potential difference (p.d.) shown on the
voltmeter at a specific light level?
resistance p.d. shown on

light level
of LDR the voltmeter
A bright low high

B bright high low
C dim high high
D dim low low
33 Three NAND gates are connected in a single chip as shown.
input 1
output
input 2
The whole chip behaves as a single logic gate.
Which type of logic gate does the chip act as?
A AND gate
B NAND gate
C NOR gate
D OR gate

14
34 A solenoid is connected to a very sensitive ammeter. A rod is inserted into one end of the
solenoid. The ammeter shows that there is a small electric current in the solenoid while the rod is
moving.
solenoid
rod
Which rod is being inserted?
A a heated copper rod

B a magnetised steel rod
C an uncharged nylon rod
D a radioactive uranium rod
35 The diagram shows an electric generator with the coil in a vertical position.
magnetic poles
coil
N S
to oscilloscope
slip rings
brushes
Which row describes the generator?
the generator the voltage output

produces will be zero when
A a.c. the coil is horizontal

B a.c. the coil is vertical
C d.c. the coil is horizontal
D d.c. the coil is vertical
© UCLES 2021 0625/21/M/J/21

15
36 The diagram shows a transformer. There are 460 turns on the primary coil and 24 turns on the
secondary coil. The primary voltage is 230 V.
iron core
primary coil secondary coil
What is the secondary voltage?
A 2.0 V B 12 V C 48 V D 4400 V
37 The charge on a proton is e.
What is the charge on an electron and what is the charge on a neutron?
electron neutron
A e e
B e 0
C –e –e
D –e 0
38 Four students are asked to comment on the processes of nuclear fission and nuclear fusion.
Their comments are recorded in the table.
fission fusion
A energy is absorbed a large unstable nucleus splits

B a large unstable nucleus splits energy is absorbed
C two light nuclei join energy is absorbed
D energy is released two light nuclei join

16
219
39 Radon 86Rn decays by emitting an -particle.
Which nuclide is formed in this decay?
215 223 219 219

A 84Po B 88Ra C 87Fr D 85 At
40 The graph shows the activity of a radioactive source over a period of time.
120
activity
counts / s 90
60
30
0
0 1 2 3 4 5
time / minutes
A 1.0 minute B 2.0 minutes C 2.5 minutes D 4.0 minutes
© UCLES 2021 0625/21/M/J/21

CAIE IGCSE Physics
May/June 2
2021
PUBLISHED
1 C 1
2 B 1
3 A 1
4 D 1
5 A 1
6 D 1
7 D 1
8 D 1
9 C 1
10 D 1
11 A 1
12 D 1
13 D 1
14 C 1
15 B 1
16 A 1
17 B 1
18 B 1
19 A 1
20 C 1
21 C 1
22 B 1
23 A 1
24 A 1
25 D 1
26 B 1
27 C 1
28 B 1

CAIE IGCSE Physics
May/June 2
2021
PUBLISHED
29 C 1
30 D 1
31 B 1
32 C 1
33 D 1
34 B 1
35 B 1
36 B 1
37 D 1
38 D 1
39 A 1
40 B 1

Cambridge IGCSE™
PHYSICS 0625/22
45 minutes

*2416172797*

Soft clean eraser
INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION
IB21 06_0625_22/5RP

2
1 Which piece of apparatus is the most suitable for measuring the mass of a pencil sharpener?
A digital balance
B measuring cylinder
C newton meter
D ruler
A B C D
1.0 kg
2.0 kg
3.0 kg
4.0 m
4.0 kg
3.0 m
2.0 m
1.0 m ground
© UCLES 2021 0625/22/M/J/21

3
3 A ball is thrown vertically upwards through the air. Air resistance acts on the ball.
Which graph shows how its speed varies with time?
A B
speed speed
0 0
0 time 0 time
C D
speed speed
0 0
0 time 0 time
4 What is the best description of the meaning of the ‘mass’ of an object?
A the space occupied by the object

B the force that gravity exerts on the object
C the resistance of the object to changes in motion
D the closeness of packing of the molecules in the object

4
5 A measuring cylinder contains 40 cm3 of water.
A stone of mass 94 g is lowered into the water so that it is fully submerged as shown.
cm3
100
90
80
70
90
60
50
80
40
30 70
20
10
What is the density of the stone?
3
extension / cm
0
0 1 2 3 4
load / N
A 1.4 N B 1.6 N C 2.6 N D 3.0 N
© UCLES 2021 0625/22/M/J/21

5
7 A satellite orbits the Earth in an anticlockwise direction at constant speed, as shown.
When the satellite is in the position shown, in which direction does the resultant force act upon it?
direction of motion
of satellite
Earth D B
satellite
C
8 A tennis ball has a mass of 57 g.
A tennis player hits the tennis ball with a tennis racket. The tennis ball has a velocity of 25 m / s
when it hits the racket.
The velocity of the tennis ball when it leaves the player’s racket is 15 m / s in the opposite direction
from its approaching direction.
The average force exerted by the tennis racket on the ball is 35 N.
For how long is the tennis ball in contact with the tennis racket?
A 0.015 s B 0.016 s C 0.065 s D 0.65 s
9 This question is about four methods used to produce electrical energy.
Which method has a correct description?
energy source emits

method
is renewable carbon dioxide
A a hydroelectric power station yes no

B a coal-fired power station no no
C a wind turbine no yes
D a nuclear power station yes yes
10 A stone is released from rest from a high building on Earth. Air resistance is negligible.
What is its velocity when it has fallen 5 m?
A 7.1 m / s B 10 m / s C 50 m / s D 100 m / s

6
11 The power input to an electric motor is 400 W. The efficiency of the motor is 85%.
How much power is wasted?
A 60 W B 85 W C 340 W D 470 W
A 0.08 N / m2 B 8.0 N / m2 C 20 N / m2 D 200 N / m2
13 A horizontal metal plate of area 0.50 m2 lies at the bottom of a lake at a depth of 40 m.
The density of water is 1000 kg / m3 and the gravitational field strength g is 10 N / kg.
What is the downward force acting on the plate due to the water?
A 20 kN B 80 kN C 200 kN D 800 kN
14 Which row describes the forces between the molecules and the motion of the molecules in a
gas?
forces between motion

molecules of molecules
A strong move freely

B strong vibrate only
C weak move freely
D weak vibrate only
© UCLES 2021 0625/22/M/J/21

7
jerky manner.
eye
microscope
bright light
pollen grains
in water

16 A hole is drilled in a metal plate.
What happens to the length of the plate and to the diameter of the hole when the plate is cooled?
length of plate diameter of hole

8
17 Which statement describes a sensitive liquid-in-glass thermometer?
A a thermometer which can be used to measure very high and very low values of temperature
B a thermometer which gives the same increase in length of the liquid column for each degree
of temperature rise
C a thermometer which is accurate because it has been calibrated
D a thermometer which gives a large increase in the length of the liquid column for each
degree of temperature rise
18 A block of aluminium of mass 2.0 kg has an initial temperature of 20 C. It absorbs 7300 J of
thermal energy.
The specific heat capacity of aluminium is 913 J / (kg C).
What is the final temperature of the aluminium block?
A 4.0 C B 8.0 C C 24 C D 28 C
19 A student sets up four cans. Each can contains the same mass of water at 90 C.
The cans are identical except for the outside surfaces.
Which can will cool down the fastest?
A dull, black surface

B dull, white surface
C shiny, black surface
D shiny, white surface
20 Thermal energy is transferred by conduction in a metal bar.
A Fast vibrating ions leave the surface.

B Free moving electrons carry thermal energy through the bar.
C Ions vibrate and strike neighbouring ions to make them vibrate.
D Ions vibrate but do not change position.
© UCLES 2021 0625/22/M/J/21

9

55q
glass block
33q
A 1.8  108 m / s
B 2.0  108 m / s
C 4.5  108 m / s
D 5.0  108 m / s
23 Which statement about the image of an object formed in a plane mirror is correct?
A It is smaller than the object.

B It is the same size as the object.
C It is larger than the object.
D It is inverted.

10
converging lens
object

25 Here are three statements about the speed of electromagnetic waves.
1 The speed of an electromagnetic wave in a vacuum is 340 m / s.
2 The speed of an electromagnetic wave in a vacuum is 3.0  108 m / s.

3 The speed of an electromagnetic wave in a vacuum is approximately the same as in
air.
A 1 and 3 B 1 only C 2 and 3 D 2 only
© UCLES 2021 0625/22/M/J/21

11
A air hydrogen
B air water
C copper aluminium
D water oil
27 Which method does not demagnetise a bar magnet?
A Heat the bar magnet and place it in the east-west direction to cool.
B Place the bar magnet in the east-west direction and hammer it.
C Place the bar magnet in a coil connected to an a.c. supply and slowly withdraw it.
D Place the bar magnet in a coil connected to a d.c. supply and slowly withdraw it.

12
28 Three piles of small nails, P, Q and R, are placed on a bench below three electromagnets.
One set of nails is made of copper, one of soft iron and one of steel.
Diagram 1 shows the situation when the electromagnets are switched on.
Diagram 2 shows the situation when the electromagnets are then switched off.
diagram 1
the switches are closed
Q R
P bench
small nails
diagram 2
the switches are open
small nails R
bench
P Q
Which row correctly identifies the materials from which the nails are made?
copper soft iron steel
A P Q R
B P R Q
C Q P R
D Q R P
© UCLES 2021 0625/22/M/J/21

13
29 A magnet is suspended by a cotton thread.
The magnet is displaced then allowed to swing freely until it comes to rest.
Why does the magnet always come to rest pointing in the same direction?
A because of the interaction between the electric field of the magnet and the electric field of the
Earth
B because of the interaction between the electric field of the magnet and the magnetic field of
the Earth
C because of the interaction between the magnetic field of the magnet and the gravitational
field of the Earth
D because of the interaction between the magnetic field of the magnet and the magnetic field of
the Earth

left right
+ +
+ + +
+
+ + +
close to it?

14
32 Which circuit has a zero reading on the ammeter?
A B
A A
C D
A A
33 Two 10  resistors are connected in series and then in parallel.
What is the combined resistance in each case?
resistance in resistance in
series /  parallel / 
A 10 5
B 10 10
C 20 5
D 20 10
34 The diagram shows a combination of four logic gates that produce an output signal at R that
depends on the states of the inputs P and Q.
Which single logic gate produces the same effect as the combination?
© UCLES 2021 0625/22/M/J/21

15
moving.
solenoid
rod

36 The diagram shows a transformer.
iron core
550 turns 115 turns
output
22 000 V
voltage
What is the output voltage?
A 0.35 V B 2.9 V C 4600 V D 105 000 V
37 Which row correctly states how nuclei behave during nuclear fission and during nuclear fusion?
fission fusion
A nuclei join together nuclei join together

B nuclei join together nuclei split apart
C nuclei split apart nuclei join together
D nuclei split apart nuclei split apart

16
electron neutron
A e e
B e 0
C –e –e
D –e 0
39 Some radioactive nuclei decay to give new nuclei which are also radioactive. Part of a series of
decays is shown.
238 234 234 234 230 226

92U  90 Th  91Pa  92U  90 Th  88Ra
How many decays involve the emission of a -particle?
A 1 B 2 C 3 D 5
120
activity
counts / s 90
60
30
0
0 1 2 3 4 5
time / minutes
© UCLES 2021 0625/22/M/J/21

CAIE IGCSE Physics
May/June 2
2021
PUBLISHED
1 A 1
2 A 1
3 D 1
4 C 1
5 D 1
6 D 1
7 D 1
8 C 1
9 A 1
10 B 1
11 A 1
12 D 1
13 C 1
14 C 1
15 B 1
16 A 1
17 D 1
18 C 1
19 A 1
20 A 1
21 C 1
22 B 1
23 B 1
24 A 1
25 C 1
26 C 1
27 D 1
28 A 1

CAIE IGCSE Physics
May/June 2
2021
PUBLISHED
29 D 1
30 C 1
31 D 1
32 D 1
33 C 1
34 D 1
35 B 1
36 C 1
37 C 1
38 D 1
39 B 1
40 B 1

Cambridge IGCSE™
PHYSICS 0625/23
45 minutes

*5137607052*

Soft clean eraser
INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION
This document has 20 pages. Any blank pages are indicated.
IB21 06_0625_23/3RP

2
1 The diagram shows a plastic rod alongside a ruler.
plastic rod
0 cm 10 20
What is the length of the rod?
A 2.5 cm B 3.5 cm C 7.0 cm D 9.0 cm
A B C D
1.0 kg
2.0 kg
3.0 kg
4.0 m
4.0 kg
3.0 m
2.0 m
1.0 m ground
3 A cyclist rides 300 m up a slope in 50 s.
She then rides down the slope in 25 s.
What is her average speed for the whole journey?
A 4.0 m / s B 8.0 m / s C 9.0 m / s D 16 m / s
4 An object is on the surface of the Earth.
Which statement describes the weight of the object?
A the quantity of material that the object contains

B the quantity of space that the object takes up
C the gravitational force acting on the object
D the object’s resistance to a change in its motion
© UCLES 2021 0625/23/M/J/21

3
5 The tank shown has the dimensions 5.0 m  4.0 m  4.0 m.
It is completely filled with water of density 1000 kg / m3.
5.0 m
4.0 m 4.0 m
What is the mass of water in the tank?
A 12.5 kg B 62.5 kg C 16 000 kg D 80 000 kg
3
extension / cm
0
0 1 2 3 4
load / N
A 1.4 N B 1.6 N C 2.6 N D 3.0 N

4
7 A car of mass 1200 kg is travelling along a horizontal road.
direction of motion
total frictional force = 1000 N driving force = 4000 N
What is the acceleration of the car?
A 0.83 m / s2 B 1.2 m / s2 C 2.5 m / s2 D 3.3 m / s2
8 Object X moves to the right along a frictionless surface towards a stationary object Y, as shown.
direction
of travel
X Y
They make a noise as they collide and then both objects move to the right.
Which equation is correct?
A change in momentum of X = change in momentum of Y

B impulse of force acting on X = impulse of force acting on Y
C kinetic energy of X before collision = (kinetic energy of X + kinetic energy of Y) after collision
D momentum of X before collision = (momentum of X + momentum of Y) after collision
9 A stream flows out of a lake and down the side of a hill.
What best describes the change in energy stores?
A kinetic energy  chemical energy + internal energy
B gravitational potential energy  kinetic energy + internal energy
C gravitational potential energy + kinetic energy  internal energy
D kinetic energy  internal energy + gravitational potential energy
© UCLES 2021 0625/23/M/J/21

5
10 The energy input to a device is E.
The amount of energy wasted by the device is W.
Which expression gives the efficiency of the device?
A W  E  100%
W
B W  100%
E
C E  W  100%
E
D E  W  100%
W
11 A builder lifts 30 bricks from the ground onto a platform 2.0 m high.
Each brick has a mass of 4.0 kg.
What is the work done against gravity by the builder in lifting the bricks onto the platform?
A 80 J B 120 J C 240 J D 2400 J
A 0.08 N / m2 B 8.0 N / m2 C 20 N / m2 D 200 N / m2
13 The diagram shows a tank full of water.
The mass of water in the tank is m.
The density of the water is .
The height of water in the tank is h.
Which equation gives the pressure p due to the water at the bottom of the tank?
A p = h g B p = mgh C p = m g D p = m h

6
14 A liquid at room temperature is put on a metal surface which is also at room temperature.
A student blows gently across the liquid and its temperature decreases.
What causes the liquid to become cooler?
A Bubbles of water vapour form in the liquid and go into the air.
B The moving air reduces the kinetic energy of all the particles in the liquid.
C Thermal energy flows from the liquid into the metal.
D The more energetic particles in the liquid escape into the air.
jerky manner.
eye
microscope
bright light
pollen grains
in water

© UCLES 2021 0625/23/M/J/21

7
16 The liquid level in a thermometer rises when the thermometer is placed in hot water.
What causes this?
A The liquid contracts.

B The liquid evaporates.
C The liquid expands.
D The liquid freezes.
17 A student calculates the energy needed to raise the temperature of an aluminium block from
50 C to 60 C.
He then does an experiment to measure the energy used to do this.
Which statement about the measured energy is correct?
A The measured energy will be greater than the calculated energy because some energy is
transferred to the surroundings.
B The measured energy will be greater than the calculated energy because the block absorbs
energy from the surroundings.
C The measured energy will be less than the calculated energy because the mass of the block
decreases as it gets warmer.
D The measured energy will be less than the calculated energy because the thermal capacity
of the block is low.
18 Which row correctly describes a liquid that is boiling?
where it takes
bubbles seen
place in the liquid
A no surface only
B no throughout liquid
C yes surface only
D yes throughout liquid

8
19 Three students are planning an experiment to test thermal conduction in different materials.
The students each propose a hypothesis.
1 I think the copper rod will be a good thermal conductor because it is a metal.
2 I think the glass rod will be a good thermal conductor because it has free electrons
which vibrate and transfer energy quickly.
3 I think the wooden rod will be a poor thermal conductor because it can only transfer
energy along the rod by vibrating the lattice particles.
Which of their hypotheses are correct?
20 A copper plate is shiny on one side and is painted dull black on the other side. The plate is
heated to a high temperature. A person places his hands at equal distances from either side of
the plate, close to the plate, but not touching it.
shiny dull black
very hot copper plate
Why does the hand near the dull black surface of the plate feel much hotter than the hand near
the shiny surface?
A The dull black surface is a better emitter of radiation than the shiny surface.
B The dull black surface is a better conductor of radiation than the shiny surface.
C The dull black surface is a better reflector of radiation than the shiny surface.
D The dull black surface is at a higher temperature than the shiny surface.
© UCLES 2021 0625/23/M/J/21

9

55
glass block
33
A 1.8  108 m / s
B 2.0  108 m / s
C 4.5  108 m / s
D 5.0  108 m / s
23 A beam of light is monochromatic.
What does monochromatic mean?
A All the waves in the beam must have the same frequency only.
B All the waves in the beam must have the same amplitude only.
C All the waves in the beam must have the same speed only.
D All the waves in the beam must have the same amplitude, frequency and speed.

10
converging lens
object

25 Which row correctly describes what happens to the frequency and to the speed of
electromagnetic waves as we move through the spectrum from -rays to radio waves?
frequency speed in a vacuum
B decreases remains the same
D increases remains the same
© UCLES 2021 0625/23/M/J/21

11
26 The diagram shows a model of a sound wave passing through air in an open tube.
Q air particle
What is the region Q?
A a compression which is a region of high pressure

B a compression which is a region of low pressure
C a rarefaction which is a region of high pressure
D a rarefaction which is a region of low pressure
A air hydrogen
B air water
C copper aluminium
D water oil

12
28 A bar magnet picks up two steel bolts.
Which diagram shows the magnetic poles induced in the bolts?
A B
N S N S
S S
N N
N S
S N
C D
N S N S
N N
S S
S N
N S

© UCLES 2021 0625/23/M/J/21

13
left right
+ +
+ + +
+
+ + +
close to it?
31 The diagram shows a circuit containing a cell, two resistors, a switch and a voltmeter.
When the switch is open the voltmeter reads 1.5 V.
When the switch is closed the voltmeter reads 2.0 V.
What is the electromotive force (e.m.f.) of the cell?
A 0.5 V B 1.5 V C 2.0 V D 3.5 V

14
32 A 4.0  resistor and a 12  resistor are connected in parallel.
4.0 Ω
12 Ω
What is the effective resistance of this combination of resistors?
A 0.33  B 3.0  C 8.0  D 16 
33 Which combination of two gates will result in the truth table shown?
P Q R
0 0 0
0 1 1
1 0 1
1 1 1
A B
P P
R R
Q Q
C D
P P
R R
Q Q
© UCLES 2021 0625/23/M/J/21

15
moving.
solenoid
rod

35 A 12 V, 36 W lamp shines at normal brightness when connected to a mains transformer.
Assume the transformer is 100% efficient.
1200 turns
iron core
240 V 12 V
a.c. mains 36 W
secondary coil
Which row shows the number of turns in the secondary coil and the current in the mains wires?
number of turns current in the

in secondary coil mains wire / A
A 60 0.15
B 60 3.0
C 180 0.15
D 180 3.0

16
36 Diagram 1 shows a wire carrying an electric current into the page.
The wire is between the poles of a magnet.
A force is produced on the wire acting down towards the bottom of the page.
Diagram 2 shows the situation after the current is reversed and the magnet is turned through 90.
diagram 1 diagram 2
N S S
direction
of force
N
In which direction does the force act after these changes?
A towards the top of the page

B towards the bottom of the page
C towards the left-hand side of the page
D towards the right-hand side of the page
electron neutron
A e e
B e 0
C –e –e
D –e 0
© UCLES 2021 0625/23/M/J/21

17
38 The diagram shows -particles incident on a thin metal foil.
thin metal foil
How does the motion of these particles give evidence for the nuclear atom?
A Most particles passing through with minimal deflection shows that the atom is mostly empty
space.
B Most particles passing through with minimal deflection shows that the mass of the atom is
uniformly distributed.
C Large deflections of some particles shows that the atom is mostly empty space.
D Large deflections of some particles shows that the charge in the atom is uniformly
distributed.
226
39 Radium-226, 88Ra , is an -emitter.
It is implanted inside cancerous tumours.
It is safe to use as it kills the cancerous cells, but not the healthy ones surrounding the tumour.
Which properties of -particles, compared to other emissions, enable this use of radium-226?
ionising effect penetration

of -particles of -particles
A high high
B high low
C low high
D low low

18
120
activity
counts / s 90
60
30
0
0 1 2 3 4 5
time / minutes
© UCLES 2021 0625/23/M/J/21

CAIE IGCSE Physics
May/June 2
2021
PUBLISHED
1 C 1
2 A 1
3 B 1
4 C 1
5 D 1
6 D 1
7 C 1
8 D 1
9 B 1
10 C 1
11 D 1
12 D 1
13 A 1
14 D 1
15 B 1
16 C 1
17 A 1
18 D 1
19 B 1
20 A 1
21 C 1
22 B 1
23 A 1
24 A 1
25 B 1
26 D 1
27 C 1
28 D 1

CAIE IGCSE Physics
May/June 2
2021
PUBLISHED
29 C 1
30 D 1
31 C 1
32 B 1
33 C 1
34 B 1
35 A 1
36 C 1
37 D 1
38 A 1
39 B 1
40 B 1

Cambridge IGCSE™
PHYSICS 0625/21
45 minutes

*2413099302*

Soft clean eraser
INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION
IB21 11_0625_21/2RP

2
1 Which instrument is most suitable for measuring the thickness of a single sheet of paper?
A 15 cm rule
B balance
C metre rule
D micrometer screw gauge
2 The diagrams show distance–time graphs for four objects.
Which graph represents an object moving with an increasing speed?
A B
distance distance
0 0
0 time 0 time
C D
distance distance
0 0
0 time 0 time
3 An object has a weight of 6.4 N on the Earth where the gravitational field strength is 10 N / kg.
Which row states the mass and the weight of the object on the Moon where the gravitational field
strength is 1.6 N / kg?
weight on
mass / kg
the Moon / N
A 0.64 1.0
B 0.64 6.4
C 4.0 1.0
D 4.0 6.4
© UCLES 2021 0625/21/O/N/21

3
4 Which substance in the table has the lowest density?
substance mass / g volume / cm3
A nylon 1.2 1.0

B cotton 1.5 1.0
C olive oil 1.8 2.0
D water 2.0 2.0
5 A 20 m long, uniform bridge of weight 100 kN is supported at each end by pillars, as shown.
T1 T2
20 m
bridge
pillar 24 kN pillar
100 kN
The pillars exert forces T1 and T2 on the ends of the bridge.
What are the values of T1 and T2 when a van of weight 24 kN is on the bridge, 5 m from the
left-hand pillar?
T1 / kN T2 / kN
A 56 68
B 62 62
C 68 56
D 74 50
6 A spring, which obeys Hooke’s law, has an unstretched length of 10 cm.
A load of 20 N is suspended from the spring.
The new length of the spring is 36 cm.
What is the spring constant k of the spring?

4
7 What is the relationship between the impulse acting on an object and the change in momentum of
the object?
A impulse = change in momentum
B impulse = change in momentum  time
change in momentum
C impulse =
time
change in momentum
D impulse =
mass
8 Electrical energy may be obtained from nuclear fission.
In which order is the energy transferred in this process?
A nuclear fuel  generator  reactor and boiler  turbines
B nuclear fuel  generator  turbines  reactor and boiler
C nuclear fuel  reactor and boiler  generator  turbines
D nuclear fuel  reactor and boiler  turbines  generator
9 A motor of power P exerts a force F on an object. The object moves a distance d during the time t
that the force acts.
Which equation is used to calculate the time t ?
A t= F B t = Fd C t = Pd D t= P
Pd P F Fd
10 A scientist uses an electric motor to lift a load through a vertical distance of 2.0 m.
He then increases the input power to the motor and repeats the experiment. The efficiency of the
motor does not change.
Which row correctly describes the effect that this has on the useful work done lifting the load and
the time taken to lift it?
work done time taken
B stays the same decreases
C decreases stays the same
© UCLES 2021 0625/21/O/N/21

5
11 Four containers are filled to the top with the same liquid. The base of each container is circular.
Which container has the greatest pressure exerted by the liquid at its base?
A B C D
12 A liquid is evaporating. The liquid is not boiling.
Which statement about the liquid is correct at an instant in time?
A Any molecule can escape, and from any part of the liquid.
B Any molecule can escape, but only from the liquid’s surface.
C Only molecules with enough energy can escape, and only from the liquid’s surface.
D Only molecules with enough energy can escape, but from any part of the liquid.
13 The diagram shows two cylinders connected by a narrow tube fitted with a tap.
tap
80 cm3 20 cm3
One cylinder contains 80 cm3 of gas at a pressure of 2.0  105 Pa. The other cylinder contains a
vacuum.
The volume of the evacuated cylinder is 20 cm3. The tap is opened so that the gas can flow to fill
both cylinders.
The temperature of the gas remains constant.
What is the new pressure of the gas?
A 0.50  105 Pa
B 1.6  105 Pa
C 2.5  105 Pa
D 8.0  105 Pa

6
14 An aluminium block has a mass of 200 g.
How much energy is needed to increase the temperature of the block from 20 C to 110 C?
A 2.0 J B 2000 J C 16 200 J D 16 200 000 J
liquid capillary tube
bulb scale
Which change to the design would result in a more sensitive thermometer?
A Increase the density of the liquid.

B Increase the diameter of the capillary tube.
C Increase the number of scale markings.
D Increase the volume of the bulb.
handle of pan
base of pan

© UCLES 2021 0625/21/O/N/21

7
17 The diagram shows waves in a ripple tank containing water.
The waves approach a barrier and pass through the gap in the barrier.
The size of the gap is about the same size as the wavelength of the ripples.
The gap size is increased.
What happens to the ripple pattern to the right of the barrier?
A The ripples are closer together.

B The ripples are further apart.
C The ripples are more curved.
D The ripples are less curved.
displacement 1
2 4 5 6
0
0 distance
3
Which row correctly indicates the amplitude and the wavelength of the wave?
amplitude wavelength
A the distance between 1 and 2 the distance between 4 and 5

B the distance between 1 and 2 the distance between 4 and 6
C the distance between 1 and 3 the distance between 4 and 5
D the distance between 1 and 3 the distance between 4 and 6

8
19 Two beams of light are both the same colour of red. One beam is travelling through air. The other
beam is travelling through water. Each beam has a different brightness.
Which quantity is the same for both sets of waves?
A amplitude
B frequency
C speed
D wavelength
20 The diagram shows a ray of light in air incident on a glass block. Some of the light is refracted
and some of the light is reflected. Two angles, p and q, are marked on the diagram.
ray of
light
q
air p
glass
Which row gives the angle of incidence and states whether total internal reflection occurs?
angle of total internal

incidence reflection
A p no
B p yes
C q no
D q yes
© UCLES 2021 0625/21/O/N/21

9
21 The diagram shows a ray of light in glass incident on the surface between the glass and air.
air
glass
What happens if the angle of incidence is made larger than the critical angle for the glass?
A The angle of refraction becomes equal to 90.

B There is a refracted ray and a ray reflected inside the glass.
C There is a refracted ray only.
D There is only a ray reflected inside the glass.
22 The Sun emits infrared radiation and light.
Which row gives correct information about the infrared radiation?
wavelength of time taken for infrared

infrared radiation radiation to reach the Earth

23 Which list shows regions of the electromagnetic spectrum in order of increasing frequency?
A X-ray  ultraviolet  visible light  infrared
B X-ray  infrared  visible light  ultraviolet
C infrared  visible light  ultraviolet  X-ray
D ultraviolet  visible light  infrared  X-ray
24 What is ultrasound?
A sound waves that are so loud that they damage human hearing
B sound waves that are too high-pitched for humans to hear
C sound waves that are too low-pitched for humans to hear
D sound waves that are too quiet for humans to hear

10
25 An uncharged, metal sphere is placed on an insulating support. A positively charged rod is

brought close to the sphere, but does not touch it.
+
+
+
+
+
+
How do the charges in the sphere move and what is now the charge on the sphere?
movement of charges charge on sphere

A negative charges move positive
to the right of the sphere
B negative charges move neutral
to the right of the sphere
C positive charges move positive
to the left of the sphere
D positive charges move neutral
to the left of the sphere
26 In which circuit is the ammeter measuring the flow of charge through the lamp?
A B C D
A A
27 A lamp is connected to a cell.
Which circuit diagram shows the direction of conventional current I and also the direction of flow
of electrons e?
A B C D
I e I e I e I e
© UCLES 2021 0625/21/O/N/21

11
28 The diagram shows a circuit containing two resistors of resistance 1.0  and 2.0 .
A voltmeter is connected across the 1.0  resistor by connecting P to X.
The reading on the voltmeter is 6.0 V.
1.0 Ω X 2.0 Ω Y
P
V
P is moved to point Y in the circuit.
What is the new reading on the voltmeter?
A 3.0 V B 6.0 V C 12 V D 18 V
29 The graph shows the current–voltage relationship for a circuit component X.
current
0
0 voltage
What happens to the resistance of X and what happens to the temperature of X as the voltage
increases?
resistance temperature
of X of X

12
In which diagram does the lower circuit of the pair behave differently from the upper circuit?
A B
C D
31 In which circuit do both lamps light?
A B C D
© UCLES 2021 0625/21/O/N/21

13
32 Two resistors, with resistances R1 and R2, are connected in parallel.
The resistance R1 is greater than the resistance R2.
R1
R2
What is the resistance of the parallel combination?
A less than either R1 or R2

B equal to R1
C equal to R2
D the average of R1 and R2
33 The metal cases of electrical appliances are connected to an earth wire.
A The live wire may become loose and touch the metal case.
B If the metal case becomes live, the earth wire conducts current to the ground.
C The earth wire needs to have a high resistance.
D Earthing metal cases helps prevent a person from receiving an electric shock.
34 What is the function of the split-ring commutator in an electric motor with a single rotating coil?
A to enable the motor to function with an a.c. source

B to reverse the current in the coil once every revolution
C to reverse the current in the coil whenever its plane becomes perpendicular to the magnetic
field
D to reverse the current in the coil whenever its plane is parallel with the magnetic field

14
35 Which graph represents an alternating current (a.c.)?
A B
current current
0 0
0 time 0 time
C D
current current
0 0
0 time 0 time
36 The diagrams show a horizontal wire in a magnetic field.
The horizontal wire is firmly held at each end (not shown) and cannot move.
The magnets and holder are on a balance.
When there is no current in the wire, the reading on the balance is 0.35 g.
fixed horizontal wire
current direction
N S
balance
N S
0.35 g fixed horizontal wire
view from side view from above
There is a d.c. current in the wire, as shown.
What happens to the reading on the balance?
A smaller than 0.35 g

B no change
C changing from smaller to larger than 0.35 g repeatedly
D larger than 0.35 g
© UCLES 2021 0625/21/O/N/21

15
37 The nucleus of an americium atom contains 146 neutrons and 95 protons. It decays by emitting
an -particle.
How many neutrons and how many protons remain in the nucleus when this form of americium
decays?
number of neutrons number of protons

remaining remaining
A 142 93
B 142 95
C 144 93
D 144 95
38 The graph shows how the count rate measured by a radioactivity detector placed near a
radioactive sample changed with time.
600
550
count rate
counts / min
500
450
400
350
300
250
200
150
100
50
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
time / h
Given that the background count rate is 30 counts / min, what is the half-life of this sample?
A 3.4 h B 3.6 h C 4.0 h D 5.5 h

16
39 A teacher holds a radioactive source near a detector.
The reading on the detector is 320 counts / min.
The detector is switched on again after the source has been removed and it shows a reading of
20 counts / min.
What is the counts / min solely due to the source and why is there a reading on the detector when
there is no radioactive source present?
counts / min reason for reading

due to the source with no source
A 300 zero error on detector

B 300 background radiation
C 340 zero error on detector
D 340 background radiation
40 Which statement is not correct?
A -particles are used to detect cracks in metallic structures.
B -particles are used in the measurement of the thickness of paper.
C -rays may be used to treat cancer patients.
D Smoke alarms contain a weak source of -particles.
© UCLES 2021 0625/21/O/N/21

CAIE IGCSE Physics
October/November
PUBLISHED 2021
1 D 29 B 1
2 D 30 D 1
3 A 31 C 1
4 C 32 A 1
5 C 33 C 1
6 B 34 C 1
7 A 35 A 1
8 D 36 D 1
9 B 37 C 1
10 B 38 A 1
11 A 39 B 1
12 C 40 A 1
13 B 1
14 C 1
15 D 1
16 B 1
17 D 1
18 B 1
19 B 1
20 C 1
21 D 1
22 A 1
23 C 1
24 B 1
25 B 1
26 B 1
27 C 1
28 D 1

Cambridge IGCSE™
PHYSICS 0625/22
45 minutes

*8748531517*

Soft clean eraser
INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION
IB21 11_0625_22/2RP

2
1 A student is taking some measurements.
Which measurement is taken directly using a micrometer screw gauge?
A 0.52 g / mm2 B 0.52 g / mm3 C 0.52 mm D 0.52 mm2
2 Which graph represents an object that is moving at constant speed?
A B
distance distance
0 0
0 time 0 time
C D
distance distance
0 0
0 time 0 time
3 In which situation does object X have a greater mass than object Y?
A Object X is in a larger gravitational field than object Y and both have the same weight.
B Object X shows a greater resistance to change in motion than object Y and both experience
the same resultant force.
C Object X has a lower density than object Y and both occupy the same volume.
D Object X moves at a greater speed than object Y and both possess the same kinetic energy.
© UCLES 2021 0625/22/O/N/21

3
A nylon 1.2 1.0

B cotton 1.5 1.0
C olive oil 1.8 2.0
D water 2.0 2.0
5 Three simple machines are shown.
1 2 3
moving soil with cutting string screwing a screw

a wheelbarrow with scissors with a screwdriver
Which machines are an application of the moment of a force?

4
7 A rocket is launched upwards from the surface of the Moon.
Hot gases are ejected downwards over a very short period of time.
A The rocket experiences a downward force.

B The rocket experiences an upward force.
C The total momentum of the hot gases is equal to the momentum of the rocket.
D The total momentum of the hot gases and rocket when the hot gases have been ejected is
zero.
9 A box of mass m slides down a slope of length l against a frictional force F. It descends a vertical
height d.
direction
of motion
F
l
mass m
stop
As the box slides down the slope, it loses gravitational potential energy and it does work against
the friction.
Which row gives the loss in gravitational potential energy and the work done against friction?
loss in gravitational work done

potential energy against friction
A mgd Fl
B mgd Fd
C mgl Fl
D mgl Fd
© UCLES 2021 0625/22/O/N/21

6
10 A rope, connected to a pulley system and motor, is used to lift different objects through different
distances. The time taken to lift each object is the same. The diagrams are not to scale.
Which motor requires the greatest power?
A B
platform platform
motor motor
2m 3m
10 kg 5 kg
C D
platform platform
motor motor
1m 3m
10 kg 2 kg
11 Which equation can be used to calculate the pressure at a depth h beneath the surface of a
liquid?
h
A p= h B p= C p = hg D p= 1
g g h g
© UCLES 2021 0625/22/O/N/21

7
13 A gas is contained in a sealed container in a laboratory. The temperature of the gas increases.
What happens to the average speed and what happens to the total kinetic energy of the gas
molecules?
average speed total kinetic energy
A does not change does not change

B does not change increases
C increases does not change
A 2.0 J B 2000 J C 16 200 J D 16 200 000 J
15 The diagram shows the apparatus used to measure the specific latent heat of vaporisation of
water.
2 kW heater
water
After the water begins to boil, 110 g of water is converted to steam in 120 s.
Using these results, what is the value of the specific latent heat of vaporisation of water?
A 1.8 J / kg B 1800 J / kg C 2200 J / kg D 2 200 000 J / kg

8
handle of pan
base of pan

17 The diagram shows the pattern of water waves as they pass through a narrow gap.
narrow gap
between two barriers
Which row names the process shown and describes the effect of using a wider gap?
name of process wider gap
A refraction waves spread out less

B refraction waves spread out more
C diffraction waves spread out less
D diffraction waves spread out more
© UCLES 2021 0625/22/O/N/21

9
18 Which row is not correct for a wave on the surface of water?
quantity usual unit
A amplitude m
B frequency Hz
C wavelength 
D speed m/s
19 The diagram shows how a ray of light refracts when going from air to Perspex.
x
air w
Perspex y
z
The critical angle of Perspex is c.
Which expression is correct?
A sin x = sin c
sin z
B sin z = sin c
sin x
C sin w = sin c
sin y
sin y
D = sin c
sin w

10
ray of
light
q
air p
glass

A p no
B p yes
C q no
D q yes
21 The letter F is reflected in a mirror.
mirror
What does the optical image look like?
A B C D
© UCLES 2021 0625/22/O/N/21

11


23 Which statement about electromagnetic waves is not correct?
A They travel at 3  108 m / s in a vacuum.

B They transfer energy.
C They travel at 340 m / s in air.
D They are transverse waves.
25 Which diagram shows the electric field pattern between two oppositely charged parallel metal
plates?
A B C D
+ – + – + – + –

12
26 Which circuit symbol represents a component used to measure electric current?
A B C D
A G V
27 The graph shows the current–voltage characteristic for a conductor.
current R
Q
P
0
0 voltage
Where on the graph can Ohm’s law be applied to the conductor?
A at Q only
B between P and Q
C between P and R
D between Q and R
1.0 Ω X 2.0 Ω Y
P
V
A 3.0 V B 6.0 V C 12 V D 18 V
© UCLES 2021 0625/22/O/N/21

13
29 There is a current I in a resistor. The potential difference (p.d.) across the resistor is V.
Which other physical quantity is needed to be able to determine the energy transferred W by the
resistor?
A the electromotive force (e.m.f.) E of the source

B the power P dissipated
C the resistance R of the resistor
D the time t for which there is a current in the resistor
A B
C D
31 Several cells are connected in series, as shown.
What is the combined electromotive force (e.m.f.) of the cells?
A the average of the e.m.f.s of the separate cells

B the e.m.f. of one of the cells
C the product of the e.m.f.s of the cells
D the sum of the e.m.f.s of the cells

14
R1
R2

B equal to R1
C equal to R2
33 The diagram shows a motor connected to an a.c. supply. The circuit is incomplete.
X Y
M
Which device needs to be connected between point X and point Y to prevent the wires from
overheating if a fault in the motor causes the current to get too high?
A an ammeter
B a fuse
C a transformer
D a length of thick copper wire
© UCLES 2021 0625/22/O/N/21

15
34 The diagram shows a wire between two magnets. An electromotive force (e.m.f.) is induced in the
wire when it is moved up between the two magnets.
N S
Four tests are done.
1 The direction of movement of the wire is reversed.

2 The direction of the magnetic field is reversed.
3 The wire is moved more quickly.
4 The magnetic field strength is decreased.
Which tests will induce a smaller e.m.f. in the wire?
A 1 and 2 B 1 and 3 C 3 and 4 D 4 only
35 Four positions of a current-carrying coil in a magnetic field, as in a d.c. motor, are shown.
In diagrams 2 and 4, the coil is at an angle of 45 to the field lines.
1 2 3 4
N S N S N S N S
coil
turning effect of the forces turning effect of the forces

in positions 1 and 3 in positions 2 and 4
A different different
B different same
C same different
D same same

16
36 The diagram shows the magnetic field due to a current in a solenoid.
direction of current
The direction of the current is reversed.
Which row describes the effect that this has on the magnitude and on the direction of the
magnetic field?
magnitude of direction of
magnetic field magnetic field
A increases changes
B increases unchanged
C unchanged changes
an -particle.
decays?

remaining remaining
A 142 93
B 142 95
C 144 93
D 144 95
38 A sample of americium decays and changes into neptunium. The half-life of americium is
432 years.
Which fraction of the americium will remain after 1728 years?
A 0 B 1 C 1 D 1
16 8 4
© UCLES 2021 0625/22/O/N/21

17
39 The graph shows the decay curves of four different radioactive isotopes.
Which isotope has the largest half-life?
A
count rate
B
D
0
0 time
40 The diagrams show -particles and -particles passing through an electric field.
Which diagram shows the correct paths of the -particles and -particles?
A B
+ + + + + + + + + + + +

– – – – – – – – – – – –
C D
+ + + + + + + + + + + +

– – – – – – – – – – – –
© UCLES 2021 0625/22/O/N/21

CAIE IGCSE Physics
October/November
PUBLISHED 2021
1 C 29 D 1
2 D 30 D 1
3 B 31 D 1
4 C 32 A 1
5 A 33 B 1
6 B 34 D 1
7 C 35 B 1
8 D 36 C 1
9 A 37 C 1
10 A 38 B 1
11 C 39 A 1
12 C 40 B 1
13 D 1
14 C 1
15 D 1
16 B 1
17 C 1
18 C 1
19 B 1
20 C 1
21 B 1
22 A 1
23 C 1
24 B 1
25 A 1
26 A 1
27 B 1
28 D 1

Cambridge IGCSE™
PHYSICS 0625/23
45 minutes

*4199489879*

Soft clean eraser
INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION
IB21 11_0625_23/2RP

2
1 For which purpose is a micrometer screw gauge suitable?
A measuring the current in a coil that is known to be about 3  10–6 A
B measuring the diameter of a ball bearing that is known to be about 3  10–3 m
C measuring the mass of a grain of sand that is known to be about 3  10–3 g
D measuring the moment used to turn a screw that is known to be about 3  10–6 N m
2 The graph shows how the speed of a car varies with time at the start of a journey.
6
speed 5
m/s
4
3
2
1
0
0 1 2 3 4
time / s
Which distance–time graph represents the motion of the car over the same time period?
A B
12 12
10 10
distance / m distance / m
8 8
6 6
4 4
2 2
0 0
0 1 2 3 4 0 1 2 3 4
time / s time / s
C D
6 6
5 5
distance / m distance / m
4 4
3 3
2 2
1 1
0 0
0 1 2 3 4 0 1 2 3 4
time / s time / s
© UCLES 2021 0625/23/O/N/21

3
3 Which statement about mass and weight is correct?
A Mass is a property that causes change in motion.

B Mass is caused by a gravitational field acting on a weight.
C Weight is a property that resists change in motion.
D Weight is caused by a gravitational field acting on a mass.
A nylon 1.2 1.0

B cotton 1.5 1.0
C olive oil 1.8 2.0
D water 2.0 2.0
5 The diagram shows a uniform bar resting on two supports, P and Q.
0 10 50 60 100
cm
P Q
The weight of the bar is 4.0 N.
What is the force exerted on the bar by support P?
A 0.80 N B 2.0 N C 3.2 N D 4.0 N

4
7 A cricket ball has a mass of 0.16 kg. The ball travels at 30 m / s. The ball is hit by a bat with a force
of 10 800 N. After being hit, the ball moves off at 30 m / s in the opposite direction.
30 m / s
30 m / s
For how long was the ball in contact with the bat?
A 0.0004 s B 0.00089 s C 0.0044 s D 0.015 s
9 Which energy resource has the Sun as its only source of energy?
A geothermal B nuclear C oil D tidal
© UCLES 2021 0625/23/O/N/21

5
10 A man, attached to an elastic cord, jumps from a platform. He falls 60 m before starting to rise.
The length of the unextended cord is 30 m.
The diagrams show four successive stages in his fall.
In which position is elastic (strain) energy and kinetic energy present?
A B C D
30 m
45 m
60 m
11 The diagram shows three glass containers.
All three contain water filled to the same vertical height h.
P Q R
h h h
wooden block
supporting R
The base area of P is equal to the base area of R.
The base area of Q is larger than the other two.
Students are asked to compare the water pressure at the bottom of each container.
Student 1 says that the pressure at base R is more than the pressure at base P.
Student 2 says that the pressure at base Q is less than the pressure at base P.
Student 3 says that the pressures at all three bases are the same.
Which students are correct?
A none are correct B 1 only C 2 only D 3 only

6
13 The same mass of a gas is trapped in four identical cylinders by a piston that can move.
The diagrams show the samples of gas in different conditions of volume and temperature.
1 2 3 4
piston
20 °C 40 °C 40 °C 50 °C
Which list gives the pressure of the gas in order from lowest to highest?
A 1234
B 1324
C 4231
D 4321
A 2.0 J B 2000 J C 16 200 J D 16 200 000 J
© UCLES 2021 0625/23/O/N/21

7
15 A solid and a gas are each given the same increase in temperature. The gas is kept at a constant
pressure.
the one which

the reason
expands most
A the gas molecules in the gas each expand
more than the solid molecules
B the gas the molecules in the solid
are held strongly together
C the solid molecules in the solid each expand
more than the gas molecules
D the solid all the molecules in the gas are
separate from one another
handle of pan
base of pan


8
17 In the diagram, the mountaineer can hear the stream although he cannot see it. When he is
closer to the gully, he can both hear and see the stream. When he is further from the gully, he
can neither hear nor see the stream.
gully
mountaineer
stream
A As he approaches the gully edge, he hears first the short wavelength, higher frequencies and
then the long wavelength, lower frequencies.
B As he approaches the gully edge, the sound becomes louder.
C He hears the stream because some of the sound is diffracted.
D He hears the stream because some of the sound is reflected from the opposite wall of the
gully.
18 Which row correctly defines the frequency and the speed of a wave?
frequency speed
A number of waves distance travelled
per unit time
B number of waves time taken for one complete
wave to pass a point
C number of waves distance travelled
passing per unit time per unit time
D number of waves time taken for one complete
passing per unit time wave to pass a point
© UCLES 2021 0625/23/O/N/21

9
19 A ray of light travels from air into a glass block.
in air in glass
speed of ray va vg
wavelength of ray a g
frequency of ray fa fg
Three suggestions as to how the refractive index of glass n may be calculated are listed.
va a fa
1 n= 2 n= 3 n=
vg g fg
ray of
light
q
air p
glass

A p no
B p yes
C q no
D q yes

10
21 A photographer sees his image as shown.
photographer image
What could X be?
A B C D
mirror translucent transparent transparent

glass block glass prism semicircular
glass block
© UCLES 2021 0625/23/O/N/21

11


23 Which row gives the typical values of the speed of sound at room temperature in the materials
stated?
speed of sound
m/s
air water iron
A 340 1500 5100

B 340 5100 1500
C 5100 1500 340
D 3.0  108 3.0  108 3.0  108
25 A stationary, charged particle is in a field.
Which fields can cause there to be a force on this particle due to its charge?
1 gravitational field
2 magnetic field
3 electric field

12
26 An electric current in a copper wire is due to the flow of charge.
Which particles are moving along the wire?
A -particles
B copper nuclei
C electrons
D protons
27 Which row is correct?
direction of
definition of current I
conventional current
Q
A I= from positive terminal
t to negative terminal
Q
B I= from negative terminal
t to positive terminal
C I=Qt from positive terminal

to negative terminal
D I=Qt from negative terminal
to positive terminal
1.0 Ω X 2.0 Ω Y
P
V
A 3.0 V B 6.0 V C 12 V D 18 V
© UCLES 2021 0625/23/O/N/21

13
29 Which graph shows the current–voltage characteristic for a filament lamp?
A B C D
I I I I
0 0 0 0
0 V 0 V 0 V 0 V
A B
C D
31 Two 3.0  resistors and one 6.0  resistor are connected in series with a cell.
A The current in the cell is equal to the current in the resistors.

B The current in the cell is greater than the current in the resistors.
C The potential difference (p.d.) across each resistor is equal to the p.d. across the cell.
D The potential differences across each resistor are equal.

14
R1
R2

B equal to R1
C equal to R2
33 Circuit breakers and fuses are devices used to protect a circuit from overloading.
Which statement correctly describes the difference between a circuit breaker and a fuse?
A Circuit breakers can be reset if they operate but fuses need to be replaced.
B Circuit breakers need to be replaced if they operate but fuses can be reset.
C Circuit breakers can be used in an a.c. circuit but fuses cannot.
D Circuit breakers cannot be used in an a.c. circuit but fuses can.
34 Electrical energy is transferred by transmission lines at high voltage.
Which statement explains why a high voltage is used?
A The voltage is alternating.

B The transmission lines have a larger resistance.
C The transmission lines carry greater power.
D There is a smaller current in the transmission lines for the same power.
© UCLES 2021 0625/23/O/N/21

15
35 Which diagram shows the magnetic field around a straight, current-carrying wire?
A B
current current
C D
current current
36 The coil in a d.c. motor is connected to a split-ring commutator.
What is the purpose of the split-ring commutator?
A to ensure that the coil continues to rotate in the same direction

B to ensure that the size of the current in the coil remains constant
C to ensure that the size of the turning effect on the coil remains constant
D to ensure that the turning effect on the coil changes direction
an -particle.
decays?

remaining remaining
A 142 93
B 142 95
C 144 93
D 144 95

16
38 The half-life for lead-202 is 52 500 years.
A sample of lead-202 produces 800 counts / s.
How long will it take for the count rate to drop to 100 counts / s?
A 105 000 years B 157 500 years C 210 000 years D 420 000 years
39 Oxygen-15 is used in hospitals.
The count rate from a detector placed close to a sample of oxygen-15 was recorded over a
period of 15 min. The background count rate is 20 counts / min.
200
180
count rate
counts / min
160
140
120
100
80
60
40
20
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
time / min
What is the half-life of this sample of oxygen-15?
A 2.0 min B 2.4 min C 2.8 min D 7.5 min
40 Of the three types of ionising radiation, ,  and , why does -emission cause the most
ionisation?
A -particles have the smallest mass.
B -particles have the greatest mass.
C -particles move with the greatest speed.
D -particles travel the greatest distance in matter.
© UCLES 2021 0625/23/O/N/21

CAIE IGCSE Physics
October/November
PUBLISHED 2021
1 B 29 D 1
2 A 30 D 1
3 D 31 A 1
4 C 32 A 1
5 A 33 A 1
6 B 34 D 1
7 B 35 A 1
8 D 36 A 1
9 C 37 C 1
10 C 38 B 1
11 D 39 A 1
12 C 40 B 1
13 B 1
14 C 1
15 B 1
16 B 1
17 A 1
18 C 1
19 B 1
20 C 1
21 A 1
22 A 1
23 A 1
24 B 1
25 D 1
26 C 1
27 A 1
28 D 1

Cambridge IGCSE™
PHYSICS 0625/22
45 minutes

*0532883419*

Soft clean eraser
INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION
IB22 03_0625_22/3RP

2
1 A student investigates a pendulum.
He measures the time for the pendulum to complete 20 oscillations.
He repeats the experiment three more times.
The readings are shown.
time for
experiment
20 oscillations / s
1 17.6
2 19.8
3 17.6
4 18.6
What is the average period of the pendulum?
A 0.88 s B 0.92 s C 17.6 s D 18.4 s
2 A tennis ball falls from the upstairs window of a house.
What can be said about the acceleration of the ball if air resistance is ignored?
A It depends on the density of the ball.

B It depends on the mass of the ball.
C It increases as the ball falls.
D It stays the same as the ball falls.
3 A car joins a road at a speed of 14 m / s and accelerates at 4.0 m / s2 for 5.0 seconds.
What is the final speed of the car?
A 18 m / s B 20 m / s C 32 m / s D 34 m / s
© UCLES 2022 0625/22/F/M/22

3
4 The gravitational field strength is 8.8 N / kg on Venus and 3.8 N / kg on Mars.
An object has a weight of 42 N on Venus.
What are the mass and the weight of the object on Mars?
A 4.8 18
B 4.8 42
C 11 42
D 11 97
5 A student carries out an experiment to find the density of a rock.
measuring
cylinder
liquid
rock
200 g balance 264 g
Which two measurements does the student need to make to determine the density of the rock?
measurement 1 measurement 2
A increase in mass increase in volume of liquid

B final mass increase in depth of liquid
C increase in mass increase in depth of liquid
D final mass increase in volume of liquid
6 A car has a mass of 1500 kg. A constant resultant force acts on the car and the car accelerates
from 15 m / s to 20 m / s in 4.0 seconds.
What is the magnitude of the resultant force acting on the car?
A 300 N B 1200 N C 1900 N D 7500 N

4
7 A metal wire is loaded up to the limit of proportionality.
A Hooke’s law is not obeyed when the load is increased from zero to this point.
B When the load is increased beyond the limit of proportionality, the diameter of the wire will
increase.
C When the load is removed, the wire returns to its original length.
D Up to the limit of proportionality, there is no change in the shape of the wire.
8 The diagram shows a uniform metre rule, MN, pivoted at its midpoint P.
M P N
W1 W2
Two weights, W1 and W2, are hung either side of the pivot.
The rule remains balanced.
direction of resultant direction of resultant

moment about point M force on the rule
A clockwise downwards
B clockwise zero
C zero downwards
D zero zero
9 Which physical quantity is a vector?
A mass
B density
C temperature
D velocity
10 A resultant force of 500 N acts for 10 s on a car of mass 1000 kg. This causes the velocity of the
car to double.
What is the final velocity of the car?
A 5m/s B 10 m / s C 20 m / s D 50 m / s
© UCLES 2022 0625/22/F/M/22

5
11 A child pushes a toy car along a horizontal surface and then releases it.
As the car slows down, what is the main energy transfer?
A from chemical to thermal

B from chemical to kinetic
C from kinetic to gravitational (potential)
D from kinetic to thermal
12 At time = 0, a cannonball is stationary inside a cannon. The cannonball is then fired from the
cannon.
At time = t, the cannonball moves forwards and the cannon moves backwards.
What happens to the total kinetic energy and the total momentum of the cannon and the
cannonball between time = 0 and time = t ?
total kinetic energy of total momentum of

cannon and cannonball cannon and cannonball
A changes changes
B changes remains the same
C remains the same changes
D remains the same remains the same
13 In a small hydroelectric power scheme, 800 kg of water drops through a vertical height of 2.2 m
every second. The electrical output is 10.6 kW.
What is the efficiency of the scheme?
A 0.60% B 17% C 60% D 75%
14 An object is at rest on a horizontal surface.
Which equation is used to calculate the pressure that the object exerts?
mass of the object
A
area of contact
weight of the object
B
area of contact
C mass of the object  area of contact
D weight of the object  area of contact

6
15 Smoke particles, illuminated by a bright lamp, are seen through a microscope. They move about
randomly.
What causes this motion?
A attraction between the smoke particles and the molecules of the air
B collisions between the smoke particles and the molecules of the air
C evaporation of the faster-moving smoke particles
D warming of the smoke particles by the lamp
16 Ether is a liquid that evaporates easily at room temperature.
The rate at which ether evaporates can be increased by bubbling air through it.
The diagram shows this process.
air
air bubbles
ether
Students give three suggestions why the rate of evaporation increases when air is bubbled
through.
Student 1 suggests that the temperature of the ether is decreased.

Student 2 suggests that the surface area of the ether is increased.
Student 3 suggests that evaporated molecules are removed at a greater rate.
Which students are correct?
© UCLES 2022 0625/22/F/M/22

7
17 Some ice is slowly heated and its temperature is measured. A graph is plotted of temperature
against time.
100
temperature / qC
X
0
–10 time
Which row describes what happens to the thermal energy and to the temperature in section X?
thermal energy temperature of ice
A gained by ice rises

B gained by ice stays the same
C not gained by ice rises
D not gained by ice stays the same
18 The diagram shows the apparatus needed for an experiment to determine the specific heat
capacity of the material from which an object is made.
thermometer
A
heater
object
V stop-clock
balance
Which piece of apparatus could be omitted if the purpose of the experiment is to determine the
thermal capacity of the object?
A ammeter
B balance
C stop-clock
D thermometer

8
19 Both boiling and evaporation involve a change of state from liquid to gas.
Which row gives the correct difference between boiling and evaporation?
boiling evaporation
A no bubbles are formed bubbles are formed

B occurs at all temperatures occurs at a definite temperature
C occurs throughout the liquid occurs at the surface only
D the temperature falls the temperature remains constant
20 Which statement describes thermal conduction in a metal by electrons?
A Atoms and electrons move freely throughout the metal.

B Atoms and electrons vibrate about their fixed positions only.
C Electrons move freely throughout the metal.
D Electrons remain attached to atoms.
21 A tank contains water. Ripples are produced on the surface of the water. Refraction is observed.
What causes the ripples to refract?
A The cold water in the tank is replaced by warm water.

B The ripples change speed as they move from deep to shallow water.
C The ripples hit the wall of the tank.
D The ripples pass through a narrow gap.
22 The diagram shows wavefronts of a water wave passing through a gap in a barrier.
barrier
Which change will increase the diffraction of the wave as it passes through the gap?
A Increase the amplitude of the wave.

B Increase the width of the gap.
C Reduce the depth of water.
D Reduce the frequency of the wave.
© UCLES 2022 0625/22/F/M/22

9
23 The diagrams each show a ray of light from an object O passing through a thin converging lens.
The principal focuses in each diagram are labelled F.
1 2
O O
F F F F
F F
Which diagrams are correct?
24 The diagram shows a ray of light inside an optical fibre approaching point X.
normal to the
surface at X tangent to the
surface at X
X
P Q
The light is totally reflected within the fibre.
The refractive index of the material of the optical fibre is 1.39.
Which condition ensures that total internal reflection occurs?
A Q < 45 B Q > 47 C P > 47 D P=Q

10
A Infrared radiation from the Sun disappears before visible light and ultraviolet radiation.
B Ultraviolet radiation from the Sun disappears before visible light and infrared radiation.
C Visible light from the Sun disappears before ultraviolet radiation and infrared radiation.
D Infrared radiation, ultraviolet radiation and visible light from the Sun all disappear at the same
moment.
26 The diagram shows air particles in a sound wave.
V W X Y Z
Which row correctly identifies the position of a compression and position of a rarefaction?
compression rarefaction
A X Y
B Y X
C V Z
D Z V
27 Two isolated metal spheres are both negatively charged. The spheres are brought close together
but do not touch.
Which diagram shows the charge distribution on the spheres?
A B C D
– – – – – – – –
– – – – – – – –
– – – – – – – –
28 Two separate circuits have different power supplies. Both power supplies provide the same
magnitude current.
Power supply P has an electromotive force (e.m.f.) of 1.5 V and power supply Q has an e.m.f. of
3.0 V.
Which statements about Q are correct when compared with P?
1 Q supplies twice the charge per unit time.

2 Q supplies twice the energy per unit charge.
3 Q supplies twice the energy per unit time.
© UCLES 2022 0625/22/F/M/22

11
29 The diagram shows a piece of metal resistance wire.
Which wire, made of the same metal, has a smaller resistance?
A a wire of the same length with a larger diameter

B a wire of the same length with a smaller diameter
C a wire of greater length with the same diameter
D a wire of greater length with a smaller diameter
30 Which labelled component in the circuit shown controls the brightness of lamp X?
A
V
X B
31 A circuit includes a battery, two identical resistors and five ammeters, P, Q, R, S and T.
P Q
A A
R
A
S T
A A
Which statement about the readings on the ammeters is not correct?
A P has a greater reading than Q.

B P has a greater reading than R.
C P has a greater reading than S.
D P has a greater reading than T.

12
32 An electrician sets up a potential divider circuit in a fridge so that when the fridge door is open
and light from the room enters the fridge, a warning light turns on.
Which component does the electrician need to use in addition to a variable resistor?
A light-dependent resistor
B relay
C thermistor
D variable resistor
33 Two NAND gates are joined together as shown.
input 1
output
input 2
© UCLES 2022 0625/22/F/M/22

13
34 The diagram shows an electric drill and safety guard.
safety guard in electric motor

closed position
drill
The drill requires the logic circuit shown.
starting switch
on 1
A
off 0
motor on 1
motor
motor off 0
safety guard
open 0
B
closed 1
alarm on 1
? alarm
alarm off 0
The circuit must only allow the motor to start when the safety guard is closed. If the safety guard
is not closed when the starting switch is on, the alarm must sound.
Which logic gate is missing from the circuit?
A NOT B NAND C AND D NOR
35 Two magnets are placed near a current-carrying coil.
The diagram shows this experimental arrangement and the current direction in the coil.
X Y
N S N S
A Both X and Y are attracted to the coil.

B Both X and Y are repelled by the coil.
C X is attracted to the coil and Y is repelled.
D X is repelled by the coil and Y is attracted.

14
36 Two circuits are set up as shown. The iron rods are placed close together and are able to move.
iron rod iron rod

X
What happens to the size of the gap at X when switch S is closed?
A It decreases.
B It decreases then increases.
C It increases.
D It does not change.
37 When a current-carrying conductor is placed in a magnetic field, it experiences a force.
Which statement about this force is correct?
A It is parallel to both the magnetic field and the direction of the current.
B It is parallel to the magnetic field and perpendicular to the direction of the current.
C It is perpendicular to the magnetic field and parallel to the direction of the current.
D It is perpendicular to both the magnetic field and the direction of the current.
© UCLES 2022 0625/22/F/M/22

15
38 When a beam of -particles is incident on a thin metal foil, most of them follow a path
represented by path X in the diagram. A small number of -particles follow a path represented by
path Y in the diagram.
foil
Which row correctly describes a conclusion that can be drawn from each of these observations
about the structure of the atom?
most follow path X some follow path Y
A atom is mostly empty space atom contains something that repels -particles
B atom is mostly empty space nucleus contains protons and neutrons
C atom is neutral atom contains something that repels -particles
D atom is neutral nucleus contains protons and neutrons
39 Nuclear fusion is a reaction that takes place in stars.
Which row describes this reaction?
action of atomic nuclei energy

A an atomic nucleus splits into absorbed
B an atomic nucleus splits into released
C atomic nuclei join together absorbed
D atomic nuclei join together released

16
40 When a radioactive isotope is set up close to a counter, a count rate of 38 000 counts / s is
obtained. The table shows the count rate from the isotope over a three-year period.
count rate
time / years
counts / s
0 38 000
1 26 000
2 17 000
3 12 000
A less than 1 year

B more than 1 year but less than 2 years
C more than 2 years but less than 3 years
D more than 3 years
Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of Cambridge Assessment. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of Cambridge
Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2022 0625/22/F/M/22

CAIE IGCSE Physics
February/March 2
2022
PUBLISHED
1 B 1
2 D 1
3 D 1
4 A 1
5 A 1
6 C 1
7 C 1
8 D 1
9 D 1
10 B 1
11 D 1
12 B 1
13 C 1
14 B 1
15 B 1
16 C 1
17 B 1
18 B 1
19 C 1
20 C 1
21 B 1
22 D 1
23 C 1
24 B 1
25 D 1
26 A 1
27 D 1
28 D 1

CAIE IGCSE Physics
February/March 2
2022
PUBLISHED
29 A 1
30 B 1
31 A 1
32 A 1
33 A 1
34 C 1
35 B 1
36 C 1
37 D 1
38 A 1
39 D 1
40 B 1

Cambridge IGCSE™
PHYSICS 0625/21
45 minutes

*8167223842*

Soft clean eraser
INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION
IB22 06_0625_21/3RP

2
1 Which measuring devices are most suitable for determining the length of a swimming pool and
the thickness of aluminium foil?
length of a swimming pool thickness of aluminium foil
A ruler measuring cylinder

B tape measure micrometer screw gauge
C tape measure ruler
D ruler micrometer screw gauge
2 A man stands next to a railway track.
A train travelling at 40 m / s takes 2.0 s to pass the man.
What is the length of the train?
A 20 m B 38 m C 40 m D 80 m
3 A speed–time graph is used to describe the motion of an object.
Which quantities are calculated from the gradient of the graph and from the area under the
graph?
gradient of the graph area under the graph
A acceleration distance travelled

B acceleration total journey time
C distance travelled acceleration
D total journey time distance travelled
4 On the Moon, all objects fall with the same acceleration.
A On the Moon, all objects have the same weight.

B The Moon has a smaller gravitational field strength than the Earth.
C The weight of an object is directly proportional to its mass.
D The weight of an object is inversely proportional to its mass.
© UCLES 2022 0625/21/M/J/22

3
cm3
50
40
30
20
10
balance
6 An object on the end of a string moves in a clockwise circular path at constant speed. The
diagram shows the object as viewed from above.
What is the direction of the resultant force on the object when it is in the position shown?
string
A
B object
D
C

4
40 cm beam
X
pivot
6.0 N
The beam weighs 6.0 N and its weight acts at a point X 40 cm from the pivot.
A vertically downwards at 20 cm to the left of X

B vertically downwards at 20 cm to the right of X
C vertically upwards at 20 cm to the left of X
D vertically upwards at 20 cm to the right of X
8 On the diagram shown, what is the magnitude of the resultant force of the two vectors?
scale
2.0 N
6.0 N
8.0 N
A 2.0 N B 7.0 N C 10 N D 14 N
9 Three situations are listed.
1 An object has a resultant force acting on it.

2 A moving object experiences an impulse.
3 An object is decelerating.
In which situations is the momentum of the object changing?
© UCLES 2022 0625/21/M/J/22

5
0.50 m / s.
A 0.0 m / s B 0.19 m / s C 0.31 m / s D 0.50 m / s
11 A mass hangs vertically from a spring.
The mass is raised to a point P and is then released.
The mass oscillates repeatedly between point P and a lower point Q.
Which energies alternately increase and decrease throughout the oscillations?
A gravitational potential energy, kinetic energy and elastic energy

B gravitational potential energy and kinetic energy only
C gravitational potential energy, kinetic energy and internal energy
D internal energy and elastic energy
12 A car has 620 kJ of kinetic energy. The car brakes and stops in a distance of 91 m.
What is the average braking force acting on the car?
A 0.15 N B 6.8 N C 6800 N D 56 000 N
13 The diagram shows a deep reservoir formed by a dam.
water
dam
X
On what does the pressure at X depend?
A the depth of the water at X

B the length of the reservoir
C the surface area of the water
D the thickness of the dam wall

6
14 A sealed rigid container has a fixed volume. The container is filled with air.
The container is placed in a freezer cabinet and the temperature of the air in the container
decreases.
Which row correctly describes what happens to the air in the container?
average distance average speed

between air particles of air particles
B decreases decreases
C no change increases
D no change decreases
15 Two open containers are filled with water at room temperature. The containers have different
shapes.
container 1 container 2
From which container does the water evaporate at the greater rate and how can the rate of
evaporation be increased?
container with the greater how the rate of

rate of evaporation evaporation can be increased
A 1 decrease the water temperature

B 1 increase the water temperature
C 2 decrease the water temperature
D 2 increase the water temperature
© UCLES 2022 0625/21/M/J/22

7
°C
–10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110
A student wishes to check the marking of the upper fixed point on this thermometer.
What should she do?
A Put the bulb in a beaker of boiling sea water.

B Put the bulb in a beaker of boiling pure water.
C Put the bulb in a beaker of ice and salt.
D Put the bulb in a beaker of pure melting ice.
17 Water in a beaker gains thermal energy at a rate of 3000 W. The water is at its boiling point.
The specific latent heat of vaporisation of water is 2260 J / g.
How long does it take for 250 g of the water to vaporise?
A 12 s B 188 s C 332 s D 750 s
18 A glass contains an iced drink on a warm and humid day. Water starts to form on the outside of
the glass.
What is the name of the effect by which the water forms?
A condensation
B conduction
C convection
D evaporation

8
bar?

20 The diagram shows a convection current caused by a piece of ice placed in a beaker of water at
room temperature.
ice
Which row correctly compares the temperatures and densities at water points P and Q?
temperature at P density at P
A higher than at Q higher than at Q

B higher than at Q lower than at Q
C lower than at Q higher than at Q
D lower than at Q lower than at Q
© UCLES 2022 0625/21/M/J/22

9
2.0
displacement / cm
1.0
0
0 4.0 8.0 12.0 16.0 20.0 24.0 28.0
–1.0 distance / cm
–2.0
A 1.0 4.0
B 1.0 8.0
C 2.0 4.0
D 2.0 8.0
22 A sound wave is created by a loudspeaker that vibrates backwards and forwards 96 000 times
per minute.
The speed of sound is 320 m / s.
What is the wavelength of the sound wave?
A 0.20 m B 5.0 m C 300 m D 18 000 m

10
23 A card is placed in front of a plane mirror so that its label is facing the mirror, as shown.
plane mirror
label
card
observer
The label is shown.
How does the image of the label formed by the mirror appear to the observer?
A B C D
24 A thin converging lens can produce both real and virtual images.
Which row describes a real and a virtual image?
real image virtual image
A rays converge to form the image image can be projected onto a screen
B rays converge to form the image image cannot be projected onto a screen
C rays diverge to form the image image can be projected onto a screen
D rays diverge to form the image image cannot be projected onto a screen
25 The speed of light in air is 3.0  108 m / s.
The critical angle for light in a transparent plastic material placed in air is 37.
What is the speed of light in the plastic material?
A 1.8  108 m / s
B 2.4  108 m / s
C 3.8  108 m / s
D 5.0  108 m / s
© UCLES 2022 0625/21/M/J/22

11
26 Which part of the electromagnetic spectrum is used by a remote controller for a television?
A infrared waves
B microwaves
C radio waves
D visible light
27 Which statement correctly compares radio waves and X-rays?
A Radio waves have a longer wavelength and a greater speed in a vacuum.

B Radio waves have a longer wavelength and the same speed in a vacuum.
C Radio waves have a shorter wavelength and a greater speed in a vacuum.
D Radio waves have a shorter wavelength and the same speed in a vacuum.
28 A student counts how many iron pins an electromagnet picks up when its power supply is
switched on. Then, she counts how many pins are picked up when the power supply is switched
off.
core
d.c. power d.c. power

supply on supply off
iron pins
She repeats the experiment using cores made of different materials. The results are shown.
Which core is made out of soft iron?
pins picked up with pins picked up with

the power supply on the power supply off
A 0 0
B 2 7
C 8 5
D 12 0

12
29 A plastic rod is brought near to a small plastic sphere suspended from a stand. The sphere is
repelled by the rod.
Why is this?
A The rod and the sphere have like charges.

B The rod and the sphere have unlike charges.
C The rod is charged and the sphere is uncharged.
D The rod is uncharged and the sphere is charged.
30 Which unit is equivalent to a volt (V)?
A A /  B J/C C J/s D W/C
31 A resistor converts 360 J of energy when there is a current of 3.0 A in it. The potential difference
across the resistor is 6.0 V.
For how long is there this current in the resistor?
A 0.05 s B 20 s C 180 s D 720 s
© UCLES 2022 0625/21/M/J/22

13
32 The four circuits shown each contain four diodes.
In which circuit is the direction of the current in the resistor always from the red terminal to the
black terminal?
A B
12 V 12 V
red black red black

terminal terminal terminal terminal
C D
12 V 12 V
red black red black


14
33 The diagram shows a circuit of six identical lamps connected to a battery.
S
Q
P T
R
U
Which lamps are brightest?
A P only
B Q and R only
C S, T and U only
D P, Q, R, S, T and U are equally bright
34 A digital circuit is made of two logic gates.
W Y
Z
X
Which row is correct for this digital circuit?
W X Y Z
A 0 0 1 0
B 0 1 0 1
C 1 0 1 0
D 1 1 0 1
© UCLES 2022 0625/21/M/J/22

15
35 A magnet is dropped vertically through a solenoid. This induces magnetic poles at both ends of
the solenoid.
X X
S
S
N
diagram 1 diagram 2 diagram 3
Which magnetic poles are induced at position X in diagram 1 and diagram 3?
diagram 1 diagram 3
A N pole N pole
B N pole S pole
C S pole N pole
D S pole S pole
36 Which transformer can change a 240 V a.c. input into a 15 V a.c. output?
A B
800 turns 40 turns 1000 turns 25 turns
C D

16
37 What is the purpose of the split-ring commutator in an electric motor?
A to ensure that the magnetic field in the motor changes direction every half rotation
B to ensure that the magnetic field in the motor stays in the same direction at all times
C to ensure that the turning effect on the motor changes direction every half rotation
D to ensure that the turning effect on the motor stays in the same direction at all times
38 How do the sizes of the two nuclei produced in a nuclear fission reaction compare to the size of
the original nucleus?
A both larger than the original nucleus

B one larger and one smaller than the original nucleus
C both smaller than the original nucleus
D one smaller and one the same size as the original nucleus
39 Which statement about the radioactive decay of a substance is correct?
A It cannot be predicted when a particular nucleus will decay.

B Placing a radioactive substance inside a lead-lined box prevents it from decaying.
C The decay always produces poisonous gases.
D The rate of decay increases if the substance is dissolved in water.
40 The diagram shows a stream of -particles travelling in a line that passes between the poles of a
magnet.
-particles
In which direction will the -particles be deflected by the magnet?
A towards the N pole

B towards the S pole
C into the page
D out of the page
© UCLES 2022 0625/21/M/J/22

CAIE IGCSE Physics
May/June 2
2022
PUBLISHED
1 B 1
2 D 1
3 A 1
4 C 1
5 C 1
6 A 1
7 D 1
8 C 1
9 D 1
10 B 1
11 A 1
12 C 1
13 A 1
14 D 1
15 B 1
16 B 1
17 B 1
18 A 1
19 B 1
20 C 1
21 B 1
22 A 1
23 C 1
24 B 1
25 A 1
26 A 1
27 B 1
28 D 1

CAIE IGCSE Physics
May/June 2
2022
PUBLISHED
29 A 1
30 B 1
31 B 1
32 A 1
33 A 1
34 C 1
35 C 1
36 D 1
37 D 1
38 C 1
39 A 1
40 D 1

Cambridge IGCSE™
PHYSICS 0625/22
45 minutes

*2216825848*

Soft clean eraser
INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION
• Each correct answer will score one mark.
IB22 06_0625_22/3RP

2
1 Very small values of which quantity are measured using a micrometer screw gauge?
A time
B pressure
C moment
D distance
A 20 m B 38 m C 40 m D 80 m
3 Which quantity is equal to acceleration?
A area under a distance–time graph

B area under a speed–time graph
C gradient of a distance–time graph
D gradient of a speed–time graph

© UCLES 2022 0625/22/M/J/22

3
cm3
50
40
30
20
10
balance
6 An object moves at constant speed around a circular path.
A A resultant force acts on the object outwards from the centre of the circle.
B A resultant force acts on the object in the direction it is travelling.
C A resultant force acts on the object towards the centre of the circle.
D There is no resultant force acting on the object because it is moving at constant speed.

4
40 cm beam
X
pivot
6.0 N

8 The diagram shows two forces acting at right angles to each other.
scale
1.0 N
3.0 N
4.0 N
What is the resultant of the two forces?
A 1.0 N B 5.0 N C 7.0 N D 12.0 N
9 Which statement describes the impulse acting on an object?
A Impulse is the change in kinetic energy of the object.

B Impulse is the change in momentum of the object.
C Impulse is the rate of change of force acting on the object.
D Impulse is the rate of change of momentum of the object.
© UCLES 2022 0625/22/M/J/22

5
0.50 m / s.
A 0.0 m / s B 0.19 m / s C 0.31 m / s D 0.50 m / s
11 A tennis ball is dropped from position 1. It falls vertically onto a hard surface at position 2.
tennis ball
position 1
position 2
Which energy changes have taken place between position 1 and position 2?
A gravitational potential → kinetic → chemical
B gravitational potential → kinetic → elastic (strain)
C kinetic → gravitational potential → chemical
D kinetic → gravitational potential → elastic (strain)
12 A boy holds onto a bar and pulls himself up until his chin is level with the bar.
He raises himself through 40 cm in 0.5 s.
The weight of the boy is 500 N.
What is the average power he produces as he raises himself?
A 40 W B 400 W C 4000 W D 40 000 W

6
water
dam
X

14 The conditions of a sample of gas change in two stages.
stage 1 increase of temperature at constant volume

stage 2 increase of volume with no further change of temperature
Which row about the pressure after each stage is correct?
stage 1 stage 2
pressure compared pressure compared to
to original pressure pressure after stage 1
15 Small pollen particles are suspended in water.
When viewed with a microscope, the pollen particles can be seen to be moving about irregularly.
What causes this movement?
A The pollen particles are being bombarded by the heavier particles of the water.
B The pollen particles are being bombarded by the lighter particles of the water.
C The temperature of the water is higher than that of the pollen particles.
D The temperature of the water is lower than that of the pollen particles.
© UCLES 2022 0625/22/M/J/22

7
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Which physical property of the thermometer is used to measure temperature?
A expansion of glass
B expansion of liquid
C mass of glass
D mass of liquid
17 A block of lead of mass 500 g is at its melting point.
The specific latent heat of fusion of lead = 23 kJ / kg.
How much energy is required to completely melt the block?
A 46 J B 12 000 J C 46 000 J D 12 000 000 J
the glass.
A condensation
B conduction
C convection
D evaporation

8
bar?

20 Four cubic copper containers are filled with water. The surfaces of all the containers are painted
black.
Two of the containers have sides of length 20 cm and the other two containers have sides of
length 40 cm.
Two of the containers contain water at 80 °C and the other two contain water at 30 °C.
Which container radiates energy at the lowest rate?
A B C D
30 qC 80 qC
30 qC 80 qC
© UCLES 2022 0625/22/M/J/22

9
2.0
displacement / cm
1.0
0
0 4.0 8.0 12.0 16.0 20.0 24.0 28.0
–2.0
A 1.0 4.0
B 1.0 8.0
C 2.0 4.0
D 2.0 8.0
22 The water wave shown has a frequency of 4.0 Hz.
36 cm
3.0 cm
What is the speed of the wave?
A 3.0 cm / s B 12 cm / s C 48 cm / s D 72 cm / s

10
23 A student uses one eye to look at images in a plane mirror.
plane mirror
P Q R E S T U
X Y
Objects are placed on the line XY.
Which objects give rise to images that can be seen by the eye at E?
A P, Q, R, S, T and U
B Q, R, S and T only
C P and U only
D R and S only
24 An object is placed in front of a converging lens of focal length 15 cm.
Which row describes the image of the object?
distance of object
nature of the image
from lens / cm
A 40 real, upright, diminished

B 30 virtual, inverted, enlarged
C 20 real, inverted, diminished
D 10 virtual, upright, enlarged
25 The speed of light in air is 3.0 × 108 m / s.
The critical angle for light in a transparent plastic material placed in air is 37°.
A 1.8 × 108 m / s
B 2.4 × 108 m / s
C 3.8 × 108 m / s
D 5.0 × 108 m / s
© UCLES 2022 0625/22/M/J/22

11
26 Which type of waves are produced by a television remote controller?
A infrared waves
B radio waves
C ultraviolet waves
D visible light


12
28 The diagram shows the magnetic fields around three objects, P, Q and R, placed close to each
other.
P Q R
Which row shows the nature of each of the objects?
P Q R
permanent magnet permanent magnet

A copper rod
N S N S

B copper rod
N S S N

C iron rod
N S N S

D iron rod
N S S N
© UCLES 2022 0625/22/M/J/22

13
29 A negatively charged rod is brought near to an uncharged metal sphere that is placed on an
insulating stand.
metal sphere
–
–
–
–
–
–
insulating stand
Which diagram shows the distribution of charges on the sphere?
A B C D
+ – – + + –
+ – – + + –
+ – – + + –
+ – – + + –
+ – – + + –
30 A resistor has a potential difference (p.d.) of 12 V across it and a current of 0.60 A in it.
What is the resistance of the resistor?
A 0.050 Ω B 2.0 Ω C 7.2 Ω D 20 Ω
31 There is a current I in a resistor of resistance R for a time t. The potential difference (p.d.) across
the resistor is V.
Which equation gives the power P dissipated in the resistor?
A P = IR B P = It C P = IV D P = IV
t

14
black terminal?
A B
12 V 12 V
red black red black

C D
12 V 12 V
red black red black

© UCLES 2022 0625/22/M/J/22

15
33 The diagram shows a battery connected to a potential divider and to two lamps, P and Q.
X Y
The slider on the potential divider is moved from end X to end Y of the resistor.
Which row shows the effect on the brightness of each lamp?
brightness of P brightness of Q
A brighter brighter
B brighter dimmer
C unchanged brighter
D unchanged dimmer
34 What is the truth table for the logic gate shown by the symbol?
X
OUT
Y
A B C D
X Y OUT X Y OUT X Y OUT X Y OUT
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1
0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1
1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 0

16
35 A coil XY is wound around a cardboard tube.
When the S pole of a magnet is pushed into the coil XY, the galvanometer deflects to the left.
X Y
cardboard tube
N S
S pole
moves in
What other movement of the magnet will produce a deflection to the left?
A B
X Y X Y
N S N S
S pole N pole
moves out moves out
C D
X Y X Y
S N S N
N pole S pole
moves in moves out
© UCLES 2022 0625/22/M/J/22

17
A B
C D
37 The diagram shows a current-carrying wire in a magnetic field.
current
LEFT
N S RIGHT
In which direction is the force acting on the wire?

B to the left
C to the right

18
38 A scientist was asked to separate the following equations into two categories: nuclear fission and
nuclear fusion.
239 112 124

1 94 Pu → 46 Pd + 48 Cd + 3 01 n
3 3 4 1 1
2 2 He + 2 He → 2 He + 1H + 1H
14 1 15
3 7N + 1H → 8O
235 90 143
4 92 U → 36 Kr + 56 Ba + 201 n
Which equations show nuclear fission?
39 Which radioactive source is used in a smoke alarm system and what is the reason for this?
source reason
A α causes least ionisation of air

B α causes most ionisation of air
C γ causes least ionisation of air
D γ causes most ionisation of air
40 A beam of α-particles and β-particles is incident at right angles to an electric field.
Which statement about the deflection of the particles in the field is correct?
A α-particles deflect, but β-particles do not deflect.
B α-particles deflect in the opposite direction to β-particles.
C β-particles deflect, but α-particles do not deflect.
D Both α-particles and β-particles deflect in the same direction.
© UCLES 2022 0625/22/M/J/22

CAIE IGCSE Physics
May/June 2
2022
PUBLISHED
1 D 1
2 D 1
3 D 1
4 C 1
5 C 1
6 C 1
7 D 1
8 B 1
9 B 1
10 B 1
11 B 1
12 B 1
13 A 1
14 C 1
15 B 1
16 B 1
17 B 1
18 A 1
19 B 1
20 A 1
21 B 1
22 C 1
23 B 1
24 D 1
25 A 1
26 A 1
27 B 1
28 B 1

CAIE IGCSE Physics
May/June 2
2022
PUBLISHED
29 B 1
30 D 1
31 C 1
32 A 1
33 C 1
34 D 1
35 D 1
36 D 1
37 A 1
38 C 1
39 B 1
40 B 1

Cambridge IGCSE™
PHYSICS 0625/23
45 minutes

*1271175254*

Soft clean eraser
INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION
IB22 06_0625_23/3RP

2
1 What is a micrometer screw gauge used to measure?
A very small currents

B very small distances
C very small forces
D very small pressures
A 20 m B 38 m C 40 m D 80 m
3 A skydiver jumps from an aeroplane and falls towards the Earth.
Which statement is correct when the skydiver has reached terminal velocity?
A The skydiver’s speed is decreasing.

B The skydiver’s speed is increasing.
C The skydiver is moving with constant speed.
D The skydiver’s speed is zero.

© UCLES 2022 0625/23/M/J/22

3
cm3
50
40
30
20
10
balance
6 A box of mass 4.0 kg is pulled along a horizontal floor in a straight line by a constant force F.
The constant frictional force acting on the box is 2.0 N.
The speed of the box increases from 0.50 m / s to 2.5 m / s in 2.0 s.
What is the value of F ?
A 2.0 N B 4.0 N C 6.0 N D 7.0 N

4
40 cm beam
X
pivot
6.0 N

8 Two vectors, WX and WZ, are as shown.
X Y
W Z
What is the resultant of the vectors?
A WY B XY C XZ D ZY
9 Which equation for impulse is correct?
A impulse = Ft
F
B impulse =
t
C impulse = (mv – mu)t
( mv – mu )
D impulse =
t
© UCLES 2022 0625/23/M/J/22

5
0.50 m / s.
A 0.0 m / s B 0.19 m / s C 0.31 m / s D 0.50 m / s
11 In which form is energy stored by stretching a spring?
A chemical energy
B elastic potential energy
C gravitational potential energy
D thermal energy
12 A car moves along a horizontal road. Its initial kinetic energy is 280 kJ. A constant resistive force
of 200 N acts on the car. No other horizontal forces act on the car.
What is the kinetic energy of the car after it has travelled a distance of 300 m?
A 60 kJ B 80 kJ C 220 kJ D 340 kJ
water
dam
X


6
14 The diagram shows gas particles hitting the wall of a container. The system is at room
temperature.
Why do the gas particles exert a pressure on the wall?
A When the particles hit the wall, their momentum changes, which causes a force.
B When the particles hit the wall, their average kinetic energy increases.
C The particles expand when they hit the wall.
D The particles collide with each other.
15 A gas in a container is cooled but the volume of the gas does not change.
Which row describes the changes in the pressure of the gas and the kinetic energy of the gas
particles?
kinetic energy
pressure of gas
of gas particles
© UCLES 2022 0625/23/M/J/22

7
16 The iron cylinder of an engine is to be fitted into a piece of aluminium.
The outside diameter M of the iron cylinder is slightly larger than the diameter N of the hole in the
aluminium.
iron cylinder
aluminium
N
What is the best action to fit the cylinder into the aluminium?
A Cool the aluminium and cool the iron.

B Cool the aluminium and heat the iron.
C Heat the aluminium and cool the iron.
D Heat the aluminium and heat the iron.
17 Four metal blocks at a temperature of 200 °C are left to cool down to the same temperature.
The table gives the mass of each block and the energy it transfers to the surroundings as it cools.
block mass / g energy transferred / J
1 100 16 200
2 150 16 200
3 200 32 400
4 200 8 100
Which two blocks are made of the same metal?

8
the glass.
A condensation
B conduction
C convection
D evaporation
bar?

20 An object emits infrared radiation.
Which two properties of the object determine the rate of radiation of thermal energy from the
object?
A the density and the surface area of the object

B the density and the surface temperature of the object
C the mass and the surface area of the object
D the surface area and the surface temperature of the object
© UCLES 2022 0625/23/M/J/22

9
2.0
displacement / cm
1.0
0
0 4.0 8.0 12.0 16.0 20.0 24.0 28.0
–2.0
A 1.0 4.0
B 1.0 8.0
C 2.0 4.0
D 2.0 8.0
22 The wavelength of a beam of X-rays, travelling through air, is 5.4 × 10–10 m.
What is its frequency?
A 5.6 × 10–17 Hz
B 5.6 × 1011 Hz
C 5.6 × 1017 Hz
D 5.6 × 1018 Hz

10
23 A ray of light passes from air through a sheet of glass and out the other side, as shown.
air
boundary 1
glass
boundary 2
air
Which two angles are equal to each other?
A angle of incidence at boundary 1 and angle of incidence at boundary 2

B angle of incidence at boundary 1 and angle of refraction at boundary 1
C angle of incidence at boundary 1 and angle of refraction at boundary 2
D angle of refraction at boundary 1 and angle of refraction at boundary 2
24 A plane mirror is fixed to a vertical wall.
A boy looks at the image of himself in the mirror.
Which statement describes the image formed?
A real and upright

B real and upside down
C virtual and upright
D virtual and upside down
25 The speed of light in air is 3.0 × 108 m / s.
The critical angle for light in a transparent plastic material placed in air is 37°.
A 1.8 × 108 m / s
B 2.4 × 108 m / s
C 3.8 × 108 m / s
D 5.0 × 108 m / s
© UCLES 2022 0625/23/M/J/22

11
26 A resistor and a battery are connected in series.
The value of the resistor is 20 Ω.
The potential difference (p.d.) of the battery is 4.0 V.
What is the current in the resistor?
A 0.20 A B 4.0 A C 5.0 A D 80 A

28 A student attempts to make a permanent magnet by hammering metal bars of the same size in
the same magnetic field.
In which case is the strongest permanent magnet produced?
A B
magnetic magnetic
field lines field lines
iron bar
iron bar
C D
magnetic magnetic
field lines field lines
steel bar
steel bar

12
29 A metal sphere R is suspended on an insulating thread.
insulating thread
support
Another sphere S is brought close to sphere R. Sphere S has a negative charge and is attached
to a plastic stand. The diagram shows the spheres when they are close to each other.
S
–
– –
– –
–––
R
table plastic stand
Which charged state of R accounts for the behaviour in the diagram?
A negative only
B positive only
C negative or uncharged
D positive or uncharged
30 A student compares the wavelength and uses of infrared waves with microwaves.
wavelength of infrared
use of infrared waves
compared to microwaves
A longer intruder alarms

B longer satellite television
C shorter intruder alarms
D shorter satellite television
© UCLES 2022 0625/23/M/J/22

13
31 There is a current I in a resistor for a time t. The potential difference (p.d.) across the resistor
is V.
A student calculates the product IVt.
In which unit is the student’s answer measured?
A ampere
B coulomb
C joule
D watt
32 Which statement about identical lamps in a parallel circuit is not correct?
A If one lamp blows, the others remain switched on.

B The current in each lamp is different.
C The lamps can be switched on and off separately.
D The lamps have the same voltage across each of them.

14
black terminal?
A B
12 V 12 V
red black red black

C D
12 V 12 V
red black red black

34 The truth table for a logic gate is shown.
inputs output
0 0 1
0 1 1
1 0 1
1 1 0
Which type of logic gate is it?
A AND B NAND C OR D NOR
© UCLES 2022 0625/23/M/J/22

15
35 A wire XY is connected to a resistor R. The wire is moved in the magnetic field between two
magnetic poles.
In which direction must the wire be moved so that the induced current is in the direction shown?
induced
current
X
S N
C D
R
A B
C D

16
37 The circuit shown consists of a vertical wire, a resistor R and a battery.
The magnetic field near the wire is also shown.
card
card wire carrying

current into
the page
vertical wire
R view from above
showing the magnetic field
Two changes are made to the circuit:
● The polarity of the battery is reversed.

● The resistor R is replaced with another resistor with a lower resistance than R.
What effect will these changes have on the magnetic field near the wire?
direction of strength of
magnetic field magnetic field
A opposite same
B same weaker
C opposite stronger
D same stronger
38 Carbon-14 has a proton number (Z) of 6 and a nucleon number (A) of 14.
Nitrogen-14 has a proton number of 7 and a nucleon number of 14.
Carbon-14 emits β-particles to form nitrogen-14.
Which nuclide equation describes this process?

14 14
A 6C → 7N + 01 β
6 7
B 14 C → 14 N + 10 β
14 14 0
C 6C → 7N + −1 β
6 7 −1
D 14 C → 14 N + 0β
© UCLES 2022 0625/23/M/J/22

17
39 A beam of radiation, containing α-particles, β-particles and γ-rays, passes between two parallel
plates. One plate is positively charged and the other is negatively charged.
Which radioactive emissions will be attracted towards the positively charged plate?
A α-particles only
B β-particles only
C γ-rays only
40 A scientist uses a counter to measure the radioactivity of a sample of nitrogen-13.
The counter and sample of nitrogen-13 are on a table in a laboratory.
The reading on the counter is recorded for a period of 80 min and a graph is drawn using the
measurements.
400
count rate
counts / min
300
200
100
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
time / min
What is the best estimate for the half-life of the sample of nitrogen-13?
A 10 min B 12 min C 14 min D 40 min
© UCLES 2022 0625/23/M/J/22

CAIE IGCSE Physics
May/June 2
2022
PUBLISHED
1 B 1
2 D 1
3 C 1
4 C 1
5 C 1
6 C 1
7 D 1
8 A 1
9 A 1
10 B 1
11 B 1
12 C 1
13 A 1
14 A 1
15 A 1
16 C 1
17 B 1
18 A 1
19 B 1
20 D 1
21 B 1
22 C 1
23 C 1
24 C 1
25 A 1
26 A 1
27 B 1
28 C 1

CAIE IGCSE Physics
May/June 2
2022
PUBLISHED
29 D 1
30 C 1
31 C 1
32 B 1
33 A 1
34 B 1
35 B 1
36 D 1
37 C 1
38 C 1
39 B 1
40 A 1

Cambridge IGCSE™
PHYSICS 0625/21
45 minutes

*3313866971*

Soft clean eraser
INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION
IB22 11_0625_21/5RP

2
1 Which measuring instrument is used to measure the diameter of a thin metal wire?
A 30 cm rule
B measuring tape
C metre rule
D micrometre screw gauge
2 A car starts from rest.
The table shows the readings from its speedometer every 10 s.
time / s 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
speed
0 4 8 12 12 12 12
m/ s
Which row describes the car’s motion in the first 30 seconds and in the last 30 seconds?
motion during first 30 s motion during last 30 s
A non-zero acceleration at rest

B zero acceleration constant speed
C zero acceleration at rest
D non-zero acceleration constant speed
3 Which property of an object is a consequence of the effect of a gravitational field acting on it?
A density
B mass
C volume
D weight
© UCLES 2022 0625/21/O/N/22

3
4 The diagram shows the dimensions of a solid rectangular block of metal of mass m.
q
p
Which expression is used to calculate the density of the metal?
A m
(p  q)
B m
(p  q  r )
C mpq
D mpqr
5 A wheelbarrow has a weight W of 140 N.
F
0.8 m
1.4 m
Which vertical force F is needed to support the wheelbarrow in the position shown?
A 60 N B 80 N C 140 N D 245 N

4
6 A car is travelling around a circular track at a constant speed, as shown.
In which direction is the resultant force on the car?
D
car
C A
direction of
movement
7 The diagram shows part of a hose used by a firefighter.
nozzle NOT TO
SCALE
water water
moving moving
at 6 m / s at 1 m / s
15 kg of water flows through the hose each second.
Which force is applied to the hose by the water?
A 15 N B 75 N C 90 N D 105 N
A chemical
B elastic
C thermal
D sound
© UCLES 2022 0625/21/O/N/22

5
9 An object has kinetic energy of 200 J.
A constant resultant force of 190 N is applied in the direction of its motion through a distance of
10 m.
What is the final kinetic energy of the object?
A 390 J B 1700 J C 2000 J D 2100 J
10 The statements describe what happens when the power of a machine is increased.
1 The work done in a given time decreases.

2 The work done in a given time increases.
3 The time taken to do a given quantity of work decreases.
4 The time taken to do a given quantity of work increases.
11 A manometer containing water is used to measure the pressure of a gas supply, as shown.
water
gas
supply
40 cm
10 cm
The density of water is 1000 kg / m3.
What is the pressure of the gas supply?
A 300 Pa above atmospheric pressure

B 400 Pa above atmospheric pressure
C 3000 Pa above atmospheric pressure
D 4000 Pa above atmospheric pressure

6
12 A fixed mass of gas is trapped in a container. The temperature of the gas is increased but the
volume of the gas is kept constant.
fixed
mass
of gas
How does this change affect the average kinetic energy of the molecules and the pressure on the
walls of the container?
average
pressure
kinetic energy
A increases increases
B stays the same increases
D decreases increases
13 Which row correctly describes boiling and evaporation of water?
boiling evaporation
A bubbles seen occurs at surface only

B bubbles seen occurs throughout the water
C no bubbles occurs at surface only
D no bubbles occurs throughout the water
bulb capillary tube
Which change increases the sensitivity of the thermometer?
A a narrower capillary tube

B a wider capillary tube
C thicker glass around the bulb
D thinner glass around the bulb
© UCLES 2022 0625/21/O/N/22

7
15 The diagram shows a liquid-in-glass thermometer with a uniform capillary tube.
liquid capillary tube

NOT TO
0 qC 100 qC SCALE
8 mm 64 mm
88 mm
Which temperature is indicated by the thermometer?
A 73 C B 80 C C 82 C D 90 C
16 Four thermometers, with their bulbs painted different colours, are placed at equal distances from
a radiant heater.
Which thermometer shows the slowest temperature rise when the heater is first switched on?
A dull black
B dull white
C shiny black
D shiny white
17 A wave source produces 3000 crests every minute. The wave has a speed of 300 m / s.
What is the wavelength of the wave?
A 0.10 m B 0.17 m C 6.0 m D 10.0 m

8
18 The diagrams show two sets of wavefronts in a ripple tank.
wave wave
direction direction
barrier shallow water
A student makes two statements about the waves.
1 When the waves reflect from the barrier the direction changes but the wavelength
remains the same.
2 When the waves refract as they enter the shallow water the direction remains the
same, but the wavelength changes.
A statement 1 and statement 2

B statement 1 only
C statement 2 only
D neither statement 1 nor statement 2
19 A composite block is made by joining together three transparent materials.
The diagram shows a ray of light passing through the composite block.
material 1
material 2
material 3
Which list gives the three materials in order of the speeds of light in the materials, from slowest to
fastest?
A 123 B 132 C 213 D 231
© UCLES 2022 0625/21/O/N/22

9
20 An object is placed 30 cm in front of a plane mirror.
Which statement describes the image of the object?
A The image is the same size and 30 cm from the object.

B The image is the same size and 60 cm from the object.
C The image is smaller and 30 cm from the object.
D The image is smaller and 60 cm from the object.
21 A ray of light is shone onto the surface of a mirror.
2 3
1 4
Which two angles represent the angle of incidence and the angle of reflection?
22 The speed of sound in air is 330 m / s.
How do the speeds of sound in concrete and water compare with this speed?
speed in speed in
concrete water
A greater greater
B greater less
C less greater
D less less
23 What is the speed of microwaves in air?
A 3  108 m / s
B 3  108 cm / s
C 3  108 m / s
D 3  108 km / s

10
24 An observer stands at the finish line of a 100 m race. He wants to time the winner’s run. He starts
his stop-watch as soon as he sees the smoke from the starting gun instead of when he hears the
bang.
What is the reason for doing this?
A Light travels much faster than sound.

B There is a risk he might respond to an echo from a wall.
C Humans react slower to sound than to light.
D Humans react more quickly to sound than to light.
25 Which statement is not a method for magnetising an iron bar?
A Place the bar next to a magnet and hammer the bar.

B Place the bar inside a solenoid. Switch on an alternating current (a.c.) in the coil and
gradually reduce the current.
C Place the bar inside a solenoid. Switch on a direct current (d.c.) in the coil and gradually
reduce the current.
D Stroke the bar repeatedly with a magnet.
26 The diagram shows a circuit containing a variable resistor connected to a variable power supply.
power
supply
The table shows the currents for different values of the potential difference (p.d.) and the
resistance.
p.d. / V resistance /  current
3.6 12 I1
1.2 12 I2
3.6 6 I3
What is the order of the currents from smallest to largest?
A I1  I2  I3 B I1  I3  I2 C I2  I1  I3 D I3  I1  I2
© UCLES 2022 0625/21/O/N/22

11
27 Which diagram shows the electric field pattern around a positive charge?
A B C D
+ + + +
28 A negatively charged plastic rod P is placed above a positively charged plastic rod Q.
P
– – – – –
Q
+ + + + +
What are the directions of the electrostatic forces on rod P and on rod Q?
electrostatic force electrostatic force

on rod P on rod Q
A downwards downwards
B downwards upwards
C upwards downwards
D upwards upwards
29 A lamp rated 12 V, 2.0 A is switched on for one minute.
How much energy is transferred by the lamp?
A 6.0 J B 24 J C 360 J D 1440 J

12
30 An alternating current (a.c.) power supply is connected in series with a resistor R and a diode.
Which graph shows how the voltage V across the resistor R varies with time?
A B
voltage V voltage V
0 0
0 time 0 time
C D
voltage V voltage V
0 0
0 time 0 time
31 A student makes four resistors using different pieces of wire. The wires have different diameters
and lengths. All the pieces of wire are made of the same material.
Which piece of wire will make the resistor with the largest resistance?
diameter / mm length / cm
A 0.8 10
B 0.8 17
C 2.0 10
D 2.0 17
© UCLES 2022 0625/21/O/N/22

13
32 Which diagram shows a circuit containing a battery, a fuse and a buzzer?
A B
C D
33 The diagram shows a network of logic gates.
OUT
Which single logic gate, placed between X, Y and OUT, would have the same effect as the
network?
A B C D

14
34 The diagram represents a transformer.
core
primary coil
Which row shows materials suitable for making the core and the primary coil?
core primary coil
A iron copper
B iron plastic
C steel copper
D steel plastic
35 The diagrams show the magnetic field lines around a wire carrying a current, I.
1 2
I I
3 4
I I
Which diagrams are correct?
A 1 only B 2 and 3 C 4 only D 1 and 3
© UCLES 2022 0625/21/O/N/22

15
36 Which statement about electromagnetic induction is correct?
A A conductor moving parallel to magnetic field lines induces an electromotive force (e.m.f.) in
the conductor.
B The direction of the induced electromotive force (e.m.f.) opposes the change which produces
it.
C The induced current is in a direction parallel to the direction of motion producing it.
D The induced electromotive force (e.m.f.) decreases when the speed of the conductor moving
across the field lines increases.
37 A very important experiment increased scientists’ understanding of the structure of matter.
In the experiment, particles scattered as they passed through a thin metal foil.
Which particles were used, and to which conclusion did the experiment lead?
particles conclusion
A alpha-particles matter is made up of atoms

B alpha-particles atoms have a very small nucleus
C beta-particles matter is made up of atoms
D beta-particles atoms have a very small nucleus
38 Polonium, Po, has a proton number equal to 84 and a nucleon number equal to 218.
Polonium changes into astatine, At, by emitting a -particle.
Which equation represents this decay?
218Po  218 At + 0 
84 85 –1
A
218Po + 0  218 At
84 –1 85
B
84Po  85 At + –1 
218 218 0
C
84Po + –1   85 At
218 0 218
D

16
39 The graph shows how the count rate from a radioactive isotope changes with time.
60
count rate 50
counts / s
40
30
20
10
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
time / s
What is the half-life of this isotope?
A 2.0 s B 6.0 s C 12 s D 53 s
40 What is the nature of -emission?
A electromagnetic waves
B negatively charged particles
C positively charged particles
D uncharged particles
© UCLES 2022 0625/21/O/N/22

Cambridge IGCSE™
PHYSICS 0625/21
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 40
Published
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the
examination.
Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.
Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.
Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2022 series for most
Cambridge IGCSE™, Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some Cambridge O Level
components.

1 D 1
2 D 1
3 D 1
4 B 1
5 A 1
6 B 1
7 B 1
8 C 1
9 D 1
10 C 1
11 C 1
12 A 1
13 A 1
14 A 1
15 B 1
16 D 1
17 C 1
18 B 1
19 C 1
20 B 1
21 C 1
22 A 1
23 C 1
24 A 1
25 B 1
26 C 1
27 A 1
28 B 1

29 D 1
30 C 1
31 B 1
32 D 1
33 D 1
34 A 1
35 D 1
36 B 1
37 B 1
38 C 1
39 A 1
40 C 1

Cambridge IGCSE™
PHYSICS 0625/22
45 minutes

*3644971804*

Soft clean eraser
INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION
IB22 11_0625_22/3RP

2
1 Which measuring devices are most suitable to determine the volume of about 200 ml of liquid and
the diameter of a thin wire?
volume of about
diameter of a thin wire
200 ml of liquid
A measuring cylinder micrometer screw gauge

B measuring cylinder ruler
C ruler measuring cylinder
D ruler micrometer screw gauge
2 The diagrams show speed–time graphs for four different bodies moving for 6.0 s.
Which body travelled the least distance?
A B
8.0 8.0
speed speed
m/s m/s
6.0 6.0
4.0 4.0
2.0 2.0
0 0
0 2.0 4.0 6.0 0 2.0 4.0 6.0
time / s time / s
C D
8.0 8.0
speed speed
m/s m/s
6.0 6.0
4.0 4.0
2.0 2.0
0 0
0 2.0 4.0 6.0 0 2.0 4.0 6.0
time / s time / s
© UCLES 2022 0625/22/O/N/22

3
3 Which statement describes the relationship between mass and weight?
A Mass is the effect of a gravitational field on a weight.

B Mass is the effect of a magnetic field on a weight.
C Weight is the effect of a gravitational field on a mass.
D Weight is the effect of a magnetic field on a mass.
4 The diagram shows four pieces of laboratory apparatus.
100
100
90
90
80
80
70
70
60
60
50
50
40
40
30
30
0.0g 20
20
10
10
balance measuring ruler stop-watch

cylinder
Which pieces of apparatus are used to find the density of a liquid?
A balance and stop-watch

B balance and measuring cylinder
C measuring cylinder and ruler
D stop-watch and ruler

4
5 The diagram shows a metre rule MN on two supports, P and Q.
Two loads are placed on the rule, as shown.
load load
M N
P Q
The rule rests steadily on the supports.
total moment total moment

about M about N
A is clockwise is anticlockwise
B is clockwise is zero
C is zero is clockwise
D is zero is zero
6 The diagram shows an object moving at a constant speed in a circular path in the direction
shown.
A force acts on the object to keep it in the circular path.
In which labelled direction does this force act, when the object is in the position shown?
A
object
B D
C path of
object
© UCLES 2022 0625/22/O/N/22

5
7 A trolley of mass 4.0 kg travelling with a velocity of 4.0 m / s collides with a trolley of mass 2.0 kg
travelling with a velocity of 2.0 m / s in the same direction. After the collision, the velocity of the
4.0 kg trolley is reduced to 3.0 m / s.
4.0 m / s 2.0 m / s 3.0 m / s v
4.0 kg 2.0 kg 4.0 kg 2.0 kg
before collision after collision
What is the velocity v of the 2.0 kg trolley after the collision?
A 0.25 m / s B 4.0 m / s C 5.0 m / s D 16 m / s
8 An object falls towards the Earth’s surface.
What happens to the gravitational potential energy and to the kinetic energy of the object?
gravitational potential
kinetic energy
energy
9 A boy takes 0.60 s to lift a book of mass 0.60 kg from the top of a desk and place it on a shelf.
The top of the desk is 0.80 m above the floor, and the shelf is 1.7 m above the floor. The
gravitational field strength is 10 N / kg.
shelf
top of desk
1.7 m
0.8 m
Which power does the boy develop?
A 0.9 W B 1.7 W C 9.0 W D 17 W

6
10 A mass is lifted from rest on the ground to Y. There is no air resistance.
P is the increase in gravitational energy of the mass.
Q is the kinetic energy of the mass at Y.
Which expression is equal to the mechanical work done on the mass?
A P+Q B P–Q C Q–P D P×Q
11 The diagram shows a tank containing sea water.
sea water
NOT TO
tank 8.0 m SCALE
P
60 cm
The density of the sea water is 1020 kg / m3.
What is the pressure at point P relative to atmospheric pressure?
A 7400 Pa above atmospheric pressure

B 7500 Pa above atmospheric pressure
C 75 000 Pa above atmospheric pressure
D 82 000 Pa above atmospheric pressure
© UCLES 2022 0625/22/O/N/22

7
12 The pressure of a fixed mass of gas in a cylinder is measured. The volume of the gas in the
cylinder is slowly decreased. The temperature of the gas does not change.
Which graph shows how the pressure of the gas changes during this process?
A B
pressure pressure
0 0
0 time 0 time
C D
pressure pressure
0 0
0 time 0 time
13 Wet clothes are hanging outside to dry.
What are the best conditions for the clothes to dry most quickly?
wind speed temperature
A high high
B high low
C low high
D low low

B a longer tube
D a wider tube

8
15 A scientist is determining the specific latent heat of vaporisation of a liquid.
He puts the liquid in a vacuum flask and heats it with a 100 W heater. The mass of liquid in the
vacuum flask when it starts to boil is 300 g. He continues to heat the liquid for a further
12 minutes after which the mass of the remaining liquid is 100 g.
What is the specific latent heat of vaporisation of the liquid?
(Assume that all the thermal energy from the heater is used to vaporise the liquid.)
A 6000 J / kg
B 240 000 J / kg
C 360 000 J / g
D 360 000 J / kg
16 Which piece of equipment is designed to produce a type of electromagnetic wave?
A electric fire
B electric generator
C electric motor
D electromagnet
17 A sound wave travels from air into water.
Which row describes what happens to the frequency and the wavelength of the wave?
B decreases stays the same
C stays the same decreases
D stays the same increases
© UCLES 2022 0625/22/O/N/22

9
18 The diagram shows plane water waves in a ripple tank passing through a gap between two
barriers and spreading out.
barrier
plane
water
waves
barrier
Which name is given to this effect?
A diffraction
B reflection
C refraction
D total internal reflection
19 A ray of light travels from air into a material, as shown.
40q air
material
27q
What is the refractive index of the material?
A 1.4 B 1.5 C 1.7 D 1.9

10
20 The diagram shows an object in front of a plane mirror.
At which labelled position is the image of the object formed?
B C
A D
plane
mirror
eye
object
21 The angle between an incident ray and the surface of a plane mirror reflecting the ray is 70°.
What is the angle of incidence?
A 20° B 40° C 70° D 140°

23 An object is reflected in a plane mirror.
Which description of the image is correct?
A diminished and real

B enlarged and virtual
C same size and real
D same size and virtual
© UCLES 2022 0625/22/O/N/22

11
24 A 100 m race is started by firing a gun. The gun makes a bang and a puff of smoke at the same
time.
starter finishing
judge
100 m
When does the finishing judge see the smoke and when does he hear the bang?
sees the smoke hears the bang
A almost immediately almost immediately

B almost immediately after about 0.3 s
C after about 0.3 s almost immediately
D after about 0.3 s after about 0.3 s
25 Two magnets X and Y are placed end to end on a bench. The diagram shows the magnetic field
pattern between the poles of the magnets.
X Y
Which row shows the direction of the forces exerted on X and Y by the magnetic field?
force on X force on Y
A
B
C
D

12
26 The diagram shows a circuit used to control the potential difference (p.d.) across a lamp.
The variable resistor is adjusted until the p.d. across the lamp is 6.0 V.
The current in the lamp is 0.5 A.
What is the resistance of the lamp?
A 0.083 Ω B 3.0 Ω C 6.5 Ω D 12.0 Ω
27 A charge Q flows for time t through a resistor of resistance R.
Which equation gives the current I in the resistor?
A I = Qt B I = Rt C I=Q D I= R
t t
28 A plastic rod is rubbed with a dry woollen cloth. The rod becomes positively charged.
A Electrons move from the cloth to the rod.

B Electrons move from the rod to the cloth.
C Protons move from the cloth to the rod.
D Protons move from the rod to the cloth.
29 Which diagram shows a graph of current against voltage for a filament lamp?
A B C D
current current current current
0 0 0 0
0 voltage 0 voltage 0 voltage 0 voltage
© UCLES 2022 0625/22/O/N/22

13
Which potential divider makes the potential difference (p.d.) across component Y increase when
the light intensity increases?
A B C D
X X X X
Y Y Y Y
31 Diagram 1 is a circuit diagram showing an a.c. power supply connected to four diodes and a
resistor.
Diagram 2 shows the output voltage from the power supply.
diagram 1 diagram 2
voltage
0
R 0 time
Which graph correctly shows the voltage–time curve across resistor R?
A B
voltage voltage
0 0
0 time 0 time
C D
voltage voltage
0 0
0 time 0 time

14
32 Which diagram shows the circuit symbol for a fuse?
A B C D
33 The diagram represents an alarm system using a logic gate.
temperature
sensor
logic
siren
gate
smoke
detector
The data for the system is shown.
state 0 1
temperature sensor cold hot

smoke detector no smoke smoke
siren no sound sound
The siren sounds when there is any indication of a fire.
Which logic gate is used?
A B C D
© UCLES 2022 0625/22/O/N/22

15
34 Four small compasses are placed around a solenoid.
solenoid
A current is now switched on in the solenoid.
Which diagram shows possible new directions of the compass needles?
A B
C D
35 Transformers are used in the transmission of electrical power to houses.
Which type of transformer is used at the power station prior to connection to the power lines and
which type is used prior to delivery to the houses?
power station before houses
A step-down step-down
B step-down step-up
C step-up step-down
D step-up step-up

16
36 The diagram shows an a.c. generator rotating in a clockwise direction.
magnets
N I
S
What are the names of parts 1 and 2?
1 2
A brush slip-ring
B brush split-ring commutator
C slip-ring brush
D slip-ring split-ring commutator
37 A thin metal foil is placed in a vacuum. α-particles are fired at the foil and most go straight
through. A very small proportion of the α-particles are deflected through large angles.
A α-particles are very small.

230
38 Thorium-230 is represented by the symbol
90
Th . This isotope is radioactive and decays to
radium by emitting α-particles.
Which nuclide is produced by this decay?
226 230 230 234

A
88
Ra B
89
Ra C
91
Ra D
92
Ra
© UCLES 2022 0625/22/O/N/22

17
39 The diagram shows a piece of apparatus used to determine the nature of the emissions from a
radioactive source. The absorbers can be raised out of or lowered into the path of the radiation
from the source to the detector. The apparatus is evacuated.
different
absorbers
detector radioactive
source
vacuum
The table gives a set of results for a particular radioactive source.
count rate on detector

absorber in use
(counts per second)
none 350
thin paper 350
1.0 mm aluminium 180
1.0 cm lead 23
Which types of radiation are being emitted by the radioactive source?
A α-particles and β-particles
B α-particles only
C β-particles and γ-rays
D β-particles only

18
40 The graph shows the measured count rate of radiation from a source containing a radioactive
isotope. The detector is in a laboratory, with no shielding from background radiation.
X
count rate
0
0 time
What is the measured count rate after a time of one half-life?
X Y (X −Y ) (X +Y )
A B C D
2 2 2 2
© UCLES 2022 0625/22/O/N/22

Cambridge IGCSE™
PHYSICS 0625/22
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 40
Published
examination.
Teachers.
components.

1 A 1
2 B 1
3 C 1
4 B 1
5 D 1
6 D 1
7 B 1
8 B 1
9 C 1
10 A 1
11 C 1
12 C 1
13 A 1
14 A 1
15 D 1
16 A 1
17 D 1
18 A 1
19 C 1
20 B 1
21 A 1
22 D 1
23 D 1
24 B 1
25 B 1
26 D 1
27 C 1
28 B 1

29 D 1
30 A 1
31 B 1
32 D 1
33 B 1
34 D 1
35 C 1
36 A 1
37 C 1
38 A 1
39 C 1
40 D 1

Cambridge IGCSE™
PHYSICS 0625/23
45 minutes

*7815350245*

Soft clean eraser
INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION
IB22 11_0625_23/2RP

2
1 A wire is approximately 48 cm long and has an approximate diameter of 0.3 mm.
Which measuring instruments can be used to obtain more precise values of the dimensions of the
wire?
length of the wire diameter of the wire
A 30 cm ruler micrometer
B half-metre rule 30 cm rule
C half-metre rule micrometer
D micrometer half-metre rule
2 The velocity–time graph for a car is shown.
25
velocity
m/s 20
15
10
0
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35
time / s
What is the distance travelled by the car in 35 s?
A 250 m B 350 m C 450 m D 700 m
3 Which property of a body results from the effect of a gravitational field on its mass?
A the ability of the body to resist a change in motion

B the density of the body
C the volume of the body
D the weight of the body
© UCLES 2022 0625/23/O/N/22

3
4 The diagram shows four pieces of laboratory apparatus.
100
100
90
90
80
80
70
70
60
60
50
50
40
40
30
30
0.0g 20
20
10
10
balance measuring ruler stop-watch

cylinder
Which pieces of apparatus are used to find the density of a liquid?
A balance and stop-watch

B balance and measuring cylinder
C measuring cylinder and ruler
D stop-watch and ruler
5 A metal rod of length 80 cm is pivoted at point O. Its centre of mass is at its mid-point. Four pulley
wheels are indicated by the letter P.
P P P P
cords
20 cm 20 cm
O
metal rod
0.10 kg 0.10 kg
The rod is in equilibrium, as shown.
What is the weight of the rod?
A 0.20 N B 1.0 N C 2.0 N D 4.0 N

4
6 The diagram shows an object moving at a constant speed in a circular path in the direction
shown.
A force acts on the object to keep it in the circular path.
In which labelled direction does this force act, when the object is in the position shown?
A
object
B D
C path of
object
7 A force F acts on a body of mass m for a time t. During this time, the velocity of the body
increases from u to v.
Which equation relates F, m, t, u and v ?
A Fm = t(v – u)
B Fm = t(v + u)
C Ft = m(v – u)
D Ft = m(v + u)
8 An object falls towards the Earth’s surface.
What happens to the gravitational potential energy and to the kinetic energy of the object?
gravitational potential
kinetic energy
energy
© UCLES 2022 0625/23/O/N/22

5
9 A skier is pulled up a short straight slope at constant speed by a rope.
rope
The tension in the rope is 100 N and there is a combined frictional and air resistance force of 20 N
acting on the skier.
The slope is 10 m long and the skier rises 1.5 m vertically.
How much work is done by the rope pulling the skier up the slope?
A 120 J B 150 J C 1000 J D 1200 J
10 In some situations, a force does work.
Which set of conditions increases the quantity of work done by the force?
magnitude distance moved

of force by the force
B decreases stays the same
C increases increases
D stays the same decreases
11 A measuring cylinder of cross-sectional area 4.0 cm2 contains 224 cm3 of liquid.
The pressure of the liquid at the base of the measuring cylinder due to the liquid is 8800 Pa.
A 224 kg / m3 B 385 kg / m3 C 1600 kg / m3 D 2200 kg / m3

6
12 The pressure of a fixed mass of gas in a cylinder is measured. The volume of the gas in the
cylinder is slowly decreased. The temperature of the gas does not change.
Which graph shows how the pressure of the gas changes during this process?
A B
pressure pressure
0 0
0 time 0 time
C D
pressure pressure
0 0
0 time 0 time
13 Which statement about evaporation is correct?
A A body in contact with an evaporating liquid loses thermal energy.

B A decrease in the surface area of an evaporating liquid increases the rate of evaporation.
C A wind over a liquid decreases the rate of evaporation.
D It is necessary to provide an external source of thermal energy to a liquid for it to evaporate.

B a longer tube
D a wider tube
© UCLES 2022 0625/23/O/N/22

7
15 An ice cube of mass 12 g at 0 C absorbs thermal energy from the surroundings at a rate of 3 J / s.
The specific latent heat of fusion of ice is 330 J / g.
How long will it take for the ice cube to melt?
A 82.5 s B 1320 s C 3960 s D 11 880 s
16 Which piece of equipment is designed to produce a type of electromagnetic wave?
A electric fire
B electric generator
C electric motor
D electromagnet
17 A passing boat causes a floating object on a lake to bob up and down 18 times in 12 s. The
wavelength of the wave created by the boat is 48 cm.
What is the velocity of these water waves?
A 32 cm / s B 72 cm / s C 576 cm / s D 864 cm / s
18 Wavefronts are incident on a boundary.
What is needed for the wave to refract at the boundary?
A a shiny surface at the boundary

B a small gap in the boundary
C different mediums either side of the boundary in which the frequency of the wave is different
D different mediums either side of the boundary in which the speed of the wave is different

8
19 A person uses a magnifying glass to look at a stamp.
Which ray diagram shows a thin converging lens being used to do this?
A B
lens lens
stamp stamp
C D
lens lens
stamp stamp
20 The diagram shows an object in front of a plane mirror.
At which labelled position is the image of the object formed?
B C
A D
plane
mirror
eye
object
© UCLES 2022 0625/23/O/N/22

9
21 The diagram shows the action of a thin converging lens on two rays of light. The rays are from
the top of an object O. An inverted image I is formed.
lens
I
O R S
Which name is given to the distance RS?
A principal axis
B principal focus
C focal length
D real length

23 The speed of light in a vacuum is 3.0  108 m / s.
Which value is closest to the speed of light in air?
A 3.0  102 m / s
B 3.0  104 m / s
C 3.0  106 m / s
D 3.0  108 m / s

10
24 A 100 m race is started by firing a gun. The gun makes a bang and a puff of smoke at the same
time.
starter finishing
judge
100 m
When does the finishing judge see the smoke and when does he hear the bang?
sees the smoke hears the bang
A almost immediately almost immediately

B almost immediately after about 0.3 s
C after about 0.3 s almost immediately
D after about 0.3 s after about 0.3 s
25 A student is to demagnetise a bar magnet. She tries four different ways.
1 hammering the magnet

2 heating the magnet
3 passing direct current through the magnet
4 placing the magnet in water
Which methods will demagnetise the magnet?
A 1, 2 and 3 B 1 and 2 only C 1 and 4 D 2 and 3 only
© UCLES 2022 0625/23/O/N/22

11
26 A student is investigating a resistance wire.
She measures the current in a 50 cm length of resistance wire.
resistance wire
The student repeats the experiment using a 100 cm length of the same resistance wire.
What is the effect of this change on the current in the circuit and on the resistance of the wire?
effect on effect on
current resistance
27 A resistor is connected to a cell so that there is a current from the positive terminal of the cell to
the negative terminal.
What causes the current in the resistor?
A electrons moving from the negative terminal of the cell to the positive terminal
B electrons moving from the positive terminal of the cell to the negative terminal
C protons moving from the negative terminal of the cell to the positive terminal
D protons moving from the positive terminal of the cell to the negative terminal
28 A plastic rod is rubbed with a dry woollen cloth. The rod becomes positively charged.
A Electrons move from the cloth to the rod.

B Electrons move from the rod to the cloth.
C Protons move from the cloth to the rod.
D Protons move from the rod to the cloth.

12
29 Which combination of the current in a resistor and the time for which it is present results in a
charge of 240 C passing through the resistor?
A a current of 2.0 A for 120 s

B a current of 4.0 A for 960 s
C a current of 6.0 A for 40 minutes
D a current of 8.0 A for 30 minutes
Which potential divider makes the potential difference (p.d.) across component Y increase when
the light intensity increases?
A B C D
X X X X
Y Y Y Y
© UCLES 2022 0625/23/O/N/22

13
31 Two resistors, R1 and R2, are connected in series in a circuit, as shown.
I0 R1 R2
The current in the resistors is I0.
Another resistor, R3, is then connected in parallel with R2, as shown.
R3
I1 R1 I2 R2
How do the currents I1 and I2 in the resistors R1 and R2 compare to current I0?
current in R1 current in R2
A I1 = I0 I2 < I0
B I1 = I0 I2 = I0
C I1 > I0 I2 = I0
D I1 > I0 I2 < I0

14
32 The diagram shows a circuit containing a cell, a lamp and two ammeters.
ammeter 1 A A ammeter 2
The current reading on ammeter 2 is 0.20 A.
What is the name for this type of circuit and what is the reading on ammeter 1?
type of circuit reading on ammeter 1
A series 0.20 A
B series greater than 0.20 A
C parallel 0.20 A
D parallel greater than 0.20 A
© UCLES 2022 0625/23/O/N/22

15
33 The diagram shows how logic gates can be used to monitor the temperature in a refrigerator.
magnetic closed = 1 R
switch NOT W
on door open = 0
OR
temperature cold = 1 S X
NOT
sensor hot = 0
Y
Z warning
main on = 1 T AND light
system
switch off = 0
The warning light will come on if the output at Z is 1.
The door R is open, the temperature sensor S is cold and the main system switch T is on.
What is the logic state at Y and what is the state of the warning light?
logic state at Y warning light
A 0 off
B 0 on
C 1 off
D 1 on

16
34 Four small compasses are placed around a solenoid.
solenoid
A current is now switched on in the solenoid.
Which diagram shows possible new directions of the compass needles?
A B
C D
35 Which metal is used for the core of a transformer?
A aluminium
B copper
C soft iron
D steel
© UCLES 2022 0625/23/O/N/22

17
36 The diagram shows a conducting metal rod PQ in the magnetic field between the N pole and the
S pole. The rod is connected to a resistor in a circuit.
In which direction should rod PQ be moved to induce the current I in the direction of the arrow in
the circuit?
N A
Q
C D
B
S
P
37 A thin metal foil is placed in a vacuum. -particles are fired at the foil and most go straight
through. A very small proportion of the -particles are deflected through large angles.
A -particles are very small.

38 The table compares -radiation, -radiation and -radiation.
-radiation -radiation -radiation
A more ionising than  or  a proton electromagnetic radiation

B less ionising than  or  an electron two protons and two neutrons
C more ionising than  or  an electron electromagnetic radiation
D less ionising than  or  electromagnetic radiation a proton

18
39 A high-voltage power supply is connected to a metal grid and a wire, as shown.
radioactive source
emitting D-particles
metal grid
wire
high
voltage sparks
observed
When the radioactive source is placed close to the grid, sparks are observed in the position
indicated.
Which statement explains why the sparks are formed?
A -particles have a long range.
B -particles have no charge.
C -particles have no mass.
D -particles are strongly ionising.
40 A student investigates four different radioactive isotopes. The student places a detector near
each radioactive material.
The background count rate is 36 counts per minute throughout the investigation.
The table shows the detector readings at the start and after 8 hours.
Which isotope has a half-life of 4 hours?
count rate at the start count rate after 8 hours

counts per minute counts per minute
A 150 36
B 212 53
C 260 92
D 356 80
© UCLES 2022 0625/23/O/N/22

Cambridge IGCSE™
PHYSICS 0625/23
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 40
Published
examination.
Teachers.
components.

1 C 1
2 B 1
3 D 1
4 B 1
5 C 1
6 D 1
7 C 1
8 B 1
9 C 1
10 C 1
11 C 1
12 C 1
13 A 1
14 A 1
15 B 1
16 A 1
17 B 1
18 D 1
19 A 1
20 B 1
21 C 1
22 D 1
23 D 1
24 B 1
25 B 1
26 B 1
27 A 1
28 B 1

29 A 1
30 A 1
31 D 1
32 A 1
33 D 1
34 D 1
35 C 1
36 A 1
37 C 1
38 C 1
39 D 1
40 C 1

Cambridge IGCSE™
PHYSICS 0625/22
45 minutes

*8462068765*

Soft clean eraser
INSTRUCTIONS
• Take the weight of 1.0 kg to be 9.8 N (acceleration of free fall = 9.8 m / s2).
INFORMATION
IB23 03_0625_22/3RP

2
1 Which list contains two scalar quantities and two vector quantities?
A distance, speed, time, velocity

B force, velocity, distance, mass
C mass, energy, temperature, momentum
D weight, acceleration, momentum, speed
2 The diagram shows the speed–time graph for a car.
speed Y
0
0 time
Which row describes the motion of the car at point X and at point Y?
point X point Y
A at rest moving with constant speed

B moving with constant speed at rest
C moving with changing speed at rest
D moving with changing speed moving with constant speed
3 Four objects are moving in a straight line.
The table shows the distances moved by each object in each second of its motion.
Which object is moving with constant non-zero acceleration?
distance moved distance moved distance moved distance moved

in 1st second / m in 2nd second / m in 3rd second / m in 4th second / m
A 5 5 5 5
B 5 6 7 8
C 5 7 10 14
D 5 8 14 26
© UCLES 2023 0625/22/F/M/23

3
4 The drag force on a car increases with speed. At 20 m / s, the total drag force is 400 N. The mass
of the car is 1200 kg and the driving force is constant at 700 N.
Which statement about the acceleration of the car at 20 m / s is correct?
A The acceleration is 0.25 m / s2 but will decrease as time passes.

B The acceleration is 0.25 m / s2 but will increase as time passes.
C The acceleration is 0.58 m / s2 but will decrease as time passes.
D The acceleration is 0.58 m / s2 but will increase as time passes.
5 A rectangular swimming pool is 50 m long and 25 m wide.
It contains water at a depth of 2 m.
What is the mass of the water in the pool?
A 2.5 kg B 2500 kg C 77 000 kg D 2 500 000 kg
6 An object is rising vertically at constant speed through water. There are three vertical forces
acting on it: the weight W, the drag force D, and the upward force U.
Which diagram shows the magnitude and direction of the vertical forces acting on the object?
A B C D
U = 3.0 N U = 3.0 N
U = 2.0 N D = 2.0 N U = 2.0 N
D = 1.0 N
W = 1.0 N D = 1.0 N D = 1.0 N
W = 2.0 N
W = 3.0 N W = 3.0 N

4
7 Two boys of equal weight sit on one side of a see-saw, as shown. Their father, of weight 1000 N,
sits on the other side. The see-saw is balanced and is being used so that it moves up and down.
During one part of the cycle, the father descends through a distance of 40 cm. At the same time,
the boy nearest the pivot rises through 20 cm, while the other boy rises through 80 cm.
What is the weight of each boy?
A 200 N B 400 N C 600 N D 800 N
8 A student measures the length of a spring. She then attaches different weights to the spring. She
measures the length of the spring for each weight.
The table shows her results.
weight / N length / mm
0 520
1.0 524
2.0 528
3.0 533
4.0 537
5.0 540
What is the extension of the spring with a weight of 3.0 N attached to it?
A 4 mm B 5 mm C 12 mm D 13 mm
9 The momentum of a body is changed by a force acting on it for a period of time.
Which action increases the change in momentum?
A doubling the force and halving the time

B doubling the force for the same time
C halving both the force and the time
D halving the force and doubling the time
© UCLES 2023 0625/22/F/M/23

5
10 The equation used to find the change in gravitational potential energy of an object can be written
as
∆EP = Y × Z × ∆h
where ∆EP is the change in gravitational energy and ∆h is the change in height.
Which row gives the quantities Y and Z?
Y Z
A mass gravitational field strength

B gravitational field strength density
C density speed
D speed mass
11 A machine has a power input of 200 W and a useful output energy of 1 kJ in 6 minutes.
What is the efficiency of the machine?
A 0.014% B 0.83% C 1.4% D 83%
12 What is the unit of power?
A joule
B newton
C volt
D watt
13 The diagram shows a rectangular block of weight 16 N. It is resting on a flat surface.
4.0 cm
5.0 cm
9.0 cm
What is the pressure at the base of the block due to its weight?
A 0.089 N / cm2
B 0.36 N / cm2
C 0.80 N / cm2
D 320 N / cm2

6
A 940 N B 2400 N C 9400 N D 24 000 N
15 A sample of gas is trapped in a rigid container. As the temperature of the gas is increased, the
pressure increases.
A The gas molecules have greater kinetic energy.

B The gas molecules hit the walls of the container harder.
C The gas molecules hit the walls of the container more frequently.
D The gas molecules move further apart.
16 What happens when the temperature of a liquid increases?
A The mass of the liquid increases, making the liquid less dense.
B The mass of the liquid increases, making the liquid more dense.
C The volume of the liquid increases, making the liquid less dense.
D The volume of the liquid increases, making the liquid more dense.
17 A bar of metal, which is a good thermal conductor, is heated at one end.
What is the main method of transfer of thermal energy along the bar?
A lattice vibration
B movement of atoms of the metal along the bar
C transfer by electrons
D vibration of atoms of the metal bar
© UCLES 2023 0625/22/F/M/23

7
18 A transverse wave moves along a rope.
The diagram shows the position of the rope at one particular time.
rope
W X Y Z
Which two labelled points are one wavelength apart?
A W and X B W and Z C X and Z D Y and Z
19 Light in transparent plastic meets a boundary with air. Light is transmitted into the air only if the
angle marked θ in the diagram is greater than 36°.
air
T plastic
What is the refractive index of the plastic?
A 0.59 B 0.81 C 1.2 D 1.7
20 A thin converging lens has a focal length f. An object O is placed to the left of the lens, as shown.
f f
Where is the image formed and how does its size compare to the object?
image position image size
A on the opposite side of the lens to the object larger than the object
B on the opposite side of the lens to the object smaller than the object
C on the same side of the lens as the object larger than the object
D on the same side of the lens as the object smaller than the object

8
21 Which diagram shows what happens when a ray of white light passes through a prism?
A B
spectrum
white white
light light
spectrum
C D
spectrum
white white
light light spectrum
22 A television (TV) station transmits a signal to a television receiving dish.
The television has an on / off indicator light.
The television is switched on by a remote control which changes the indicator light from red to
green.
Which electromagnetic wave used in these actions has the longest wavelength?
satellite
A receiving
dish
TV
station B remote
TV
control
indicator light
red green
C D
© UCLES 2023 0625/22/F/M/23

9
23 A student makes a list of some applications of waves.
1 medical scanning of soft tissue

2 sterilising water
3 using sonar to calculate ocean depths
Which applications use ultrasound waves?
24 The diagram shows a bar magnet at rest on a smooth horizontal surface. A length of soft-iron
wire is held parallel to the magnet.
soft-iron wire
magnet
S
The wire is released.
What happens?
A The wire moves away from the magnet.

B The wire moves towards the magnet.
C The wire’s centre stays in its present position and the wire rotates through 90° in a clockwise
direction.
D The wire’s centre stays in its present position and the wire rotates through 90° in an
anticlockwise direction.
25 Which diagram shows the electric field pattern and direction around a positive point charge?
A B C D

10
26 A laboratory has a standard wire of known resistance. It also has other wires, made from the
same material as the standard wire, but of different lengths and diameters.
Which wire would definitely have a resistance of less than the standard wire?
wire length wire diameter
A longer larger
B longer smaller
C shorter larger
D shorter smaller
27 The graph shows the relationship between the current in a circuit component and the potential
difference (p.d.) across it. The graph has a straight section and a curved section.
current
0
0 p.d.
What happens to the resistance of the component in these two sections as the current increases?
straight section curved section
A resistance increases resistance decreases

B resistance increases resistance increases
C no change in resistance resistance decreases
D no change in resistance resistance increases
28 The diagram shows part of a circuit.
2.0 : 1.0 :
4.0 :
What is the combined resistance of the resistors?
A 0.14 Ω B 0.57 Ω C 1.7 Ω D 7.0 Ω
© UCLES 2023 0625/22/F/M/23

11
29 The diagram shows a circuit which includes two resistors and a battery.
10 : 30 :
V
6.0 V
The voltmeter reads 6.0 V.
What is the potential difference across the 30 Ω resistor?
A 2.0 V B 6.0 V C 18 V D 24 V
30 A wire is moved down in a direction perpendicular to the magnetic field.
N
S
Three changes are suggested.
1 The speed of the movement of the wire is increased.

2 The magnetic field strength is decreased.
3 The direction of the magnetic field is reversed.
Which changes increase the electromotive force (e.m.f.) induced in the wire?

12
31 A wire is moved across a magnetic field. This causes an induced current in the wire.
The induced current interacts with the magnetic field to produce a force on the wire.
In which direction is this force?
A in the direction of the current

B in the direction of movement of the wire
C in the opposite direction to the current
D in the opposite direction to the movement of the wire
32 A 100% efficient step-down transformer has primary voltage Vp and primary current Ip.
Which row compares the secondary voltage with Vp and the secondary current with Ip?
secondary voltage secondary current
A greater than Vp greater than Ip

B greater than Vp less than Ip
C less than Vp greater than Ip
D less than Vp less than Ip
33 The scattering of α-particles by a thin metal foil supports the nuclear model of an atom.
Why are α-particles used rather than neutrons?
A because they always travel more slowly

B because they are heavier
C because they are larger in diameter
D because they have a positive charge
34 An iron nuclide is represented by the symbol shown.
56
26Fe
Which statements about a nucleus of this iron nuclide are correct?
1 The nucleus contains 56 neutrons.

2 The nucleon number is 30.
3 The proton number is 26.
© UCLES 2023 0625/22/F/M/23

13
35 A sample of a radioactive isotope has an initial rate of emission of 128 counts per minute and a
half-life of 4 days.
How long will it take for the rate of emission to fall to 32 counts per minute?
A 2 days B 4 days C 8 days D 12 days
36 Several scientists are working in a laboratory. The scientists are experimenting with sources
which emit ionising radiation. Each scientist is given a list of safety rules.
Three of the rules are shown.
1 Keep at least 2 m away from other people.

2 Do not stay longer than 4 hours per day in the laboratory.
3 Stay behind the lead-lined screen.
Which safety rules are for protection against the effects of ionising radiation?
37 Which data is needed to calculate the average orbital speed of a satellite around a planet?
the distance of the the period the time for the

the radius
satellite from the of rotation of satellite to orbit
of the planet
centre of the planet the planet the planet once
A
B
C
D
key
= needed
= not needed
38 Approximately how long does it take for the Moon to make one complete orbit of the Earth?
A 24 hours
B 1 month
C 1 season
D 1 year

14
39 The energy generated in stable stars comes from nuclear reactions.
Which type of reaction occurs in the Sun?
A Helium nuclei break up to give hydrogen nuclei.

B Helium nuclei join together to form hydrogen nuclei.
C Hydrogen nuclei break up to give helium nuclei.
D Hydrogen nuclei join together to form helium nuclei.
40 Two quantities define the Hubble constant H0.
● the speed at which the galaxy is moving away from the Earth v
● the distance of the galaxy from the Earth d
What is the relationship between v and d and what is the current estimate for H0?
relationship current estimate for H0
A v is proportional to d 2.2 × 10–18 s–1

1
B v is proportional to 2.2 × 10–18 s–1
d
C v is proportional to d 3.0 × 108 m / s
1
D v is proportional to 3.0 × 108 m / s
d
© UCLES 2023 0625/22/F/M/23

1 B 29 C 1
2 D 30 B 1
3 B 31 D 1
4 A 32 C 1
5 D 33 D 1
6 D 34 D 1
7 B 35 C 1
8 D 36 D 1
9 B 37 B 1
10 A 38 B 1
11 C 39 D 1
12 D 40 A 1
13 C 1
14 D 1
15 D 1
16 C 1
17 C 1
18 C 1
19 C 1
20 C 1
21 D 1
22 A 1
23 C 1
24 B 1
25 A 1
26 C 1
27 D 1
28 C 1

Cambridge IGCSE™
PHYSICS 0625/21
45 minutes

*6091031898*

Soft clean eraser
INSTRUCTIONS
 Take the weight of 1.0 kg to be 9.8 N (acceleration of free fall = 9.8 m / s2).
INFORMATION
IB23 06_0625_21/3RP

2
1 Which vector diagram correctly shows the force Z as the resultant of forces X and Y?
A B C D
Y Y
Z Z
X X
X X
Z Z
Y Y
2 An object falls towards the surface of the Earth.
The object is falling at its terminal velocity.
A There is air resistance and the acceleration of the object is negative.

B There is air resistance and the acceleration of the object is zero.
C There is no air resistance and the acceleration of the object is negative.
D There is no air resistance and the acceleration of the object is zero.
3 The graph represents the motion of a vehicle.
20
speed
m/s
0
0 400
time / s
What is the distance travelled by the vehicle in 400 s?
A 20 m B 400 m C 4000 m D 8000 m
4 On the Earth, a spring stretches by 5.0 cm when a mass of 3.0 kg is suspended from one end.
1
The gravitational field strength on the Moon is of that on the Earth.
6
Which mass, on the Moon, would stretch the spring by the same extension?
A 0.50 kg B 3.0 kg C 5.0 kg D 18 kg
© UCLES 2023 0625/21/M/J/23

3
5 A shopkeeper pours rice into a dish that hangs from a spring balance. He records the reading.
0 1 spring balance
6
5 2
4 3
rice
dish
A customer buys some pasta. The shopkeeper notices that the reading on the spring balance,
with just pasta in the dish, is the same as it was with just rice in the dish.
Which quantity must be the same for the rice and for the pasta?
A density
B temperature
C volume
D weight
6 A student determines the density of an irregularly shaped stone. The stone is slowly lowered into
a measuring cylinder partly filled with water.
measuring
cylinder
stone
Which other apparatus does the student need to calculate the density of the irregularly shaped
stone?
A a balance
B a thermometer
C a metre rule
D a stop-watch

4
7 A train is travelling horizontally in a straight line. A book is on a table in the train.
The diagram shows all the forces acting on the book.
contact force
book frictional
force
table
weight of book
How is the train moving?
A accelerating to the left of the diagram

B accelerating to the right of the diagram
C moving at uniform speed to the left of the diagram
D moving at uniform speed to the right of the diagram
8 The diagrams show four beams, each of negligible weight and freely pivoted.
Which beam is not in equilibrium?
A B
2.0 m 1.0 m 2.0 m 2.0 m
3.0 N pivot 6.0 N 6.0 N pivot 6.0 N
C D
1.0 m 2.0 m 2.0 m 1.0 m 1.0 m
3.0 N pivot 3.0 N 4.0 N pivot 4.0 N 2.0 N
9 An object of mass 1.2 kg is moving with a velocity of 2.0 m / s when it is acted on by a force of
4.0 N. The velocity of the object increases to 5.0 m / s in the same direction.
For which period of time does the force act on the object?
A 0.90 s B 1.1 s C 1.5 s D 3.6 s
© UCLES 2023 0625/21/M/J/23

5
10 Which row about the change of energy in the energy store must be correct?
change of
process energy store
energy in store
A water pumped up to a gravitational potential increases

high-altitude dam energy of water
B water pumped up to a kinetic energy decreases
high-altitude dam of water
C air passes through gravitational potential increases
a wind turbine energy of air
D air passes through kinetic energy increases
a wind turbine of air
11 A woman of mass 50 kg has 81 J of kinetic energy.
What is her speed?
A 1.3 m / s B 1.6 m / s C 1.8 m / s D 3.2 m / s
12 A child runs up a set of stairs four times. The time taken for each run is recorded.
Which time is measured when the child’s useful power is greatest?
A 10 s B 20 s C 30 s D 40 s
13 A dam holds water in a reservoir. The height of the water in the reservoir is 15 m.
dam
water in 15 m
reservoir
The density of water is 1000 kg / m3.
What is the pressure due to the water at the bottom of the dam?
A 6.8 Pa B 1500 Pa C 15 000 Pa D 150 000 Pa
14 A student uses a microscope to observe pollen moving on the surface of water.
Which statement describes the reason for this movement?
A Water molecules are moved by microscopic pollen particles.

B Water molecules are moved by pollen molecules.
C Microscopic pollen particles are moved by water molecules.
D Pollen molecules are moved by water molecules.

6
15 Which statements about evaporation of water are correct?
1 Evaporation causes the remaining liquid to cool.

2 During evaporation, the more energetic particles escape from the surface of the
liquid.
3 Evaporation only happens at 100 C.
16 Some hot water is sealed inside a metal can. The can is in a vacuum in outer space. The hot
water slowly cools down.
How does the thermal energy escape into space?
A by conduction then convection

B by conduction then radiation
C by evaporation then convection
D by evaporation then radiation
17 The diagrams show graphs of displacement against time for four waves. All the graphs are drawn
to the same scale.
Which wave has the largest amplitude and the highest frequency?
A B
displacement displacement
0 0
0 time 0 time
C D
displacement displacement
0 0
0 time 0 time
© UCLES 2023 0625/21/M/J/23

7
18 The diagram shows a ray of light entering a glass block.
air glass
25q
50q
Which calculation gives the refractive index of the glass?

sin 40 sin 40 sin 50 sin 50
A B C D
sin 25 sin 65 sin 25 sin 65
19 An object O is placed at point P near to a thin converging lens. The diagram shows three rays
from the top of O passing through the lens. Each point F is one focal length from the centre of the
lens. Each point 2F is two focal lengths from the centre of the lens.
P 2F Q F F 2F
image
The object O is moved to point Q on the diagram.
Which type of image is produced when the object O is at point Q?
A inverted and the same size as the object

B inverted and enlarged
C upright and the same size as the object
D upright and enlarged

8
20 Which diagram shows the dispersion of white light by a glass prism?
A B
red
red red
white white violet violet
violet
C D
red red
red red
white violet violet white violet violet
21 Visible light has wavelengths in the range 4.0  10–7 m to 7.0  10–7 m.
What is the range of the frequencies of visible light?
A 0.12 Hz to 0.21 Hz
B 120 Hz to 210 Hz
C 4.3  1011 Hz to 7.5  1011 Hz
D 4.3  1014 Hz to 7.5  1014 Hz
22 Student X fires a starting pistol which produces smoke and sound. Student Y is standing 100 m
away and sees the smoke the instant it is produced. The speed of sound in air is 340 m / s.
What is the time delay between student Y seeing the smoke and hearing the sound?
A 0.29 s B 0.59 s C 1.7 s D 3.4 s
© UCLES 2023 0625/21/M/J/23

9
23 An unmagnetised piece of soft iron is placed close to a strong permanent magnet, as shown.
S N X
permanent soft iron
magnet
What is the induced polarity of end X of the soft iron and in which direction does the magnetic
force act on the soft iron?
direction of force
polarity of end X
on the soft iron
A N to the left
B N to the right
C S to the left
D S to the right
24 A plastic rod is rubbed with a cloth.
plastic rod
cloth
The rod and the cloth both become charged as electrons move between them.
The rod becomes negatively charged.
Which diagram shows how the rod becomes negatively charged and shows the final charge on
the cloth?
A B
electron electron
– – movement – movement
– – –
– –
– –– + + + – –– + + +
– – + – – +
+ + ++ + + ++
+ final charge + final charge
on the cloth on the cloth
C D
electron electron
– movement – movement
– – – –
– –
– –– – – – – –– – – –
– – – – – –
– – –– – – ––
– final charge – final charge
on the cloth on the cloth

10
25 A wire has a uniform circular cross-sectional area.
A The resistance of the wire is directly proportional to its cross-sectional area and inversely
proportional to its diameter.
B The resistance of the wire is directly proportional to its cross-sectional area and inversely
proportional to its length.
C The resistance of the wire is directly proportional to its length and inversely proportional to its
D The resistance of the wire is directly proportional to its length and inversely proportional to its
diameter.
26 The diagram shows the current–voltage graph for a metal wire.
current
0
0 voltage
What can be deduced from the graph?
A As voltage increases, the temperature of the wire increases.

B As voltage increases, the temperature of the wire decreases.
C As voltage increases, the resistance of the wire increases.
D As voltage increases, the resistance of the wire remains constant.
27 A battery is connected to a circuit. It is switched on for 1.0 minute. During that time, there is a
current of 0.40 A in the circuit and the battery supplies a total of 48 J of energy.
Which row gives the charge that passes and the electromotive force (e.m.f.) of the battery?
charge that passes e.m.f. of the

in 1.0 minute / C battery / V
A 0.40 2.0
B 0.40 120
C 24 2.0
D 24 120
© UCLES 2023 0625/21/M/J/23

11
28 The circuit diagram shows two identical lamps connected in parallel to a cell. Three ammeters, X,
Y and Z, are also connected in the circuit, as shown.
X
A
Y
A
Z
A
Which statement about the current in X is correct?
A It is equal to the current in Y and to the current in Z.

B It is less than either the current in Y or the current in Z.
C It is equal to the sum of the current in Y and the current in Z.
D It is equal to the difference between the current in Y and the current in Z.
29 A student connects the circuit shown.
bell 2
Which switches must be closed for the bell to ring without lighting the lamp?
A 1 and 2 only B 1 and 3 only C 1, 3 and 4 D 2, 3 and 4

12
30 The diagram shows an a.c. generator.
N S
Y
V
X
The graph shows the potential difference (p.d.) between points X and Y plotted against time. A
positive value of p.d. indicates that X is more positive than Y.
p.d. between
X and Y
0
0 time
Which diagram shows the position of the coil at point P on the graph?
A B C D
Y Y Y Y
X X X X
© UCLES 2023 0625/21/M/J/23

13
31 An electron moves into a uniform magnetic field.
The arrow shows the initial direction of motion of the electron.
The direction of the magnetic field is into the plane of the page.
uniform
magnetic field
electron
In which direction does a force act on the electron when it enters the magnetic field?
A into the page

B out of the page
C towards the bottom of the page
32 Which statement about a transformer is correct?
A There is an alternating current in the iron core from the primary coil to the secondary coil.
B An alternating current in the iron core induces an alternating current in the secondary coil.
C An alternating current in the primary coil induces a direct current in the secondary coil.
D An alternating current in the primary coil induces an alternating voltage across the secondary
coil.
33 How are positive and negative ions formed from atoms?
positive ion negative ion
A add positive charge to the nucleus add an electron to the atom

B add positive charge to the nucleus remove positive charge from the nucleus
C remove an electron from the atom add an electron to the atom
D remove an electron from the atom remove positive charge from the nucleus

14
34 A nucleus of element X is represented as 56 X.

26
Which is an isotope of element X?
A 26 X B 54 X C 56 X D 54 X
56 26 24 28
35 A radioactive source is placed near a detector connected to a counter.
210 counts are recorded by the counter in 3 minutes.
The background count rate is 20 counts per minute (cpm).
What is the corrected count rate for the radioactive source?
A 50 cpm B 70 cpm C 190 cpm D 270 cpm
36 The background count rate measured by a radiation counter is 40 counts per minute (cpm).
With the counter close to a radioactive source, the counter reading is 960 cpm.
The half-life of the source is 20 minutes.
What is the counter reading one hour later?
A 115 cpm B 120 cpm C 155 cpm D 160 cpm
37 Which planet in our Solar System is nearest to the Sun and what is the nature of the planet?
planet nature
A Mercury rocky
B Mercury gaseous
C Venus rocky
D Venus gaseous
38 A space station orbits the Earth at a distance of 7000 km from the Earth’s centre. It makes
15 orbits in every 24-hour period.
What is the speed of the space station in its orbit?
A 2900 km / h B 4400 km / h C 8800 km / h D 27 000 km / h
© UCLES 2023 0625/21/M/J/23

15
39 Which nuclear reaction powers a stable star?
A nuclear fission of nuclei producing hydrogen

B nuclear fission of a uranium nucleus into a krypton nucleus and a barium nucleus
C nuclear fusion of a krypton nucleus and a barium nucleus into a uranium nucleus
D nuclear fusion of hydrogen nuclei producing helium
40 Which stages in the life cycle of a star are listed in the order that they occur?
A interstellar dust cloud  stable star  protostar
B protostar  red giant  stable star
C red giant  white dwarf  protostar
D stable star  red giant  white dwarf
© UCLES 2023 0625/21/M/J/23

CAIE IGCSE Physics
May/June 2
2023
PUBLISHED
1 D 29 B 1
2 B 30 C 1
3 C 31 C 1
4 D 32 D 1
5 D 33 C 1
6 A 34 B 1
7 B 35 A 1
8 C 36 C 1
9 A 37 A 1
10 A 38 D 1
11 C 39 D 1
12 A 40 D 1
13 D 1
14 C 1
15 B 1
16 B 1
17 A 1
18 A 1
19 B 1
20 B 1
21 D 1
22 A 1
23 C 1
24 B 1
25 C 1
26 D 1
27 C 1
28 C 1

Cambridge IGCSE™
PHYSICS 0625/22
45 minutes

*8001247384*

Soft clean eraser
INSTRUCTIONS
• Take the weight of 1.0 kg to be 9.8 N (acceleration of free fall = 9.8 m / s2).
INFORMATION
IB23 06_0625_22/4RP

2
1 Forces of 3 N and 4 N act at right angles, as shown.
X Y
3N
O 4N Z
What is the resultant force?
A 1 N along XZ
B 5 N along XZ
C 5 N along OY
D 7 N along OY
2 A light ball is held at rest at the top of a tall cliff. It is released and falls through the air, eventually
reaching its terminal velocity.
Which row describes the behaviour of the ball as it descends?
the initial the final

acceleration acceleration
of the ball of the ball
A 0 0
B 0 g
C g 0
D g g
© UCLES 2023 0625/22/M/J/23

3
3 The graph represents the motion of a car.
10
speed
m/s 8
0
0 1 2 3 4 5
time / s
How far has the car moved between 0 and 5 s?
A 2m B 10 m C 25 m D 50 m
4 Which statement about mass or weight is not correct?
A Masses can be compared using a balance.

B Mass is a force.
C Weights can be compared using a balance.
D Weight is a force.
5 A sphere P, made of steel, has a weight of 10 N on Earth.
Another sphere Q, also made of steel, has a weight of 10 N on Mars.
The gravitational field strength on Earth is greater than the gravitational field strength on Mars.
A The mass of sphere P is the same as the mass of sphere Q.

B The mass of sphere P is less than the mass of sphere Q.
C On Mars, the weight of sphere P is the same as the weight of sphere Q.
D On Earth, the weight of sphere Q is less than 10 N.
6 Which two quantities must be known to determine the density of a material?
A mass and area

B mass and volume
C weight and area
D weight and volume

4
7 A truck is towing a car along a straight horizontal road at a constant speed.
truck
car
rope
The rope breaks.
Which row gives the direction of the initial acceleration of the truck after the rope breaks and the
reason for the acceleration?
direction of
acceleration reason
of the truck
A left the driving force is greater than

the resistive forces on the truck
B left the driving force is smaller than
C right the driving force is greater than
D right the driving force is smaller than
8 A uniform beam is pivoted at the centre and two identical masses, X and Y, are placed so that the
beam balances.
A smaller mass is then added at the position shown.
position of
small mass
X Y
pivot
How can the masses be positioned so the beam balances again?
A Move X away from the pivot.

B Move X towards the pivot.
C Move Y towards the pivot.
D Move the small mass away from the pivot.
© UCLES 2023 0625/22/M/J/23

5
9 A resultant force of 2.0 N acts on an object of mass 3.0 kg for 6.0 s.
What is the change in velocity of the object?
A 0.25 m / s B 1.0 m / s C 4.0 m / s D 36 m / s
10 The diagram shows the energy stores for a mobile (cell) phone and how the energy is transferred
between stores.
internal
heating
energy
chemical
?
energy kinetic
sound
energy
What describes how the chemical energy is transferred?
A electrical work done

B mechanical work done
C electromagnetic waves
D sound waves
11 A wind turbine is 30% efficient and has an output of 2.5 MW of electrical power.
What is the power input to the turbine?
A 0.75 MW B 8.3 MW C 75 MW D 83 MW
12 Which two physical quantities must be used to calculate the power developed by a student
running up a flight of steps?
A force exerted and the vertical height of the steps only

B force exerted and the time taken only
C work done and the vertical height of the steps only
D work done and the time taken only
13 The density of sea water is 1030 kg / m3.
The gravitational field strength on the Earth is 9.8 N / kg.
Atmospheric pressure is 101 000 Pa.
At which depth in sea water is the total pressure due to the atmosphere and the water equal to
513 000 Pa?
A 40.8 m B 50.8 m C 400 m D 498 m

6
14 Four students describe the phrase ‘absolute zero’ during a lesson on the particle model.
Which student is correct?
A This is the lowest possible temperature.

B Particles in a solid start vibrating.
C Particles do not have any weight.
D Particles have the least gravitational potential energy.
15 Four students are asked to state and explain the relative magnitudes of the thermal expansion of
solids and gases.
Which student is correct?
A Gases expand more than solids because the molecules in a gas are in random motion.
B Gases expand more than solids because the attractive forces between molecules are much
weaker in gases.
C Solids expand more than gases because the molecules are closer together in solids.
D Solids expand more than gases because the molecules in a solid are in a regular pattern.
16 Four cups A, B, C and D contain hot coffee.
Which cup keeps the coffee warm the longest?
the outside
the top of the cup
surface of the cup
A black covered with a lid

B black no lid
C white covered with a lid
D white no lid
© UCLES 2023 0625/22/M/J/23

7
8 cm
3 cm
6 cm
4 cm
A 3 4
B 3 8
C 6 4
D 6 8
18 Optical fibres are used to transmit digital signals using infrared radiation.
The average refractive index of the fibres is 1.50.
Which row describes a digital signal and gives the speed of infrared radiation in the fibres?
speed of infrared radiation in the fibres

digital signal
m/s
A a signal that consists 2.0 × 108
of only two values
B a signal that consists 4.5 × 108
of only two values
C a signal that consists of 2.0 × 108
a continuous range of values
D a signal that consists of 4.5 × 108
a continuous range of values

8
19 Which statement describes monochromatic light?
A light of a single frequency

B light transmitted by a transparent prism
C visible light
D white light
20 A beam of light consists of yellow and blue light.
The beam of light is incident on a glass prism.
Which diagram is correct?
A B
yellow blue
blue yellow
glass prism glass prism
C D
glass prism glass prism

blue yellow
yellow blue
21 A radio station broadcasts a signal with a frequency of 89 MHz.
What is the wavelength of this signal?
A 3.7 µm B 3.4 m C 3.7 km D 3.4 Mm
22 A boy shouts and hears the echo from a tall building 2.2 s later.
The speed of sound in air is 330 m / s.
How far away from the boy is the building?
A 150 m B 300 m C 360 m D 730 m
© UCLES 2023 0625/22/M/J/23

9
23 The magnetic field of a bar magnet can be represented by magnetic field lines.
Which diagram shows two magnetic field lines correctly?
A B C D
N S N S N S N S

25 Which statement about electric current in a conductor is correct?
A In a d.c. circuit, the electric current gradually decreases along the conductor.
B In a d.c. circuit, the free electrons flow back and forth.
C In an a.c. circuit, the electric current remains exactly the same all the time.
D In an a.c. circuit, the flow of charge changes direction continually.
26 A piece of metal wire X with a uniform diameter has resistance R.
A second piece of wire Y is made of the same metal and has a uniform diameter.
Y has double the cross-sectional area of X and half the length of X.
What is the resistance of Y?

R R
A B C R D 4R
4 2

10
27 An electric fire is connected to a 240 V supply and transfers energy at a rate of 1.0 kW.
How much charge passes through the fire in 1.0 h?
A 42 C B 250 C C 1.5 × 104 C D 2.4 × 105 C
28 Two lamps are connected in parallel.
S1 S2
S3
Which switches must be closed so that both lamps light?
A S1 and S2 only
B S1 and S3 only
C S2 and S3 only
D S1, S2 and S3
29 The diagram shows a circuit that switches on a lamp when there is a change in the environment.
Which change in the environment causes the lamp to be switched on?
A a decrease in light intensity

B a decrease in temperature
C an increase in light intensity
D an increase in temperature
© UCLES 2023 0625/22/M/J/23

11
30 A step-down transformer is 100% efficient. It has an input voltage of 240 V a.c. and an output
voltage of 60 V a.c.
The current in the primary coil is 0.50 A.
What is the current in the secondary coil?
A 0.13 A B 0.50 A C 2.0 A D 8.0 A
31 The diagram shows the pattern of the magnetic field due to the current I in a straight wire.
I
Y
Q P
relative
direction of field
strength of field
A X greater at P than Q
B Y greater at P than Q
C X greater at Q than P
D Y greater at Q than P
32 In which device is the magnetic effect of a current not used?
A electromagnet
B loudspeaker
C potential divider
D relay

12
33 Fission and fusion are two types of nuclear process.
How does the total mass of the nuclides produced compare with the total mass of the original
nuclide or nuclides in these nuclear processes?
total mass of fission total mass of fusion

products compared products compared
to original nuclide to original nuclides
A same same
B more less
C less more
D less less
34 The table shows the composition of three different nuclei.
number of number of
nucleus
protons neutrons
X 3 3
Y 3 4
Z 4 3
Which nuclei are isotopes of the same element?
A X, Y and Z B X and Y only C X and Z only D Y and Z only
35 Which change occurs in the nucleus of a radioactive atom during β-emission?
A A neutron transforms into a proton and an electron.

B A neutron transforms into a proton only.
C A proton transforms into a neutron and an electron.
D A proton transforms into a neutron only.
© UCLES 2023 0625/22/M/J/23

13
36 A radioactive isotope has a half-life of 8 days.
A detector close to a sample of this isotope gives a count rate of 200 counts per minute.
Without the source, the background count is 20 counts per minute.
What is the count rate due to the source after 8 days?

37 Which statement about the Solar System is correct?
A All the planets are rocky.

B Only the Earth has a moon.
C Pluto is a dwarf planet.
D There are many stars in the Solar System.
38 Comets are bodies which orbit the Sun in the Solar System.
What is the shape of the orbit and how is the Sun positioned within the orbit?
shape of orbit position of the Sun
A circular centre of orbit

B circular not at centre of orbit
C elliptical centre of orbit
D elliptical not at centre of orbit
39 Which nuclear reaction produces the release of energy to power a star?
A nuclear fission of helium into hydrogen

B nuclear fission of hydrogen into helium
C nuclear fusion of helium into hydrogen
D nuclear fusion of hydrogen into helium

14
40 What is the definition of the Hubble constant?
A the ratio of the speed at which a galaxy is receding from the Earth to its distance from the
Earth
B the value of the change in wavelength of the galaxy’s starlight due to redshift
C the constant used to represent the rate of expansion of the Universe in all directions
D the estimated constant equal to the age of the Universe
© UCLES 2023 0625/22/M/J/23

CAIE IGCSE Physics
May/June 2
2023
PUBLISHED
1 C 29 D 1
2 C 30 C 1
3 C 31 D 1
4 B 32 C 1
5 B 33 D 1
6 B 34 B 1
7 C 35 A 1
8 B 36 B 1
9 C 37 C 1
10 A 38 D 1
11 B 39 D 1
12 D 40 A 1
13 A 1
14 A 1
15 B 1
16 C 1
17 B 1
18 A 1
19 A 1
20 D 1
21 B 1
22 C 1
23 A 1
24 C 1
25 D 1
26 A 1
27 C 1
28 D 1

Cambridge IGCSE™
PHYSICS 0625/23
45 minutes

*9942443931*

Soft clean eraser
INSTRUCTIONS
 Take the weight of 1.0 kg to be 9.8 N (acceleration of free fall = 9.8 m / s2).
INFORMATION
IB23 06_0625_23/4RP

2
1 The speed–time graph shows the motion of an object.
5
speed
m/s
0
0 5 10 15 20 25
time / s
How far does the object travel at constant speed?
A 25 m B 50 m C 75 m D 125 m
2 Which statement about a falling object accelerating close to the Earth’s surface is correct?
A The weight of the object is increasing and the force of air resistance on the object is
decreasing.
B The weight of the object and the force of air resistance on the object are of equal magnitude,
but act in opposite directions.
C The weight of the object is constant, but the force of air resistance on the object is increasing.
D The weight of the object is less than the force of air resistance.
3 An aircraft is moving at 60 m / s in a northerly direction when a cross-wind from the east starts to
blow. The speed of the wind is 13 m / s.
What is the magnitude of the aircraft’s velocity when the wind is blowing?
A 47 m / s B 59 m / s C 61 m / s D 73 m / s
4 Two rectangular blocks consist of different materials.
Four different methods are suggested to compare the two masses.
1 Compare the accelerations with which they fall freely.
2 Compare the values of their lengths  breadths  heights.

3 Hang each in turn from the same spring. Compare the extensions.
4 Place one in the right-hand pan of a beam balance and the other in the left-hand
pan.
Which methods give a comparison of the two masses?
A 1, 2 and 3 B 1 and 2 only C 3 and 4 only D 4 only
© UCLES 2023 0625/23/M/J/23

3
5 An object in a space probe above the Earth weighs 3.5 N. The gravitational field strength at the
height of the space probe is 7.0 N / kg.
The gravitational field strength on the Earth’s surface is 9.8 N / kg.
What are the mass and the weight of the object on the Earth’s surface?
A 0.50 3.5
B 0.50 4.9
C 2.0 3.5
D 2.0 20
6 A cyclist is travelling in a straight line along a horizontal road at a constant speed.
A constant driving force F acts on the cyclist in the forward direction shown.
Which statement about the magnitude of the frictional forces acting on the cyclist is correct?
A The magnitude is equal to F.

B The magnitude is smaller than F, but greater than zero.
C The magnitude is greater than F.
D The magnitude is zero.
7 A spring has an unstretched length of 3.0 cm. When a force of 60 N is applied to the spring, its
length increases to 5.0 cm. The limit of proportionality is not exceeded.
What is the spring constant of the spring?
A 7.5 N / cm B 12 N / cm C 20 N / cm D 30 N / cm

4
8 The diagram shows the minimum force F1 acting vertically on a lever required to lift a heavy log of
weight W.
lever
pivot F1
log
The log needs to be lifted by a smaller force than F1. The diagrams show the changes tried. Each
diagram has only one change from the original diagram. In each case, F2 is the minimum force
required to lift the log.
P Q
lever lever
F2
pivot pivot F2
log log
W increasing the length of the W applying the force

lever to the right of the pivot perpendicular to the lever
R
lever
pivot
F2
log
W increasing the distance

from the log to the pivot
In which situations will F2 be smaller than F1?
A P, Q and R B P and Q only C P only D Q and R only
9 A ball of mass 0.25 kg hits a wall at a speed of 16 m / s. It then rebounds back along its original
path at a speed of 12 m / s.
What is the impulse experienced by the ball during its impact with the wall?
A 1.0 N s B 3.0 N s C 4.0 N s D 7.0 N s
© UCLES 2023 0625/23/M/J/23

5
10 A bicycle braking system transfers energy from a kinetic energy store to an internal energy store.
A motor converts energy from a chemical energy store (battery) to a kinetic energy store.
What enables these energy transfers?
braking system motor
A electrical work mechanical work

B electrical work electrical work
C mechanical work mechanical work
D mechanical work electrical work
11 Research is being carried out to produce electrical energy from the fusion of hydrogen nuclei.
Which row shows two of the problems in designing a fusion reactor?
temperature why obtaining a high density

needed of hydrogen nuclei is difficult
A very low the nuclei are negatively charged

and repel each other
B very low the nuclei are positively charged
C very high the nuclei are negatively charged
D very high the nuclei are positively charged
12 The engine of a motor vehicle develops a large power.
A The driving force acting on the vehicle must be large.

B The engine must have a very large volume.
C The engine must transfer large amounts of energy each second.
D The vehicle must be very fast.

6
13 The graph shows how the pressure due to a liquid varies with the depth beneath the liquid
surface.
The gravitational field strength g is 9.8 N / kg.
8000
pressure due to
the liquid / Pa 6000
4000
2000
0
0.00 0.10 0.20 0.30 0.40 0.50 0.60 0.70 0.80
depth beneath the
liquid surface / m
A 200 kg / m3 B 820 kg / m3 C 2000 kg / m3 D 8200 kg / m3
14 What is the lowest possible temperature (absolute zero) and what happens to the energy of
particles at this temperature?
lowest possible
particle energy
temperature / C
A –273 particles have least kinetic energy

B –273 particles have zero gravitational potential energy
C 0 particles have least kinetic energy
D 0 particles have zero gravitational potential energy
15 Which statement about the particles of a substance after condensation is correct?
A They are close to each other and slide over each other.
B They are close to each other and vibrate about fixed points.
C They are far apart from each other and vibrate about fixed points.
D They are far apart from each other and move freely within the container.
© UCLES 2023 0625/23/M/J/23

7
16 Two otherwise identical cars, one black and one white, are at the same initial temperature. The
cars are left in bright sunshine and their temperatures increase. During the night, their
temperatures decrease.
Which car shows the greater rate of temperature increase and which car shows the greater rate
of temperature decrease?
greater rate of greater rate of

temperature temperature
increase decrease
A black black
B black white
C white black
D white white
17 A drop of water from a tap falls onto the surface of some water of constant depth.
view from above
Water waves spread out on the surface of the water.
A The waves are longitudinal and travel at the same speed in all directions.
B The waves are longitudinal and travel more quickly in one direction than in others.
C The waves are transverse and travel at the same speed in all directions.
D The waves are transverse and travel more quickly in one direction than in others.

8
18 Each point F is one focal length from the centre of the lens. Each point 2F is two focal lengths
from the centre of the lens.
Which diagram shows a converging lens being used as a magnifying glass?
A B
object F 2F object F 2F
2F F image 2F F
image
C D
image at
infinity image
object F 2F object F 2F
2F F 2F F
parallel
rays
19 A monochromatic ray of green light in air enters a block of glass.
Which property of the ray of light always remains the same as it moves from air to glass?
A wavelength
B speed
C frequency
D direction
© UCLES 2023 0625/23/M/J/23

9
20 A narrow beam of white light passes through a prism and is dispersed into a spectrum.
1
white 2
light 3
colour 1 colour 2 colour 3
A blue yellow red

B red blue yellow
C red yellow blue
D yellow blue red
21 A student writes four statements matching a communication system to the region of the
electromagnetic spectrum that it uses to transmit signals.
A Wireless internet uses visible wavelengths.

B Mobile phones use X-rays.
C Cable television uses infrared wavelengths.
D Bluetooth uses ultraviolet wavelengths.
22 A ship sounds its horn when it is 790 m from a cliff. A passenger on the ship hears the echo 4.8 s
later.
What is the speed of the sound?
A 165 m / s B 330 m / s C 340 m / s D 1896 m / s
23 Which row gives the metal used to make the core of an electromagnet and one property of the
electromagnet?
metal property
A iron permanent magnet

B iron temporary magnet
C steel permanent magnet
D steel temporary magnet

10
24 A plastic rod and a dry cloth are uncharged.
The rod is now rubbed with the cloth and they both become charged. The rod becomes
negatively charged because some charged particles move from the cloth to the rod.
What is the charge on the cloth and which particles moved in the charging process?
charge particles
on cloth that moved
A negative electrons
B negative neutrons
C positive electrons
D positive neutrons
25 A student does an experiment to investigate the resistance of a metal wire.
The graph shows the results from the experiment.
resistance
0
0 x
What is plotted on the x-axis?
A diameter of the wire

B length of the wire
C temperature of the wire
D current in the wire
26 The cost of electrical energy is $0.25 for each unit of 1 kW h. A 2200 W heater is switched on for
48 minutes.
What is the cost of this use?
A $0.44 B $0.55 C $26 D $440
© UCLES 2023 0625/23/M/J/23

11
27 The table describes four different resistance wires. They are all made from the same metal.
Which wire has the smallest resistance?
length of diameter of
wire / m wire / mm
A 2.0 1.0
B 2.0 1.5
C 3.0 1.0
D 3.0 1.5
28 The circuit shown contains three switches and four lamps P, Q, R and S.
switch 1
lamp P
lamp Q
switch 2
lamp R
switch 3
lamp S
Which switches must be closed to light only lamps P and R?
A switch 1 only
B switch 1 and switch 2
C switch 1 and switch 3
D switch 2 and switch 3

12
29 The diagram shows the magnetic field around a solenoid carrying an electric current.
magnetic field
What happens to the strength of the magnetic field and the distance between the field lines when
the current is increased?
strength of distance between

magnetic field field lines
30 The diagram shows a wire hanging freely between the poles of a magnet. There is a current in
the wire in the direction shown.
wire
S N
current
The magnet and current cause a force to act on the wire.
In which direction does this force act?
A into the page (away from you)

B out of the page (toward you)
C to the left
D to the right
© UCLES 2023 0625/23/M/J/23

13
31 Which component forms part of a d.c. motor but not a simple moving coil a.c. generator?
A the coil
B the brushes
C the magnet
D the split-ring commutator
32 A transformer has 5500 turns on the primary coil and 500 turns on the secondary coil.
The output of the secondary coil is 110 V a.c. and is connected to a heater. The transformer is
100% efficient.
The heater produces a power of 132 W.
What is the current in the primary coil?
A 0.11 A B 0.12 A C 11 A D 12 A
33 The scattering of alpha-particles from a thin gold foil produces the following observations.
● Most of the alpha-particles pass through the foil.

● Most of the alpha-particles are virtually undeflected.
● A small fraction of the alpha-particles are deflected through large angles.
● A very small fraction of the alpha-particles bounce back from the foil.
Which conclusion does not follow from these observations?
A Most of the mass of the gold atom is in its nucleus.

B Most of the atom is empty space.
C The nucleus consists of protons and neutrons.
D The nucleus must be charged.
34 A nuclide of chlorine has the symbol shown.
35
17 Cl
What is the nucleon number of this nuclide of chlorine?
A 17 B 18 C 35 D 52

14
35 Which change is occurring in a nucleus during -emission?
A An electron and a neutron become one proton.

B An electron and a proton become one neutron.
C A neutron becomes one proton and one electron.
D A proton becomes one neutron and one electron.
50
count rate
40
counts / minute
30
20
10
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
time / days
37 Which row about the orbits of the Earth and the Moon is correct?
approximate time approximate time

for the Earth for the Moon
to orbit the Sun to orbit the Earth
A 1 day 30 days
B 30 days 1 day
C 365 days 1 day
D 365 days 30 days
38 Which statement about the orbits of comets is correct?
A Comets have elliptical orbits and the Sun is at the centre of the orbit.
B Comets have elliptical orbits and the Sun is not at the centre of the orbit.
C Comets have circular orbits and the Sun is at the centre of the orbit.
D Comets have circular orbits and the Sun is not at the centre of the orbit.
© UCLES 2023 0625/23/M/J/23

15
39 Which row describes the power source for a stable star?
type of
fuel
nuclear reaction
A fission hydrogen
B fission uranium
C fusion hydrogen
D fusion uranium
40 Which quantity can be determined using the brightness of a supernova in a distant galaxy?
A the speed at which the galaxy is moving away from the Earth
B the distance of the galaxy from the Earth
C the Hubble constant
D the age of the Universe
© UCLES 2023 0625/23/M/J/23

CAIE IGCSE Physics
May/June 2
2023
PUBLISHED
1 B 29 C 1
2 C 30 A 1
3 C 31 D 1
4 C 32 A 1
5 B 33 C 1
6 A 34 C 1
7 D 35 C 1
8 B 36 A 1
9 D 37 D 1
10 D 38 B 1
11 D 39 C 1
12 C 40 B 1
13 B 1
14 A 1
15 A 1
16 A 1
17 C 1
18 D 1
19 C 1
20 C 1
21 C 1
22 B 1
23 B 1
24 C 1
25 A 1
26 A 1
27 B 1
28 A 1

FAISALABAD AIRPORT ROAD
ZIA BOOK SELLER
D-Ground Commercial Area.
041-8732670
EXCELLENCE ACADEMY BAHRIA TOWN

Hayatabad Road, Peshawar
0300-9599476
AL-KITAB CENTRE
21-A, Urdu Bazar. 0333-2113811 DHA
JOHAR BOOK POINT JUMBO BOOKS
Shop# 5, Phase-II, Johar Chewarangi, 38-G, H Block Market, Phase I,
Block 17, Gulistan-e-Johar. 0311-2639233 DHA Lahore. 0423-5690837 / 0335-8328115
HAFEEZ TRADER JOHAR TOWN

Chowk Ghanta Ghar, Sialkot Can .
0321-6106213
NEWS CORNER
C- Block Gulgasht Colony Multan.
061-6522950
BOOK TOWN
G1-Market Johar Town. 042-35316355
MULTAN KITAB GHAR JAHANGIR SON’S
Block M Phase 2 Johar Town.
Gol Bagh, 2 Bosan Road, CRESCENT BOOKS UNIFORM & GIFT SHOP
Gulgasht Colony Multan 25 F1 1st ﬂoor, Ehsan Plaza, Main Blvd,
061-6750226 Phase 1 Johar Town. 0423-5291887
GULBERG
SHOP N SAVE ANEES BOOK CORNER
B-Block Market Satellite Town. Main Market Gulberg, 042-35751683
055-3733767
BOOK SOURCE
SHOPING CENTRE 6-E Main Market, Near Fazaldin Medicine,
B-Block Market Satellite Town. Gulberg II, Lahore. 0423-5771608 / 0300-4440687
055-3840735
BARKAT MARKET
BOOK FAIR STAPLES BOOK STORE
8A, Babar Block New Garden Town.
12-D Jinnah Supper Market F7 Islamabad. 042-35941011
051-2650080 / 051-2650595
URDU BAZAR FAISAL TOWN

SIDDIQUI BOOK HOUSE
ILMI BOOK HOUSE Faisal Town Kotha Pind. 042-35162833
Main Urdu bazar. 0423-7324718

0625 Paper 2 2018-2023

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

0625 Paper 2 2018-2023

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

0625 Paper 2 2018-2023

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

CAMBRIDGE

Assessment International Education

Cambridge International Examinations

Soft pencil (type B or HB recommended)

READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST

Write in soft pencil.

Read the instructions on the Answer Sheet very carefully.

This document consists of 15 printed pages and 1 blank page.

for Books and Binders Order: 03214567519 | 0315 4567519 | 03134567519

2 A parachutist is falling through the air at terminal velocity.

Which statement about the parachutist is correct?

3 The curved line on the graph shows the motion of a car.

What is the acceleration of the car at the time of 4.0 s?

A 0.33 m / s2 B 0.44 m / s2 C 2.3 m / s2 D 3.0 m / s2

© UCLES 2018 0625/22/F/M/18

for Books and Binders Order: 03214567519 | 0315 4567519 | 03134567519

In which direction does air resistance act on the bird?

5 The gravitational field strength on the Moon is 1.6 N / kg.

An astronaut has a mass of 75 kg.

What is the weight of the astronaut on the Moon?

6 A measuring cylinder contains 30 cm3 of a liquid.

The reading on the balance increases by 30 g.

What is the density of the liquid?

A 0.60 g / cm3 B 0.67 g / cm3 C 1.5 g / cm3 D 1.7 g / cm3

© UCLES 2018 0625/22/F/M/18 [Turn over

A 1.0 N B 2.5 N C 3.6 N D 8.3 N

8 A uniform rod XY of weight 2.0 N has a length of 80 cm.

A student hangs a 6.0 N weight on the rod so that it is in equilibrium.

What is the distance of the 6.0 N weight from end X?

Three forces P, Q and R act on the plank.

How are the sizes of the forces related?

© UCLES 2018 0625/22/F/M/18

for Books and Binders Order: 03214567519 | 0315 4567519 | 03134567519

Which energy changes occur?

A gravitational potential energy → internal energy → kinetic energy

B gravitational potential energy → kinetic energy → internal energy

C kinetic energy → gravitational potential energy → internal energy

D kinetic energy → internal energy → gravitational potential energy

12 A student cycles along a level road at a speed of 5.0 m / s.

The total mass of the student and bicycle is 120 kg.

What is the average braking force?

A 150 N B 300 N C 15 000 N D 30 000 N

water level at P water level at Q

© UCLES 2018 0625/22/F/M/18 [Turn over

What can be deduced about the pressure of gas X?

before opening tap after opening tap

A less than atmospheric pressure more than atmospheric pressure

16 Liquid evaporates from a beaker.

© UCLES 2018 0625/22/F/M/18

for Books and Binders Order: 03214567519 | 0315 4567519 | 03134567519

17 Which quantity does not change when there is an increase in temperature?

A the density of a steel block C the length of an iron rod

18 A thermocouple is used to measure temperature.

Which is an advantage of using a thermocouple instead of a liquid-in-glass thermometer?

A It can measure temperature in the range –10 °C to 110 °C.

19 A block of copper has a mass of 2.0 kg.

The block of copper absorbs 12 000 J thermal energy.

The specific heat capacity of copper is 385 J / (kg °C).

What is the temperature rise of the copper?

A 15.6 °C B 31.2 °C C 46.8 °C D 62.4 °C